Source document: https://docs-lawep.s3.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/1698929492543.pdf (Trinidad and Tobago)
Government of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS REPORT 2014 Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development - September, 2014. i Table of Contents List of Tables .............................................................................................................................. vi List of Charts .............................................................................................................................. vi Appendices ................................................................................................................................ vii Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................ viii FOREWORD.............................................................................................................................. xi PREFACE ................................................................................................................................. xvi EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ........................................................................................................ 1 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................... 19 Background ............................................................................................................................................... 19 The Trinidad and Tobago Context
 ............................................................................................................. 19 Enabling Policy Environment – Current Context ....................................................................................... 23 Methodology for MDG Report .................................................................................................................. 30 GOAL 1 Eradicate Extreme Poverty and Hunger................................................................. 34 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 34 Target: Halve Between 1990 And 2015 the Proportion of People Whose Income is Less Than US$1.00 Per Day ...................................................................................................................................................... 37 Poverty by Region ................................................................................................................................. 38 Poverty by Sex ....................................................................................................................................... 41 Poverty by Ethnicity .............................................................................................................................. 42 Target: Achieve Full and Productive Employment and Decent Work for All, Including Women and Young People
 ....................................................................................................................................................... 43 Target: Halve between 1990 and 2015 the proportion of people who suffer from hunger .................... 46 Breaking the Cycle of Poverty ................................................................................................................... 47 The Way Forward ...................................................................................................................................... 49 Restructuring the economy to provide meaningful income earning opportunities ............................. 49 i Increased Access to Adequate and Affordable Housing, Education and Training and other Key Social Services ................................................................................................................................................. 50 Strengthened Social Capital at the Community Level ........................................................................... 53 Building Human Capital through Education and Skills Development ................................................... 54 GOAL 2 Achieve Universal Pre-School, Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Education .... 57 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 57 Pre-Primary Education
 .............................................................................................................................. 60 Primary Education ..................................................................................................................................... 61 Universal Primary Education: how it was achieved .............................................................................. 62 Assuring Quality and Relevant Education ............................................................................................. 64 Special Education: meeting the needs of differently-abled students ................................................... 66 Secondary Education ................................................................................................................................ 66 Universal Secondary Education: a bold and courageous undertaking ................................................. 67 Education and the New Economy ......................................................................................................... 69 Technical Vocational Education– Caribbean Vocational Qualification ................................................. 70 Tertiary Education ..................................................................................................................................... 71 Technical Vocational Education and Training (TVET): more than just a second chance ...................... 72 Literacy in Trinidad and Tobago
 ................................................................................................................ 73 The Way Forward ...................................................................................................................................... 74 GOAL 3 Promote Gender Equality and Empower Women ................................................. 80 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 80 Target: Eliminate gender disparity in primary and secondary education, preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education no later than 2015 ..................................................................................................... 82 Labour Force Participation by Sex and Age .......................................................................................... 84 Domestic Violence – a Barrier to Self-Actualisation ................................................................................. 87 Male Marginalisation – An Emerging Issue?
............................................................................................. 88 Lower Wage and Labour Market Participation Rates for Women ........................................................... 88 The Way Forward ...................................................................................................................................... 89 ii Eliminating Violence against Women ................................................................................................... 89 Developing and Implementing Gender Policy Initiatives ...................................................................... 90 Addressing Male Performance in Education ......................................................................................... 91 Promoting Equal Work for Equal Pay .................................................................................................... 91 Gender Equality and Empowerment through Legislation and Law Enforcement ................................ 92 GOAL 4 Reduce Child Mortality ............................................................................................ 96 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 96 Target: Reduce by two thirds, between 1990 and 2015 the under-five mortality rate ........................... 97 Under-Five Mortality Rate by Sex and Administrative Area ................................................................. 99 Causes of Child Mortality .................................................................................................................... 101 Further Reducing Infant Mortality .......................................................................................................... 105 The Way Forward .................................................................................................................................... 105 Addressing Child Abuse and Neglect
 .................................................................................................. 106 A Deeper Understanding of Under-Five Mortality related issues ...................................................... 106 Improved Maternal and Child Care ..................................................................................................... 106 GOAL 5 Improve Maternal Health....................................................................................... 110 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 110 Target: Reduce by three quarters, between 1990 and 2015, the maternal mortality ratio .................. 111 Target: Achieve by 2015 Universal access to reproductive health ......................................................... 114 Sustaining Reductions in the MMR ......................................................................................................... 116 The Way Forward .................................................................................................................................... 116 GOAL 6 Combat HIV/AIDS, Dengue, Diabetes and Hypertension ................................... 120 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 120 Target: Have halted by 2015, and begun to reverse, the spread of HIV/AIDS ....................................... 122 Target: Achieve by 2010, universal access to treatment for HIV/AIDS for all those who need it .......... 127 Target: Have halted by 2015, and begun to reverse, the incidence of Malaria, Tuberculosis, Dengue, Diabetes and Hypertension .................................................................................................................... 129 Modifying Behaviour and Attitudes towards HIV/AIDS and other Lifestyle-related Diseases ...............
 133 iii The Way Forward .................................................................................................................................... 134 Reversing the Spread of HIV/AIDS and the Incidence of other Major Diseases ................................. 134 Expansion and Strengthening of Health Care Services ....................................................................... 136 Education and Awareness Campaigns and Programmes .................................................................... 136 Policy Development and Legislative Changes ..................................................................................... 137 GOAL 7 Ensure Environmental Sustainability ................................................................... 141 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 141 Target: Integrate the principles of sustainable development into country policies and programmes and reverse the loss of environmental resources ......................................................................................... 145 Target: Reduce biodiversity loss, achieving, by 2010, a significant reduction in the rate of loss .......... 151 Target: Halve, by 2015, the proportion of people without sustainable access to drinking water and basic sanitation ....................................................................................................................................... 154 Target: By 2020, to have achieved a significant improvement in the lives of at least 100 million slum dwellers ................................................................................................................................................... 156 Climate Change and Trinidad and Tobago’s Mitigation Response ......................................................... 158 The Way Forward
158 The Way Forward .................................................................................................................................... 160 Balancing Economic Development and Environmental Conservation................................................ 160 Moving towards Environmental Sustainability ................................................................................... 161 GOAL 8 Develop a Global Partnership for Development .................................................. 167 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 167 Target: Develop further an open, rule-based, predictable, non-discriminatory trading and financial system 169 Target: Official Development Assistance ................................................................................................ 171 Target: Address the special needs of least developed countries ............................................................ 173 Target: Address the special needs of landlocked developing countries and Small Island Developing States ...................................................................................................................................................... 175 Target: Deal comprehensively with the Debt problems through national and international measures to make it sustainable in the long term ......................................................................................................... 177 Target: In cooperation with pharmaceutical companies, provide access to affordable essential drugs in developing countries............................................................................................................................... 178 iv Target: In cooperation with the private sector, make available the benefits of new technologies, especially information and communications
 .............................................................................................................. 179 The Way Forward .................................................................................................................................... 181 APPENDICES ......................................................................................................................... 182 v List of Tables 1.1 1.2 2.1 Indigence and Poverty Lines for Trinidad and Tobago Poverty Measurements (1992 - 2009) Annual Government Expenditure on Education/Training, National Security and Health for Fiscal Years 2009/2010 – 2013/2014 Performance of Primary Schools in the National Test (2011 - 2012) Performance of Students at the CAPE (2008-2012) 2.2 2.3 Number and Percentage of Students to Repeat SEA (2008 - 2012) 2.4 4.1 Child Immunization Schedule of Trinidad and Tobago Person in Attendance at Live Birth (1999 - 2008) 5.1 6.1 HIV Prevalence within Population 15-24 Years (Per 100,000 Persons) (2009- 2011) 7.1 Multilateral Environmental Agreements Ratified by Trinidad and Tobago, with the Ministry of Environment and Water Resources and Ministry of Food Production as responsible Agencies Sector Policy Instruments Proportion of Fish Stocks within Safe Biological Limits Proportion of Terrestrial and Marine Area Protected to Maintain Biological Diversity Threatened species in Trinidad and Tobago in 2013 (totals by taxonomic group) 7.5 7.6 Number of Squatter Dwelling Units
 in Regional Corporations and Municipalities 7.2 7.3 7.4 of Trinidad 8.1 Grant Resources Allocated To Trinidad and Tobago From 1975 8.2 ODA received by Trinidad and Tobago/GNI 8.3 Debt Relief Provided by Trinidad and Tobago List of Charts Poverty by Ethnicity 1.3 Poverty and Sex 1.4 1.5 Growth Rate of GDP per Person Employed (1990 - 2011) 1.6 Employment to Population Ratio (1990 - 2011) 1.7 Proportion of Own-Accounts and Contributing Family Workers in Total Employment, Both Sexes and Overall Unemployment
 Rate (1990 - 2011) 2.1 Net Enrolment Ratio in Primary Education by Sex (1990 - 2009) 2.2 Proportion of Pupils Starting Grade I (First Year) who Reach Grade 7 (Standard 5) (1990 - 2008) Pupil/ Teacher Ratio at Primary and Secondary Levels (2000 - 2009) Proportion of Seats Held by Women in National Parliament 2.3 3.1 4.1 Under-Five Mortality Rate (1990-2008) 4.2 Under-Five Mortality Rate by Sex vi Infant, Neonatal and Post-neonatal Mortality Rates Top Causes of Infant Deaths (1990 - 2008) Top Causes of Deaths of Children, 1-4 Year-Olds (2004 - 2008) 4.3 Under-Five Mortality Rate by Administrative Area 4.4 Under-Five, Infant and 1-4 Year-Old Mortality Rates 4.5 4.6 4.7 5.1 Maternal Mortality Ratio (1990 - 2010) 5.2 Causes of Maternal Mortality (2004 - 2008) 5.3 Maternal Mortality and Age Group of Mothers (2004 - 2008) 5.4 Occurrence of Live Births (2003 - 2008) 6.1 New HIV Positive Cases at Public Health Locations (1990 - 2012) 6.2 Number of Deaths Due to AIDS (1990 - 2012) 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 Dengue Mortality Rate (Per 100,000 Mid-year population) 6.8 Incidence of Diabetes & Hypertension (1996 - 2006) 6.9 Death Rates Associated with Hypertension per 100,000 Mid-year Population Proportion of Pregnant Women Receiving ARV Therapy (2005 - 2009) Incidence of Malaria (2008 - 2011) Tuberculosis Death Rate (2006 - 2011) Incidence of Dengue Fever (1990 - 2012) (1996 - 2008) 6.10 Death Rates Associated with Diabetes per 100,000 Mid-year Population (1996 - 2008) Proportion of
 Land Area Covered by Forests (1996 - 2012) 7.1 7.2 CO2 Emissions per Capita (Metric Tonnes) (1990 - 2009) 7.3 Distribution of CO2 emissions across sectors in Trinidad and Tobago 7.4 Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODP Tonnes) (1990 - 2011) 7.5 7.6 7.7 8.1 Debt Service as a Percentage of Exports of Goods and Services Proportion of Dwelling Units Using an Improved Drinking Water Source Proportion of Dwelling Units with Access to a Chlorinated Water Supply Proportion of the Population Using an
 Improved Sanitation Facility Appendices Appendix I: Reflecting on Key National Milestones and their Influence on Trinidad and Tobago’s Development Agenda Appendix II: Going Beyond 2015 and the Current Set of MDG Targets Appendix III: Tables Showing Data for Charts in the Report vii Acronyms and Abbreviations AARD ACP ACTT AIDS AMSP ARV CAC CAPE CARICOM CDAP CDB CDF CEDAW CEE CFCs CO2 COSTAATT CSEC CSO CVQ DAC DOTS EC eCAL ECCE EDF EMA EPA EPI ESA ESCI EU FIU FPATT GATE GDP GEF GHGs GII GNI GORTT GPI Average Annual Rate of Decline African, Caribbean and Pacific Countries Accreditation Council of Trinidad and Tobago Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome Accompanying Measures for Sugar Protocol Anti-retroviral Continuous Assessment Programme Caribbean Advanced Proficiency Examination Caribbean Community Chronic Disease Assistance Programme Caribbean Development Bank Caribbean Development Fund Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women Common Entrance Examinations Chlorofluorocarbons Carbon Dioxide College of Science, Technology and Applied Arts of Trinidad and Tobago Caribbean Secondary Education Certification Central Statistical Office Caribbean Vocational Qualification Development Assistance Committee Directly Observed Treatment Short European Commission eConnect and Learn Early Childhood Care and Education European Development Fund Environmental Management Agency Economic Partnership Agreement Environmental Performance Index
 Environmentally Sensitive Area Emerging and Sustainable Cities Initiative European Union Financial Intelligence Unit Family Planning Association of Trinidad and Tobago Government Assistance for Tuition Expenses Gross Domestic Product Global Environmental Facility greenhouse gases Gender Inequality Index Gross National Income Government of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago Gender Parity Index viii HBS HCFCs HDC HELP HIPC HIV HSF IADB ICT LNG MAVAW MCH MDG MHUD MICS MMR MOE MOU MSM MTEST MTPF NBSAP NCDs NGO NOR NPDP
 NSDS NSP NT NTA ODA ODP OECD PLHIV PLHIV/AIDS PMTCT RDA SDF SDGs SEA SEMP SES SIDS SLC SWs TB Household Budgetary Survey hydro-chlorofluorocarbons Housing Development Corporation Higher Education Loan Programme Heavily Indebted Poor Countries Human Immunodeficiency Virus Heritage and Stabilisation Fund Inter-American Development Bank Information and Communications Technology Liquefied Natural Gas Men Against Violence Against Women Maternal and Child Health Millennium Development Goal Ministry of Housing and Urban Development Multiple Indicators Cluster Survey Maternal Mortality Rate Ministry of Education Memorandum of Understanding Men who Have Sex with Men Ministry of Tertiary Education Skills Training Medium Term Development Framework National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan Non-Communicable Diseases Non-Governmental Organisation Net Official Reserves National Physical Development Plan National Spatial Development Strategy National Strategic Plan National Test National Training Agency Official Development Assistance Ozone Depletion Potential Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development Persons Living with HIV Persons living with HIV/AIDS Prevention of Mother-to-Child Transmission Recommended Daily Allowance Special Development Fund Sustainable Development Goals Secondary Entrance Assessment Secondary Education Modernization Programme Seamless Education System Small Island Developing States Survey of Living Conditions Sex Workers Tuberculosis ix TCCTP THA TIDCO TSSP TVET U5MR UN UNDP UNESCO UNICEF UPE URP US USE UTT UWI WASA WHO WTO Targeted Conditional Cash Transfer Programme Tobago House of Assembly Tourism and Industrial Development Company Trade Sector Support Programme Technical and Vocational Education and Training Under Five Mortality Rate United Nations United Nations Development Programme United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization United Nations Children's Fund Universal Primary Education Unemployment Relief Programme
 United States Universal Secondary Programme University of Trinidad and Tobago University of the West Indies Water and Sewerage Authority World Health Organization World Trade Organization x FOREWORD together leaders came In 2000, world to create a framework that focused international attention on efforts to address global and national development priorities in the form of the Millennium Development Goals.
One year prior to the deadline for achieving the set targets, the Government of Trinidad and Tobago has prepared this the Trinidad and Tobago comprehensive Report – - Millennium Development Goals Report documenting our country’s progress towards attainment of the MDGs and charting the way forward to 2015 and beyond.
The Report builds on my statement at the “High- level Plenary Meeting of the Sixty-fifth Session of the United Nations General Assembly on the Millennium Development Goals” in 2010 as well as “Trinidad and Tobago Millennium Development Goals Progress Report 2011”, and outlines, in detail, Trinidad and Tobago’s journey towards achieving the MDGs.
2014 To date, we have achieved some of the targets and metrics relating to almost all of the MDGs, including: reduction in extreme poverty; achievement of universal Primary Education, along with gender parity; immunisation against measles; proportion of men and women with access to anti-retroviral drugs; number of deaths due to AIDS; incidence and death rate associated with Malaria; proportion of land area covered by forest; consumption of ozone depleting substances; and internet users per 100 population.
Additionally, we have made significant strides towards attaining other targets pertaining to employment; women in national parliament; and increased access to improved drinking water source.
Still, Government recognizes there is much work to be done if we are to positively impact the lives of the most vulnerable in our society - starting from proper planning to facilitate the development of appropriate policies, strategic and programmatic interventions to monitoring and evaluating those interventions to ensure that our efforts result in improved lives.

Government is committed to the achievement of the MDGs.
This commitment is reflected in our national policy agenda as articulated in the National Policy Framework for Sustainable Development and our Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014 which outline seven pillars for national development and five priority sectors, respectively.

These two policy frameworks guide our development perspective and aspirations which coincide with many of the MDGs.
Like the MDGs, this policy agenda places people at the centre of development, and embodies a National Vision of “Lasting Prosperity” and a Mission centred around “Prosperity for all.” xi In implementing this national vision and mission as well as its national priorities, Government aims to create a facilitative environment for human development.

Accomplishing the MDGs is therefore viewed as an important means through which our country’s progress can be measured.
demands important development Inclusive the productive participation of every citizen in social and economic development, and therefore, poverty alleviation and, ultimately, to our eradication are vitally country’s future.

While extreme poverty has been substantially reduced, the number of persons under the poverty line still remains at an unacceptably high level.
Our strategy for elevating our society and breaking the cycle of poverty is a holistic one that encompasses educating our people, providing access to affordable housing and quality health care and facilitating economic activity at both the levels, while community and national ensuring equal opportunity for males and females for our natural environment.
Government also places high priority on direct interventions for poverty alleviation and eradication by providing a safety network for the poor and vulnerable and closing the gap between the rich and poor by elevating persons into meaningful employment opportunities.

Government has specifically targeted a 2 percent reduction in the number of persons below the poverty line per year.
A Household Budgetary Survey and the Survey of Livings Conditions are currently being conducted (2014) which should provide us with more up-to-date figures.

respect and Trinidad and Tobago, a island developing state, has attained middle income country status based on our oil and gas small to be empowered resources.
Moving forward in today’s global that community, Government recognizes social and economic transformation will depend heavily on the extent to which our be people will technologically proficient, innovative and knowledge driven.

Our focus, therefore, is on developing our human resources.

We are continuing to implement a comprehensive programme to strengthen and improve the quality of the education system as well as increase the participation rates at the tertiary level.
One of the goals of this programme is to bridge the digital divide through the Education Sector, not only within Trinidad and Tobago, but between ourselves and other countries.

Ultimately, the intention is to build our human capital to create internationally competitive can match citizens who performance in the international arena and institutions, who can build competitive companies and industries at home.
The productive capacity of a nation is determined by many factors, not the least of which is the health and well-being of the population.

In our quest to provide universal access to quality health care, we have made substantial the management of the health system and to upgrade the physical infrastructure of health facilities.

Government will continue to address the deficiencies in the health system to ensure that quality health care is provided across the country.
investments improve to xii Specifically, maternal and child health is high of Government’s agenda and we will continue to implement programmes to arrest the relatively high levels of maternal and infant mortality with special emphasis on low-income households.

Government has also taken decisive action to institutionalise governance and physical structures to ensure the well-being, protection and care of our the children.
establishment of the Children's Life Fund to provide emergency medical care and surgery for children to access medical procedures which are not available in Trinidad and Tobago.

Also, we have agreed on a workplan 2013-2016 on strategic actions for children in Trinidad and Tobago.
included Such action In addition to continuing the fight against HIV/AIDS where we have had some success, we must now confront the prevalence of non- communicable diseases such as diabetes and hypertension which have emerged as major threats to socio-economic growth, not only in Trinidad and Tobago, but in the Caribbean region and other developing counties.
To this end, Trinidad and Tobago, in collaboration with CARICOM, successfully spearheaded the UN Resolution calling for a high-level meeting on non-communicable diseases which took place in 2011.

In light of this, Government is paying special attention to bringing non-communicable diseases under more effective control through database management, effective treatment at no cost to citizens and promotion of healthy lifestyles.
Development cannot and must not take place without providing equal opportunity for both and women and men and respecting the so, including communities and partnering with people, environment.

My Government is committed and to empowering gender mainstreaming continues to be an important aspect of our plans for social and economic transformation.
We established a Ministry of Gender, Youth and Child Development in 2012, which has responsibility for addressing issues of the most vulnerable groups in the protection of our society, children and elimination of discrimination against women.

We are seeing a greater increase in the enrollment of women than men at the tertiary level and women comprise more than 50 percent of classroom space.
We are also seeing an increase in the number of in Local women Government; and in 2010, Trinidad and Tobago elected female Prime Minister.

Still, there is room for improvement and Government will continue to adopt appropriate measures to ensure a more gender sensitive society in which males and females are afforded equal space.
in Parliament first and its for while growth towards sustainable Government’s path development entails promoting social and ensuring economic future sustainability environmental generations, taking into consideration the effects of climate change, the impact of which can be severe for a small island state such as Trinidad and Tobago.

However, Trinidad and Tobago has taken steps to address and correct this.
We have established our own Green Fund for use to finance reforestation environmental conservation and preservation programmes.

Government has already commenced several renewable energy projects and has also other and xiii the and sector, private partnered with communities non-governmental organisations to implement the ‘clean and beautify’ programme throughout the nation aimed at sustainable management of the environment.
As we forge ahead, the Government of Trinidad and Tobago will continue to engage to adopt our national stakeholders and measures to strengthen and deepen relations the with our development partners in Caribbean Community (CARICOM), the United Nations (UN) System and other multilateral development to achieve our national goals.
Trinidad and Tobago will continue to work with our regional international development partners in our steadfast effort to achieve all of the MDGs, not only for our nation, but for other developing countries as well.

institutions and As we move towards 2015 and beyond and create subsequent frameworks for global development, special consideration must be given to the least developing countries and small island developing states, some of which straddle both categories.
While Trinidad and Tobago has attained middle income country status, it is also a small island developing state, and like other such states, we are fully remain fact cognizant of vulnerable to international financial, food and energy crises as well as natural disasters.

These large percentage of states, and so, success at the global level must be rooted at the national level.
Issues that must be addressed include climate change, poverty reduction, human for security and lack of capacity vulnerabilities that we affect the the a of economies competitiveness.

scale which affect this end, an Development efforts must be managed and Integrated measured.

To Performance Management Framework focusing on results has been developed and is being institutionalized.
A major constraint experienced in measuring progress towards achieving the MDGs was the lack of up-to- date data for all indicators which is reflected in this Report.

It contains data ranging up to the years 2008 and 2011, and in some instances we have been able to compile data up to 2014.
As part of the institutionalisation of the Integrated Performance Management Framework, our Central Statistical Office (CSO) is being restructured and strengthened with the necessary skills and resources to produce timely data on Government’s behalf.

The CSO, in collaboration with international and Caribbean partners, has recently delivered the 2011 Census Demographic Reports while several supplementary reports will be made available subsequently.
In addition, the Survey of Living Conditions 2014 has been launched which, when completed and analysed, will provided up-to- date data for decision-making.

Trinidad and Tobago has made significant the MDGs.

advances towards achieving However, there remain some challenges which we are committed to resolving in order to attain our overarching goal, that is, the happiness of our people.
Finally, I wish to recognise and thank the Honourable Minister of Planning and Sustainable Development and his staff, as xiv well as the key stakeholder Ministries and Departments, for their valuable contribution to the production of the Trinidad and Tobago Millennium Development Goals Report 2014.

Honourable Kamla Persad-Bissessar, S.C., M.P.

Prime Minister of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago xv PREFACE standards to reflect year 2015.
In our assessment of the national situation and readiness to implement the MDGs it was confirmed that Trinidad and Tobago had already exceeded some of these global for development and therefore there was opportunity to modify the the national situation.

targets Noteworthy was the progress under Goal 2 – Achieve Universal Primary and Secondary Education, which by 2005, had registered net enrolment of both males and females in primary education as being over 90 percent.
Government therefore included targets for universal early childhood education and increases in the rates of participation at tertiary level institutions from 2010 and onwards.

Over the last decade the development of Trinidad and Tobago has been guided by strong principles of achieving equity, good governance and a high quality of life for all citizens.
As a small island economy uniquely blessed with hydro-carbon reserves Trinidad and Tobago has consistently used these people, resources transform environment, an exemplary nation.

The national vision of for prosperity through harnessed creativity, innovation and collaboration focuses on creating an environment whereby all persons in the public sector, private sector and civil society can actively participate in national development.
economy into and all its to In 2000, the MDGs provided the global basics that all nations should achieve by the Whilst our performance under the MDGs have been generally high, by keeping these indicators in constant view Government was able to identify gaps in development to which responses comprehensive and systematic were developed.

In the area of poverty eradication, for example, in 2011, Trinidad and Tobago recorded a 14.8 percent poverty rate.
Government has thus undertaken, through the social sector Ministries such as the Ministry of the People and Social Development, Ministry of Housing and Urban Development and the Ministry of Labour and Small and Micro Enterprise Development, targeted interventions that deal with the most vulnerable, as they related to chronic social poverty, conditions and employment.

housing and Areas that continued to be troubling were infant and maternal mortality.
rates of However, through collaboration with partners in development, Trinidad and Tobago will xvi to implement institutional and continue physical reforms in sectors such as health and education, in order to achieve the desired outcomes.
in the allow It has been recognized that for greatest impact for development change to occur, there must be the adoption of an integrated approach to deal with the underlying causes issues which of particular development for realization of would transformational the shortest results possible timeframe.

Further, adopting an evidence-based approach to decision making, will and effectiveness in the utilization of resources and the impact intended.
For Trinidad and Tobago, therefore, the MDGs provided the baseline for national development which has robust now been development platform that includes national goals, targets and indicators.

integrated efficiency greater ensure into a Since 2010, Government has worked towards creating the links between the pillars of development, specifically human and social, economic and environmental conditions.
More recently spatial planning has been included in the analysis and the debate has also begun on creating an understanding of well-being within the context of a holistic Quality of Life Index.

has formulated The Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development through consultation, key planning instruments that will guide development over the medium term giving the national indicators.
The Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014 and the Working for Sustainable Development documents for have provided the policy context to all focus development against five national priorities and for sustainable development.

Trinidad and Tobago also produced the Human Development Atlas, 2012 which, through spatial depiction, allowed a view of human development including the MDGs, crime and violence across regional boundaries.
This document created the platform for ensuring equity in development at the regional and sub-regional levels not only in terms of the economic and infrastructure requirements but also in terms of social and demographic variables which served as a guide to decentralized community development.

The National Performance Framework 2012 – 2015 outlined 24 National Outcomes and 48 national indicators under which the MDGs were subsumed.
This document built on the principles of effective planning and good governance based on a framework of key result areas, outcomes, targets and indicators of development.

It was intended to facilitate strategic that would lead to the achievement of the national priorities in the first instance, ensuring alignment between the planning, financing and the achievement of results.
interventions Recognizing the limitations of land space within Trinidad and Tobago, Government has prepared a National Spatial Strategy that ensures the efficient utilization of our finite land resource.

This is essential to ensure that our public and community spaces are to provide quality structured properly housing, community recreational spaces, green spaces and modern infrastructure that would create the esthetical value for the human condition.
xvii Development is therefore being approached through tiers, deliberately aimed at achieving the necessary results which we all seek.

integrated multiple, As Trinidad and Tobago approaches the end of the 15 year timeframe set by the United Nations for implementation of the MDGs, we are satisfied that our efforts will yield positive results by 2015.

By that time, Trinidad and Tobago would have achieved and exceeded most of the MDG targets.
Furthermore, our approach to development that targets improvements in terms of social, environmental, and physical economic conditions is comprehensive and holistic.

Our development will therefore be sustainable and is disenfranchised.

individual ensure that no As the global debate to post 2015 continues, Trinidad and Tobago looks forward to the global guiding principles that would be adopted at the United Nations.
The pledge to meet and exceed these Goals remains our fundamental vision since the Government is committed to creating a nation in which future generations would be proud to be associated.

Dr. Bhoendradatt Tewarie Minister of Planning and Sustainable Development xviii EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Trinidad and Tobago, a small island, developing state, is set to achieve and, in some cases, surpass, most of the MDGs by 2015 as evidence by the data available.
In compiling the data for this Progress Report, it is estimated that at least 70 percent of the MDG targets and indicators is attainable.1 This includes modifications such as additional indicators which make some of the Goals more relevant to Trinidad and Tobago.

The outlook for further advances in attaining the required benchmarks is good based on the sound policies, strategies and strategic interventions currently being implemented and those that are to be executed in the near future.
Some of the highlights of this country‘s achievements over the last 14 years are:  The proportion of persons living below the poverty line of US$1.00 per day declined from 24 percent to 14.8 percent;  Extreme hunger has almost been eradicated with 1.2 percent of the population falling below the minimum level of dietary energy consumption;  Universal primary and secondary education have been achieved - the latter was set as a national target;  The country is on track to realising universal Early Childhood Education by 2015 which has been set as a 1 This percentage includes 22 percent of targets that are on track to be met and 48 percent already met.
Indicators added by Trinidad and Tobago were also considered.
national target; level  Tertiary participation rate increased from 15 percent in 2004 to 60 percent currently, thereby meeting the set target;  Gender parity in primary and secondary level enrolment has been achieved and women surpass men at the level of tertiary participation;  There have been significant strides in empowering women: the country‘s first Prime Minister was elected in 2010 with women holding 36 percent of in that year; ministerial positions women the Lower House of in Parliament increased from 11 percent in 2001 to 29.3 percent in 2010;  Trinidad and Tobago has almost eliminated malaria and tuberculosis; and  Trinidad and Tobago successfully met the targets relating to the Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances which declined from a high of 220 ODP tonnes in 1998 to 34.34 ODP tonnes in 2011.
Some of the challenges pertain to the containment of new cases of HIV, the incidence of non-communicable diseases, maternal deaths and carbon emissions.

Government is confident that much more progress will be made towards achieving the MDGs by 2015 given the numerous undertaking in various sectors to improve the quality of life in Trinidad and Tobago.
1 Goal 1: Eradicate Extreme Poverty and Hunger for Trinidad and Tobago has recorded a notable 38 percent drop in poverty levels between 1997/1998 and 2008/2009, based on the Household Budgetary Survey data those years.

This significant decline has also been accompanied by low indigence levels as evidenced by both the 2005 Survey of Living Conditions, which recorded a 1.2 percent indigence level, and the more recent 2008/2009 HBS, which revealed the level at 3 percent.
The Poverty Gap has also narrowed from 5.3 percent to 4.2 percent between 1997/1998 and 2008/2009 HBS.

However, income inequality persists as evidenced by an unchanged Gini-coefficient of 0.39 during the same years.

Moreover, the Proportion of Underweight Children under Five Years have also declined from 22 to 18 percent between 2000 and 2006, although further declines are needed.

can be attributed approach in reducing The country‘s success to a poverty multidimensional to combatting the issue.
This involved the implementation of programmes and improved social services delivery to the like subsidization of basic services education, and transportation.

More recently, emphasis has been placed on decentralized development aimed at reducing regional growth disparities, as well as on human capital development through education and skills training.

health care to in led available.


Similarly, improvements Declining overall unemployment levels have the Employment to Population Ratio from 53.70 to 59.14 percent between 2000 and 2011 as more job opportunities became the Proportion of Own Account Workers and Contributing Family Workers declined during 1990-2000 from 22.69 to 17.36 persons were more percent, jobs.
finding stable successful However, lower employment among the youth population and women have been issues and are being identified as addressed.

Declines in the Growth Rate of Gross Domestic Product (GDP) per person employed also suggested the need for increased labour productivity which the Productivity Council.
tackled by is being as in Goal 2: Achieve Universal Pre- School, Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Education to Universal access to primary education had been achieved by Trinidad and Tobago prior the year 2000.

Enrolment ratios surpassed the 90 percent target reaching 92 percent in 2009-2010.

Moreover, the Proportion of Pupils Starting Grade 1 Who Reach Last Grade of Primary Education has been generally high - 92.3 percent in 2009/2010.
While universal primary education has been achieved, emphasis has been placed on improving the quality of education to ensure all students participate and benefit from their schooling experience.

Given the successes at the primary level, Trinidad and Tobago elected to 2 targets levels of additional for other and include indicators the education system.

These are Net and Enrolment Secondary Level Participation Rates.
Pre-School, Tertiary in and includes The drive to achieve universal Early Childhood Care and Education (ECCE) by 2015 is well underway.

As at 2009/2010, the enrolment rate at the pre-school level was 88.5 percent.

Given the broad-based approach adopted by the Government which construction of over 150 new ECCE Centres, utilization of spaces at primary schools to create ECCE places and partnering with private providers to meet the fall short of places; the country is well positioned to achieve this target.
This policy initiative will provide every child, regardless of his/her socio- economic circumstance, with a solid for human development foundation (skills, values, attitudes, etc.

), academic performance and lifelong learning.

Universal Secondary Education (USE) was achieved in 2000.
The reform measures undertaken at the secondary level in support of USE included: the construction of new schools; the de- shifting and junior secondary and comprehensive schools; curriculum enhancement, particularly the Information Communication Technology; and the professional of administrators and teachers.
The impact of these initiatives is gauged from the conversion of development introduction of Net Secondary School Attendance Rate2 which increased from 87.2 percent in the 2008 academic year to 89.9 percent in to 2011/2012.

The ongoing efforts learning provide a more supportive environment as well as engaging students more creatively in their own learning should positively impact the attendance rates.
There has been an unprecedented increase in the number of students pursuing tertiary level education over the last eight years.

The country‘s Tertiary increased Level Participation Rate3 significantly in from 10 2004/2005, to 57 percent in 2012 due to government‘s commitment mainly since 2004 to provide free tertiary education to all citizens.

The target for tertiary level participation of 60 percent by 2015 has been reached.
percent The Literacy Rate for persons 15-24 years old was consistently high at 99.5 percent in 2008 up from 95.7 percent in 1995.

This increase may be attributed to free access to primary, secondary and tertiary education by citizens.

2 The percentage of secondary school age children of the official school age population enrolled in school.

3 The percentage of persons graduating from secondary schools and enrolling in higher education.
3 Goal 3: Promote Gender Equality and Empower Women and Tobago has done Trinidad remarkably well towards accomplishing this Goal given the attainment of gender parity tertiary education; and gender parity in primary education is close to being achieved, reaching 0.98 in 2010. secondary and in Women have also had a stronger presence in the non-agriculture sector, with an average participation of 42.65 percent during 2000-2009.
Moreover, whereas women‘s participation in the labour force has been traditionally lower than men, this gap has been narrowing evidenced by an average of 3:2 male to female ratio in all industries during 2007-2011. increased in Notable strides were also made increasing women‘s participation in decision making, through the proportion of seats held by women in the National Parliament.

This from 11 percent in the late 1990‘s to 29 percent in 2010.
This increase in 2010 was also accompanied by the country‘s election of the first female Prime Minister.

More continues to be done by government to promote gender equality through, policy, legislation and law enforcement.

Goal 4: Reduce Child Mortality Trinidad and Tobago has made some the Under-5 gains bringing down Mortality Rate (U5MR) after a period of continuous rise in the 1990s.

The most recent estimates place the Rate at 13.2 deaths per 1,000 live births in 20104.
While no systematic difference between geographic areas in terms of this Rate was observed, a significant discrepancy between the sexes was evident with the male U5MR being, on average, 25 percent higher than the female rate.

of rate the showed determined under-five Disaggregation it was mortality by predominantly fluctuations in the infant mortality rate and, more specifically, by the neonatal mortality rate with most of these deaths in turn occurring within the first seven days of life.
By contrast, the 1-4 year old mortality rate and the post-neonatal mortality rate remained consistently low.

particularly, Conditions originating in the perinatal period, respiratory conditions, were revealed to be the largest contributor to infant deaths.

The Government of Trinidad and Tobago has moved to strengthen policies related to not only infant care, but antenatal care influences neonatal which heavily health.
the Children‘s establishment Authority of Trinidad and Tobago are set to tackle violence against and abuse of children inter-alia, given that poisoning and other external causes were among the top causes of deaths among children aged 1-4.

Initiatives of such the as Expanded for The Programme Immunization, which provides free vaccines for children against a number of including measles, has been hugely successful with 83 percent of one year-old infants infectious diseases, 4 Public Health institutions only.
4 immunised against these diseases in 2012; up from just 35 percent in 2000.

While the under-five mortality rate 2015 target of 5.4 per 1,000 live births may not be met, Trinidad and Tobago is on track to continued reductions in child mortality as a targeted and sustained policy approach has yielded dramatic decreases in the Rate over only a few these is anticipated years.

positive results will only increase moving into the future.
that It Goal 5: Improve Maternal Health Improving maternal health is a critical aspect of the overall health care system which has been identified as a priority area for investment over the medium- term.

Trinidad and Tobago is working assiduously to improve maternal health and reduce the Maternal Mortality Ratio (MMR) which has continued to pose a challenge.
During the period 1990 to 2010, the ratio has fluctuated widely from year to year, exhibiting a general downward trend between 1994 and 2003, and a general upward trend between 2004 and 2010.

The two lowest ratios reached were 29.4 and 27.8 in In 2002 and 2003, comparing the MMR at its peak in 1994 (76.2) to its lowest rate in 2003 (27.8), the MMR fell by 63.5 percent.

It should be noted, however, that in 2011 and 2012, the MMRs at Public Health Institutions only were 22.2 and 20.0, respectively.
respectively.

In addressing the challenge of reducing the MMR, Government is continuing to improve systems and procedures at health care institutions, increase access to improved health services, enhance the infrastructure as well as implement policies like the revised Maternal and Child Health Policy and Standard Operating Procedures for Obstetrics and Midwifery.
On the other hand, Trinidad and Tobago has been more successful in achieving the targeted proportion of births attended by skilled health personnel with more than 95 percent of women receiving perinatal care and 99 percent of births being attended by skilled personnel.

for the prospects Additionally, the achieving the target of universal access to reproductive health is promising as over 90 percent of women access reproductive healthcare at least once during their pregnancy.
Goal 6: Combat HIV/AIDS, Dengue, Diabetes and Hypertension progress and Tobago has made Trinidad considerable towards combatting HIV/AIDS.

The incidence of HIV/AIDS among the general public has consistently declined during 2008 to from 1,448 to 1,284 cases5, 2011 thereby highlighting the positive impact of Government‘s multidimensional approach to combatting the disease.
Additionally, there were sharp increases in the proportion of persons using anti- retroviral (ARV) drugs, from 46 percent in 2006 to 73 percent in 2011.

For pregnant women, the rate was estimated at 73.5 percent during 2005-2009 to 81.9 percent in 2011.
This increased use impacted positively on the of ARV 5 Ministry of Health, Public Health Institutions data 5 number of deaths due to AIDS, which peaked at 250 in 2001 and declined to a low of 42 in 2011. heightened its preventative measures towards more effective management of the disease.

However, concern remains regarding the incidence of HIV/AIDS among the 15-24 age cohort, which continued to increase during 2009-2011, from a prevalence rate of 1.3 to 1.8 percent.
This trend persisted despite increasing correct comprehensive, increased knowledge of HIV/AIDS within this cohort, from 56 to 63 percent during 2008-2012 as well as likely increased condom use compared to the older age cohorts.

their The country has also successfully eradicated malaria, with no deaths since 2008-2011 and with no more than 3 incidences in any one year during that period.

The death rate for tuberculosis has also been low at 1.9 per 100,000 persons during 2005-2011.
Attention is being paid to managing the overall, though small increase in its incidence to 2.7 in 2011, towards achieving the national target of 0.6 per, 100,000 persons by 2015.

Given Trinidad and Tobago‘s success in tuberculosis and malaria, managing other non- Government included communicable diseases like dengue, diabetes and hypertension, especially given their relevance to the country.
There have been low death rates due to dengue which recorded an average of 0.6 deaths per 100,000 persons during 1999 to 2008.

However, the incidence of the disease consistently fluctuated to a high of 6,314 cases in 2002 to a few hundred cases in the 1990‘s and during 2004-2007.

Government has therefore In terms of diabetes and hypertension, new cases were recorded annually at 1,878 and 1,910, respectively, which were unacceptably high.
The death rate for hypertension remained constant at an average of 31.44 per 100, 00 persons over 1996-2008; whereas the rate for diabetes increased by 20 percent during that same period.

In moving forward, government‘s focus will be not only an education and awareness but also on behaviour modification efforts supported by improved data collection and policy and legislatives changes, as necessary.
7: Ensure Environmental Goal Sustainability Trinidad and Tobago successfully met the 2010 target in so far as it relates to the Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODP), which declined substantially from 196.6 ODP tonnes in 1990 to 34.34 ODP tonnes in 2011, well within targeted reductions.

Tightening of the legislative framework and national policy reform were attributed to its achievement.
However, the country did not meet the 2010 target for the Proportion of Land Area Covered by Forest but due to increased reforestation activities it is expected that continued improvement in forest cover would be achieved.

Forest Cover was 44.1 percent in 2005 and increased to 48 percent in 2012.

With respect to Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 6 gases overall increase (GHGs) absolute emissions, there has been an of observed the greenhouse emitted.
Despite the absence of quantifiable targets and data for selected indicators pertaining to Target 7B, Trinidad and Tobago‘s progress was still gauged based on information that was available.

In this regard, it was evident that the proportion of fish stock within safe biological limits has been significantly depleted mainly due to inappropriate fishing practices.

Consequently, most of the commercially important species were either close to full exploitation, or have been fully exploited or overexploited.
identified Although several categories of terrestrial protected areas were in Trinidad and Tobago, not all areas have been specifically designated for the maintenance of biological diversity.

Many of these areas have been managed for maximisation of timber values.

Of the terrestrial areas, only the three Environmentally Sensitive Areas (ESAs) namely, Matura National Park, Nariva Swamp and Aripo Savannas were designated primarily for biodiversity conservation.
In respect of measuring the proportion of species threatened with extinction, to five species have been date, only designated under the Environmental Management Act as “Environmentally Sensitive” as opposed to “Endangered”- a term not currently addressed in the Act.

On another note, the 2015 relating the Proportion of to target the an Using Improved Population Sanitation Facility has already been met.
This is evident from 2011 data which shows that 88 percent of the population used water closets, a significant increase from 57.7 percent in 1990. for target the 2015 the However, Proportion of Dwelling Units Using an Improved Drinking Water Source is likely to be met.
In 1990, 55 percent of dwelling units used an improved drinking water source and this rose sharply to 76 percent in 2011. the wholesome towards of Finally, the 2020 target to achieve a significant improvement in the lives of people living in squatter settlements is likely to be met given Government‘s equitable thrust and development sustainable communities in Trinidad and Tobago.
Squatter regularization home and the improvement subsidies, within context of the national planning framework, are all geared towards the squatter overall communities.

initiatives, upgrading upgrade of Goal 8: Develop a Global Partnership for Development partnerships As a small open economy Trinidad and Tobago is reliant on trade and the establishment of strategic regional and its international continued economic development.
As such, this country‘s Foreign Policy has been in the pursuit of the national development agenda, namely; promoting sustainable development, peace and citizen security.

Consequently, Trinidad for 7 and Tobago‘s development strategy underscores of meaningful and decisive engagement with the community of nations.
importance the Over the medium term, the foreign policy agenda seeks to maintain, develop and enhance relations with strategic countries at the bilateral, regional and multilateral levels, especially within the United Nations System.

Creating new trade agreements and maintaining existing ones have also been actively pursued as they are vital components for the facilitation of trade and economic growth.
Since trade is an important driver for economic growth, the Trade Policy and Strategy 2013-2017 has been completed and the next undertaking will be to develop a National Export Strategy.

term of the global agenda In for development, this country has been in the forefront of the debate on the post- 2015 Development Agenda and the Small Island Developing States (SIDS) process.
Under the SIDS process, Trinidad and Tobago participated in the Inter-Regional Preparatory Meeting for the 2014 SIDS Conference in August 2013 as well as the UN Open Working Group on Sustainable Development Goals in November and December 2013 and January 2014 as CARICOM‘s representative on matters related to Energy, Human Rights and Climate Change.

Over the years, Trinidad and Tobago has benefitted development assistance of the multilateral agencies.
from the of 1968, Inter-American the Since Development Bank (IADB) has been a key development partner the Government of Trinidad and Tobago.

As at December 2013, this country received a total amount of approximately US$52.6 million in grant funding from the IADB.

In 1975, the European Union began providing grant resources to this country European Development Fund (EDF).

The current EDF (10th) for the period 2008-2013 is valued at €25.9 million.
through its its (SDF) administered by Since in 1962, independence Trinidad and Tobago has pioneered and supported several initiatives aimed at assisting the least developed countries.

This country has been a major contributor to the Special Development the Fund Caribbean Development Bank (CDB), which was established in 1970.

At the end of 2012, this country‘s contribution to the fund was US$35.8 million.
Under the Heavily Indebted Poor Countries (HIPC) Initiative, Trinidad and Tobago in debt provided US$423.15 million the majority of which was relief, accumulated under the CARICOM Multilateral Clearing Facility.

In 2008, Trinidad and Tobago was a signatory to the Agreement establishing the Caribbean Development Fund (CDF) which was initiated to support the sustainable development of CARICOM Member States.
As at December 2012, Trinidad and Tobago contribution was US$46.7 million or 51 percent of the total amount in the Fund.

8 Trade Caribbean Support The Programme was created by Trinidad and Tobago in 2003 to assist CARICOM Members Countries.

At the end of the programme total disbursement made to countries was US$239,050.
2009, the in Trinidad While not in receipt of foreign assistance in the provision of essential drugs to its Tobago citizens, and established the Chronic Disease Assistance Programme (CDAP) in 2003 and to affordability of pharmaceuticals to the population.

availability increase the has been growth Phenomenal experienced in the area of Information and Communication Technology (ICT), as the number of internet users has doubled and mobile subscriptions have increased by approximately 25 percent.
In addition, the National ICT Plan 2014- 2018 has been completed.

Trinidad and Tobago is number 1 in the world in mobile network coverage according to Information Technology the Global Report of the Global Economic Report 2014.
9 SUMMARY TABLE SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS NOTES GOAL 1: ERADICATE EXTREME POVERTY AND HUNGER Target 1A: Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people whose income is less than one dollar (US) a day Target 1B: Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all, including women and young people Target 1C: Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people who suffer from hunger 1.1: PROPORTION OF POPULATION BELOW $1 (PPP) PER DAY BASELINE DATA/YR 24.1 percent (1997/1998) LATEST DATA/YR.
14.8 percent (2008/2009) TARGET 2015 12.05 percent 1.2: POVERTY GAP RATIO 5.3 percent (1997/1998) 4.2 percent (2008/2009) 2.7 Significant declines were recorded as a result of a multifaceted approach to combatting poverty.

This ranged from increased access to social services, the subsidization of basic services like health and education to empowerment measures like human capital development.
To further reduce the Gap, Government has embarked upon strategies to improve human capital development and decentralized development to reduce regional economic disparities.

1.5: EMPLOYMENT-TO- POPULATION RATIO 0.41 (1995) 0.59 (2011) 0.65 The improvement in this ratio was attributable to lower unemployment rates.
1.8: PROPORTION OF* UNDERWEIGHT CHILDREN UNDER FIVE YEARS OF AGE 22 percent (2000) 18.8 percent (2006) 11 percent This decline may be attributed to the implementation of key measures like the Maternal and Child Health Policy and Standard Operating Procedures and food support programmes.

However, further reduction is needed.
10 SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS NOTES GOAL2: ACHIEVE UNIVERSAL PRE- SCHOOL, PRIMARY, SECONDARY AND TERTIARY EDUCATION Target 2A: Ensure that, by 2015, children everywhere, boys and girls alike, will be able to complete a full course of pre-school, primary, secondary and tertiary level schooling 2.1: NET ENROLMENT RATIO IN PRIMARY EDUCATION 2.2: PROPORTION OF PUPILS STARTING GRADE 1 WHO REACH LAST GRADE OF PRIMARY EDUCATION 2.3: LITERACY RATE OF 15-24 YEAR OLDS, WOMEN AND MEN *NET ENROLMENT IN PRE-SCHOOL EDUCATION *NET SECONDARY SCHOOL ATTENDANCE RATE BASELINE DATA/YR 93.4 percent (1990) LATEST DATA/YR.
92 percent (2009/2010) TARGET 2015 90 percent 90 percent (1990) 92.3 percent (2009/2010) 90 percent 95.7 percent (1995) 99.5 percent (2008) 100 percent 88.2 percent (2006/2007) 89 percent (2011/2012) 97 percent 87.2 percent (2008) 89.9 percent (2011/2012) 90 percent *TERTIARY EDUCATION PARTICIPATION RATE 15 percent (2004) 60 percent (2014) 60 percent *Indicator included by Trinidad and Tobago Sustained high net enrolment rates were made possible through the achievement of universal primary education prior to 2000.
Completion rates have been consistently high, however, a greater number of girls than boys tend to complete the primary school cycle.

Literacy is commonly understood to be a set of tangible skills particularly the cognitive skills of reading and writing.

Increased enrolment rates are anticipated with the aggressive approach instituted to achieve universal ECCE by 2015.

The secondary school attendance rate continues to increase.
However, emphasis needs to be placed on the participation and completion rates for this level of education.

Sustained government funding of tertiary education has contributed significantly to increased participation rates and the target of 60 percent by 2015 has already been achieved.
11 SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS NOTES GOAL 3: PROMOTE GENDER EQUALITY AND EMPOWER WOMEN 3.1A: GENDER PARITY INDEX IN PRIMARY LEVEL ENROLMENT Target 3A: Eliminate gender disparity in primary and secondary education, preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education no later than 2015 3.1B: GENDER PARITY INDEX IN SECONDARY LEVEL ENROLMENT 3.1 C: GENDER PARITY INDEX IN TERIARY LEVEL ENROLEMENT 3.2: SHARE OF WOMEN IN WAGE EMPLOYMENT IN THE NON- AGRICULTURE SECTOR BASELINE DATA/YR 1.00.1 (1999) LATEST DATA/YR.
0.98:1 (2010) TARGET 2015 1.1 Near gender parity has been accomplished.

1.10.1 (1999) 1.04:1 (2009) 1.1 Gender parity has been achieved.. 1.38:1 (1999) 1.28:1 (2010) 1.1 Gender parity has been achieved.

39.2 percent (1995) 41 percent (2011) 50 percent 3.3: PROPORTION OF SEATS HELD BY WOMEN IN NATIONAL PARLIAMENT 11.1 percent (1997) 29.3 percent (2012) 50 percent There was a strong presence of women in the non-agriculture sector.
This has been accompanied by a diminishing gap in labour force participation between men and women.

However, further reduction is needed and the issue of income inequality between men and women must be addressed.

This proportion has consistently increased since 1997.
12 SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS NOTES GOAL 4: REDUCE CHILD MORTALITY 4.1: UNDER-FIVE MORTALITY RATE Target 4A: Reduce by two-thirds, between 1990 and 2015, the under-five mortality rate BASELINE DATA/YR 16.2 per 1,000 LIVE BIRTHS (1990) LATEST DATA/YR.
13.2 per 1,000 LIVE BIRTHS (2010)* *Public Health Institutions only TARGET 2015 5.4 per 1,000 LIVE BIRTHS 4.2: INFANT MORTALITY RATE 12.7.0 per 1000 LIVE BIRTHS (1990) 10.7 PER 1000 LIVE BIRTHS (2011)* *Provisional data 4.2 per 1000 LIVE BIRTHS 4.3: PROPORTION OF 1 YEAR-OLD CHILDREN IMMUNIZED AGAINST MEASLES 35 percent (2000) 83 percent (2012) 58.1 percent The U5MR has declined dramatically over the last decade after a period of increase.
However, meeting the target by 2015 remains a challenge but a number of initiatives are being undertaken to reduce the U5MR.

The infant mortality rate is falling and the number of infant deaths due to respiratory conditions of the newborn - the top cause of infant death - has dropped significantly.

The implementation of measures such as the revised Maternal and Child Health Policy are expected to have a positive impact.
The Expanded Programme on Immunization has been extremely successful in ensuring widespread child immunization coverage 13 SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS NOTES GOAL 5: IMPROVE MATERNAL HEALTH TARGET 5A: Reduce by three quarters, between 1990 and 2015, the maternal mortality ratio TARGET 5B: Achieve, by 2015, universal access to reproductive health GOAL 6: COMBAT HIV/AIDS, DENGUE, DIABETES AND HYPERTENSION6 Target 6A: Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the spread of HIV/AIDS 5.1: MATERNAL MORTALITY RATIO BASELINE DATA/YR 38.9 PER 100,000 LIVE BIRTHS (1996) TARGET 2015 9.7 PER 100,000 LIVE BIRTHS LATEST DATA/YR.
20 PER 100,000* LIVE BIRTHS (2012) *Public Health Institutions only While there have been wide annual fluctuations in the Rate over time, the challenge of sustaining reductions in the MMR remains.

5.2: PROPORTION OF BIRTHS ATTENDED BY SKILLED HEALTH PERSONNEL 99 percent (2004) 99 percent (2007) 90 percent The country has been successful in meeting this objective.
5.3: CONTRACEPTIVE PREVALENCE RATE 38 percent (2000) 42.5 percent (2008) 85 percent 6.1: HIV PREVALENCE AMONG POPULATION AGED 15-24 YEARS 1300 CASES PER 100,000 POPULATION (2009) 1800 CASES PER 100,000 POPULA- TION (2011) LESS THAN 1300 CASES PER 100,000 POPULA- TION 56 percent (2008) 63 percent (2012) MORE THAN 56 percent 6.3: PROPORTION OF POPULATION AGED 15-24 WITH COMPREHENSIVE CORRECT KNOWLEDGE OF HIV/AIDS Target 6B: Achieve, by 2010, universal access to treatment for HIV/AIDS for all those who need it 6.5: PROPORTION OF POPULATION WITH ACCESS TO ANTI- RETROVIRAL DRUGS 49 percent (2006) 75 percent (2010) MORE THAN 49 percent PROPORTION OF WOMEN WITH ACCESS TO ANTI-RETROVIRAL DRUGS 75 percent (2005) 77.7 percent (2009) MORE THAN 75 percent 6 Targets to be developed for selected indicators in this Goal The Rate is increasing but more in-depth research is needed into cultural and social norms associated with utilizing and accessing contraceptives.
Despite increased testing and comprehensive, correct knowledge of HIV/AIDS, the increasing trend persisted.

This suggests that more responsible sexual behavior is required for this cohort, since a decreasing trend was observed for the population overall.
The increase in comprehensive, correct knowledge of HIV/AIDS has not yet impacted on responsible sexual behavior among this cohort This significant increase has impacted positively on AIDS mortality and can be attributed to increased treatment sites and free ARV drugs to the infected.

The expansion of the Prevention of Mother to Child Programme, along with increased access to in treatment and testing, has had a positive impact.
14 SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS NOTES Target 6C: Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the incidence of malaria and other major diseases *NEW HIV POSITIVE CASES AT PUBLIC HEALTH LOCATIONS BASELINE DATA/YR 286 CASES (1990) LATEST DATA/YR.
1284 CASES (2012) *NUMBER OF DEATH DUE TO AIDS 6.6 A: INCIDENCE ASSOCIATED WITH MALARIA 6.6 B: DEATH RATES ASSOCIATED WITH MALARIA 6.9: DEATH RATES ASSOCIATED WITH TUBERCOLOSIS 105 DEATHS (1990) 3 CASES (2008) 0 PER 100,000 POPULATION (2005) 1 PER 100,000 POPULATION (2006) 55 PER 100,000 POPULA- TION (2012) 1 CASE (2011) 0 PER 100,000 POPULA- TION (2011) 2.1 PER 100,000 POPULA- TION (2011) *INCIDENCE ASSOCIATED WITH DENGUE FEVER *INCIDENCE OF DIABETES *INCIDENCE OF HYPERTENSION *DEATH RATES ASSOCIATED WITH DIABETES * DEATH RATES ASSOCIATED WITH HYPERTENSION *Indicator included by Trinidad and Tobago 2847 CASES (2012) 1984 CASES (2006) 3160 CASES (1990) 1175 CASES (1990) 893 CASES (1990) 2310 CASES (2006) LESSTHA N 893 CASES 90.14 PER 100,000 POPULATION (1996) 28.81 PER 100,000 POPULATION (1996) 118.4 PER 100,000 POPULA- TION (2012) 31.74 PER 100,000 POPULA- TION (2006) LESS THAN 90.14 PER 100,000 LESS THAN 28.81 PER 100,000 TARGET 2015 LESS THAN 286 CASES LESS THAN 100 The number of cases in 2012 follows a consistent decline during 2004-2011 among the general population.
Efforts to reduce stigma associated with testing are underway.

The sharp decline can be attributed to increased availability of ARV Drugs.

LESS THAN 3 The disease has been essentially eradicated in country.

0 PER 100,000 POPULA- TION LESS THAN 1 PER 100,000 POPULAT ION LESS THAN 3160 CASES LESS THAN 1175 CASES There have been no deaths due to the disease since 2008.

The death rates have remained below 3 in any one year during 2006- 2011, but still above the national target of 0.6 by 2015.
Fluctuating rates have led to heightened, preventative measures in managing the disease.

Efforts to curb the incidence of the disease, through lifestyle changes, are underway.

Efforts to curb the incidence of the disease, through lifestyle changes, are underway.

The increased death rate has resulted in heightened preventative measures to curb deaths due to the disease.

Similar to diabetes, the increased death rate has resulted in heightened preventative measures to curb deaths due to the disease.
15 SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS NOTES BASELINE DATA/YR -- LATEST DATA/YR.
-- TARGET 2015 -- GOAL 7: ENSURE ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY Target 7A: Integrate the principles of sustainable development into country policies and programmes and reverse the loss of environment resources Target 7B: Reduce biodiversity loss, achieving, by 2010, a significant reduction in the rate of loss 7.1: PROPORTION OF LAND AREA COVERED BY FOREST 44.85% (1996) 48% (2012) MORE THAN 44.85% 7.2: CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) ABSOLUTE EMISSIONS (GIGAGRAMS) 25,397.2 GIGAGRAMS (1990) 80,823.35 GIGAGRAMS (2008) LESS THAN 25,397.2 GIGAGRAMS 168.7 TONNES (1990) 34.34 TONNES (2011) LESS THAN 168.7 ODP TONNES -- -- -- 7.3: CONSUMPTION OF OZONE- DEPLETING SUBSTANCES 7.4: PROPORTION OF FISH STOCKS WITHIN SAFE BIOLOGICAL LIMITS All plans and policy documents have been established within a results based framework for measuring progress and achievement of targets.
An aggressive reforestation programme coupled with a number of policy instruments supplemented by national strategic plans bolstered the land area covered by forest.

The national policy to balance economic growth with environmental sustainability has resulted in the implementation of numerous initiatives to reduce CO2 emissions.

Trinidad and Tobago has successfully reduced the use of ozone depleting substances.
The safe biological limits for many commercially important species of fish have already been surpassed.

Efforts to replenish the stocks are being directed at revising legislation and enforcing management regulations relating to fishing practices.

16 SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS NOTES 7.6: PROPORTION OF TERRESTRIAL AND MARINE AREAS PROTECTED BASELINE DATA/YR Not available LATEST DATA/YR.
32% (land) 0.1% (marine) TARGET 2015 National target to be developed 7.7: PROPORTION OF SPECIES THREATENED WITH EXTINCTION Not available 55 species endangered (2013) -- Target 7C: Halve, by 2015, the proportion of people without sustainable access to safe drinking water and basic sanitation 7.8: PROPORTION OF POPULATION USING AN IMPROVED DRINKING WATER SOURCE 55% (1990) 76% (2011) 82.5% 7.9: PROPORTION OF POPULATION USING AN IMPROVED SANITATION FACILITY TOTAL WATER CLOSETS: 57.7% (1990) TOTAL WATER CLOSETS: 88% (2011) 78.85% 7.10: PROPORTION OF URBAN POPULATION LIVING IN SLUMS -- -- 22,601 (Squatter Dwelling Units, 2011) Target 7D: By 2020, to have achieved a significant improvement in the lives of at least 100 million slum dwellers Approximately 32% of the combined land area of Trinidad and Tobago is protected and 0.1% of the marine area is protected.
Five species have been declared as Environmentally Sensitive Species (ESSs).

More species are in the process of being designated ESSs.

The number of households with access to pipe borne water in their homes increased over the period.

Continued improvement of the water supply to the population is expected as the effects of the pipeline installation initiative and the increased supply capacity of the DESALCOTT are realized.
There has been a significant increase in the percentage of households in Trinidad and Tobago using improved sanitation facilities.

Based on the 2011 population census, the number of squatter dwelling units was approximately 23,000.

However, a robust national spatial development strategy would acutely address major land use development issues within the national planning framework.
17 SUMMARY OF PROGRESS TOWARD THE MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS GOALS/TARGETS INDICATOR PROGRESS BASELINE DATA/YR 34.4 percent (1996) LATEST DATA/YR.
1.3 percent (2012) TARGET 2015 LESS THAN 5 percent 8.12: DEBT SERVICE AS A PERCENTAGE OF EXPORTS OF GOODS AND SERVICES 8.14: FIXED TELEPHONE LINES PER 100 INHABITANTS 23.6 PER 100 POPULATION (2010) 21.6 PER 100 POPULATION (2012) MORE THAN 23.6 8.15: MOBILE CELLULAR SUBSCRIPTIONS PER 100 POPULATION 115.9 PER 100 POPULATION (2007) 142.2 PER 100 POPULATION (2012) MORE THAN 115.9 GOAL 8: DEVELOPMENT AT GLOBAL PARTNERSHIP FOR DEVELOPMENT Target 8A: Develop further an open, rule-based, predictable, non- discriminatory trading and financial system Target 8F: In cooperation with the private sector, make available the benefits of new technologies, especially information and communications 8.16: INTERNET USERS PER 100 POPULATION 32.3 PER 100 POPULATION (2007) 68 PER 100 POPULATION (2011) MORE THAN 70* * Target set by Trinidad and Tobago NOTES Target was achieved on account of buoyant gas prices.
Despite having 21.6 lines per 100 population, Trinidad and Tobago‘s success lies in its mobile connectivity Mobile connectivity has surpassed 100% indicating that there are more mobile phones than national population due to aggressive marketing by the two mobile service providers.

Internet usage has expanded on account of broadband access at public Wi-Fi and mobile phones.
18 INTRODUCTION Background The decade of the 1990s witnessed new impetus on the part of the various agencies of the United Nations to improve the quality of life of people throughout the world, in particular the developing world.

World Conferences and Summits during this period sought to address the issues that impact on the quality of life of all peoples.
The culmination of these Summits and Conferences was the the adoption, by Millennium Declaration by the General Assembly of the United Nations in 2000. consensus, of The Declaration, in translating the shared values of nations into action, paid attention to peace and security, development and poverty eradication, human rights and protection of the environment, among issues of global concern.

The Millennium Declaration adopted eight development goals, with numerical targets for each Goal.
The timeframe for the achievement of these Goals were set over a 25-year period, 1990 to 2015.

To measure progress in meeting these targets, appropriate indicators were selected.

However, the Government of Trinidad and Tobago took the initiative in 2011 the indicators within the goals to address to modify some of Millennium Development Goals: 1.

Eradicate extreme poverty and hunger; 2.

Achieve universal primary education; 3.

Promote gender equality and empower women; 4.

Reduce child mortality; 5.


Improve maternal health; 6.

Combat HIV/AIDS, Malaria and other diseases; 7.

Ensure environmental sustainability; 8.

Develop a global partnership for development.

the specific concerns, needs and conditions of Trinidad and Tobago.

Accordingly, Goal 2 was amended to include pre-school, secondary and tertiary education.

Indicators towards monitoring the incidence and death rates associated with dengue, diabetes and hypertension were also included in Goal 6.
The Trinidad and Tobago Context The Republic of Trinidad and Tobago is an archipelagic State in the southern Caribbean off the north-eastern coast just south of of Venezuela and Grenada in the Lesser Antilles.

The Republic is comprised of two main islands: Trinidad, the larger island is 1,864 square miles in area (4,828 square kilometres), and Tobago, the smaller island, is 116 square miles 19 (300 square kilometres).

Five smaller islands lie off the Northwest peninsula.
In 2011, the country's population was estimated at 1,328,019 with an annual growth rate of 0.5 percent.

In terms of distribution by age group, 36.6 percent of Trinidad and Tobago‘s population was estimated to be under 25 years.

Persons aged 25-49 represented 37.9 the population, whilst percent of persons 60 and over accounted for 13.4 percent.

Males comprised 50.2 percent and females comprised 48.8 percent of the population.
Trinidad and Tobago is a multi-ethnic society comprising persons of East Indian descent (35.4 percent), African descent (34.2 percent) and Mixed ancestry (22.8 percent).

All other ethnic groups such as European, Caucasian, Chinese including and other Mixed groups descendants indigenous Amerindians totaled 1.4 percent.
As a plural society, Trinidad and Tobago has cultivated harmonious relations among its ethnic groups using a variety of mechanisms to ensure that peaceful co-existence and mutual respect are maintained.

the of low debt Due to its energy sector, Trinidad and Tobago has developed one of the most successful economies in the Caribbean and external with unemployment ratios and relatively high levels of per capita Gross Domestic Product (GDP).
In 2011, the Petroleum Industry accounted for 45.9 percent of GDP and 80 percent of In 2012, new domestic exports.

production contracts were awarded and a major diversification thrust is economy being pursued within the sector.

Oil and gas continue to be the mainstay of the a major diversification thrust in Energy, as well as six is being identified sectors, pursued.
but Macro-economic Strategy In 2014, Trinidad and Tobago finds itself in a good place following the 2008/2009 global financial crisis and ensuing recession.

The economy moved from decline to growth in 2012, and in 2014, it registered a 1.9 percent growth with an outlook of 2.5 per cent increase in 2015.

The 2014/2015 National Budget has been generous in social support to the most vulnerable citizens, very supportive of savings by the middle to class and strong on measures support and entrepreneurship.
The unemployment rate reached a record low of 3.6 per cent in 2013; and as at June 2014, headline inflation was 3.0 per cent.

Trinidad and Tobago seems headed for another growth cycle with policies to stimulate economic expansion and provide social support measures for the vulnerable.
business growth While the country is currently on a growth trajectory, a major development challenge facing Trinidad and Tobago is the transformation of the economy to one that is significantly less dependent on oil and gas while simultaneously ensuring a steady improvement in the standard living of all citizens.

The hydrocarbon sector has dominated the economy since 1913.
In more recent years, oil and gas remain the mainstay the sector of of percent accounting the economy with for 57.5 20 Government revenues, and 82.3 percent of export receipts in 2011.

This heavy dependence on the hydrocarbon sector makes the economy highly vulnerable to external shocks which can in turn have negative repercussions for the economy and population at large.
Furthermore, these given hydrocarbon resources as well as the declining production levels, economic diversification is a critical factor for the sustainable development of Trinidad and Tobago.

finite nature of the is Markets, full of landscape The global challenges and uncertainties that will impact on Trinidad and Tobago‘s ability to successfully manage the transition from an energy dependent economy.
Globalisation and rapid technological advances have resulted in fundamental, long-term changes in commerce and industry.

industries and companies have become global in scope with few products being made entirely in a single country.

Labour is now internationally mobile, existing jobs are becoming obsolete and new occupations require greater knowledge, skills and adaptability from workers.
Countries are now competing with each other for skilled talent and workforces business-friendly environments have become critical international elements competitiveness.
capital, while and of This has led to the adoption of a new national diversification strategy which aims to reposition Trinidad and Tobago from competing on the basis of production processes and investment in plants to an information, technology- innovative, knowledge-based driven, and globally connected economy; the foundation of which is rooted in the acquisition, exploitation, creation and strategic deployment of knowledge and skills.
To move the economy to a higher growth plane, there is commitment to the promotion of innovation as the basis for transforming existing production systems and creating new goods and services.

and Liquefied Natural Gas In looking at recent macroeconomic performance, Trinidad and Tobago experienced 14 consecutive years of economic growth, at an annual rate of 5 percent over the period 1995 to 2008.
This was mainly due to the development (LNG) of production favourable developments in the Energy sector, including high energy prices and the expansion of downstream industries.

As a direct result of the global economic crisis, economic expansion declined by in 2009 and marginal 3.3 percent negative growth in 2010.

Since then, Trinidad and Tobago has continued to experience moderate economic growth.

The economy grew by 1.7 percent and 1.9 percent in 2013 and 2014, respectively.
The Energy Sector, in 2012, was 40.2 percent of GDP, declining marginally to in 2014.

The Sector 38.5 percent continues to be the largest exporter for Trinidad and Tobago and the largest source of foreign direct investment.

The Non-energy Services Sector is the largest contributor to GDP.

In 2012, the Sector grew by 2.4 percent and accounted for 50.2 percent of GDP.

The Sector has continued to grow, reaching 21 51.2 and 51.8 per cent of GDP in 2013 and 2014, respectively.
The Sector is targeted for diversification and growth in areas such as Finance, Information and Communications Technology (ICT), Tourism, Marine Industry and the Creative Sector over the period 2012- 2016.

The Manufacturing sector declined on average 0.3 percent over the period 2009-2012.

The Sector‘s contribution to GDP declined from 8.7 in 2013 to 8.5 in 2014.

Still, the Sector has focused growth capacity and with export orientation, can recover and grow.
gas-based diversification strategy linked to export manufacturers is being pursued and expansion as well as job creation are anticipated in 2015 through to 2016.

In addition, a focus on Over the past five years the Agriculture sector contributed less than 1 percent to GDP.

In 2012, the sector accounted for only 0.7 percent of GDP, declining to 0.6 percent in 2014.

Major emphasis is being placed on agricultural production and support systems with a national food security.
Therefore, it is anticipated that the contribution of the Sector to GDP will increase.

Agricultural development is a policy priority of Government in order and food to sovereignty while providing sustainable livelihoods for those persons employed in the Sector.

Growth, diversification are and anticipated in this sector.

employment enhance creation security Following the global financial crisis in 2008/2009, the unemployment rate rose from 4.6 percent in 2008 to 5.9 percent for 2010.
Thereafter, the rate started on a downward trajectory, reaching as low as 3.6 per cent in 2013. during established The Government the Heritage and Stabilization Fund (HSF) in 2007 to cushion and support public expenditure economic downturns and provide a heritage for surplus future petroleum revenues.

As at the third quarter of fiscal 2013, the Net Asset Value of the HSF portfolio stood at US$5,000 million.
The Value increased to US$ 5,563.3 million at the end of the third quarter in fiscal 2014. generations from Gross Official Reserves stood at US$9,200.7 million in 2012, equivalent to approximately 10.4 months of prospective imports of goods and non- factor services (import cover).
Between 2013 and 2014, Trinidad and Tobago‘s Gross Official Reserves expanded by 11.0 percent, reaching US$10,219.8 million at the end of July 2014, representing 12.0 months of prospective imports of goods and non-factor services.

Following the global financial crisis in 2008 and the ensuing economic contraction, inflation declined from 12 percent in 2008 to 9.2 percent in 2012.

This downward trend continued with headline inflation falling to 3.0 per cent in June, 2014.
As at that time, year-on- year headline inflation had remained at single digit twenty-three levels consecutive months.

for For the medium term economic outlook, 2014-2016, efforts will be underway to finalise a National Innovation Policy.
22 The adoption of the National Spatial Development Strategy (NSDS) 2013- 2033, as the successor to the 1984 National Physical Development Plan, along with institutional reforms within the Town and Country Planning process will seek to further advance the national diversification strategy.

With the completion of the National Spatial Development Strategy 2013- 2033, attention will turn during 2014- 2016 towards the preparation of a successor document to the Medium Term Policy Framework (MTPF) 2011- 2014.
The new national strategic development plan will have as its core principle the concept of sustainable development, incorporating economic, social and environmental issues as part of overall national development to be international our consistent with obligations in this area.
Canadian funded including Dialogue with the private sector and civil society on identifying specific growth solutions commenced in 2013 under the Caribbean Growth Forum (CGF), a regional multi-stakeholder by participatory initiative multilateral agencies, the Inter-American Development Bank (IADB), International Development Agency (CIDA) and the for United Kingdom Department International Development (DfID).

The CGF complements the MTPF 2011-2014 and the national diversification agenda.
Already, action plans have been recommended for implementation over the next 18 months in the thematic areas of Logistics and Connectivity, Investment Climate and Skills and Productivity.

Enabling Policy Environment – Current Context those relating that comprise including Trinidad and Tobago has achieved approximately 70 percent of the all the various targets to MDGs, poverty.
However, the poverty levels remain relatively high for a country of middle income status, signalling the need to focus policy interventions on fostering income equity.
Government recognises that the deep-seated multi- dimensional circumstances that result in chronic poverty and stymy efforts to improve the quality of life for all citizens in a sustained manner require a solution broad-based, encompassing the coordinated and integrated actions of all actors in the society to effect economic, social and psychological transformation.
Thus, the vision that anchors the current policy environment is that of prosperity for all spurred on by an innovation-driven growth economy with a commitment to economic inclusiveness, greater equity, more meaningful citizen participation and sustainability.

that is in the previous section, As noted Trinidad and Tobago relies heavily on its oil and gas sector to generate national income.
The sector has brought much fortune to Trinidad and Tobago, but it has also brought uncertainty to the its development process due sensitivity to external circumstances, leading to economic swings that impact the growth momentum.

Continued reliance on this sector only is sustained not conducive country‘s to to 23 lives of development, citizens and protecting the environment.
improving the and from of take investment, simultaneous effort In response, Trinidad and Tobago has crafted a strategy for survival, growth and sustainability; and the goal is to shift the over-dependence on hydrocarbon resources to an emphasis on the development of human capital and the alignment of through-put from the education and training sector with diversification, an innovation competitiveness and A strategy.
social complementary place, transformation must understanding social transformation can both influence and be economic transformation.

The goal is to create the conditions which will engender greater equity and inclusiveness in the society through expanded opportunities for wealth generation and accumulation, in the national and participation development each process individual, community and region in the country.
Government‘s economic and social strategy, therefore, is based on the following four (4) principles: transformation influenced that for by 1.

Generate productivity-led growth on the basis of a more diversified the production structure with emphasis on value and wealth creation; 2.

Create the conditions for greater inclusiveness and equity in socio- economic development; 3.

Build the knowledge and talent of our human resources; and 4.
Pursue socio-economic development in the context of prudent spatial management and environmental limits.

Government‘s vision of ‗Prosperity for All‘ is defined by its broad strategic to achieving sustainable approach growth and human development and is espoused in seven (7) strategic and interconnected development pillars that guide the design and execution of policy measures.
The seven (7) Pillars are:  Pillar – 1 People Centred Development – is at the heart of Government‘s development strategy, around which the other Pillars coalesce.

It focuses on the people of Trinidad and Tobago and their development aspirations and the strategies that allow each and every individual the opportunity for development through meaningful education, in engagement employment, arts and culture, sport, and family and community initiatives.
– Justice  Pillar 2 – Poverty Eradication and emphasises Social economic inclusion and identifies specific targets for reduction of poverty annually.

It focuses on protection and care for the most vulnerable of our society – the poor, children, victims of crime and the differently-abled.
 Pillar 3 – National and Personal Security – addresses the issue of crime and personal safety with the objectives being to eliminate fear for self and property and to create 24 an environment in which all can enjoy freedom with responsibility.

Trinidad and Tobago‘s development strategy.

 Pillar – 4 Information and Communication Technology – is an the essential element infrastructure underpinning the creation of a modern, competitive economy in an information rich, knowledge and technology-driven world.
of  Pillar 5 – Creating a Diversified and Knowledge Intensive Economy – is at the core of building international competitiveness, stimulating new areas of economic growth and moving up the value chain.

It places a premium on creating high value jobs and generating wealth across all regions of the country.

The thrust is towards building an innovative, highly skilled work force strong institutions and increased research and development activity as the the economic cornerstones of restructuring effort.
supported by  Pillar 6 – Good Governance – ensures that the society and the economy are characterised by strong institutions responsive to citizenry, the needs adherence of democracy and the principles of accountability, transparency and fairness as well as expanded civic engagement.
culture the to of a  Pillar 7 the – Foreign Policy – importance of underscores meaningful decisive engagement with the community of nations and strategic positioning at the regional, hemispheric and wider global levels to the success of and Emanating from the long-term vision of ―Prosperity for All‘ articulated in the seven pillars is Government‘s Medium Term Policy Framework (MTPF) 2011- 2014 – the first of the MTPFs articulated by the Government in planning for the achievement of the long term goals.
The transformation agenda as articulated in the MTPF 2011-2014 is based on several policy shifts, including the: on on that than value talent  movement towards building a new capable of is economy generating of levels high productivity-led, innovation-driven endogenous economic growth with creation, emphasis and skill, knowledge, enterprise of our human capital rather continued exploitation of natural resources or production of primary products;  creation of a more inclusive and cohesive society in which there is greater equity in the distribution of resources to break the cycle of poverty and where opportunities for wealth generation as exist opposed to income generation only; of more meaningful inclusiveness and cohesion in the through greater people society participation the decision making process; and institutionalisation of frameworks, systems and processes consistent with for sustainable development, such as decision-making, evidence-based resources, of use efficient  creation planning proper in  25 decentralisation in the decision- making process and sustainable spatial planning.
strategies ‗Innovation The MTPF 2011-2014, embracing the theme Lasting for outlines Government‘s Prosperity‘, targeted and policies, interventions required over the medium- term to effect the required economic transformation which entails a more productive and competitive, diversified economy, driven by a high quality human capital base and innovation.

Government the promotion of innovation as the basis for transforming production existing systems and creating new goods and services.
The aim of this transformation is improve the skills base of the workforce, expand exports, improve the quality of jobs, effect a significant growth in productivity and generate higher incomes.

is committed to the foundations The Framework sets five (5) priorities to for achieving lay social and sustainable advancement of all citizens in the future.

These are: economic 1.

Crime and Law and Order; 2.

Agriculture and Food Security; 3.

Health Care Services and Hospitals; 4.


Economic Growth, Job Creation, Innovation; Competitiveness and and 5.

Poverty Reduction and Human Capital Development.
The main thrusts of this MTPF 2011- 2014 are:  To diversify and deepen the production base in order to ensure that in a context of depleting energy resources, the economy will continue to grow and sustain a high standard of living;  To move the economy up the value improve competitiveness chain, and expand investment both local and foreign while forging strategic links with economic partners;  To have a secure and safe nation and to strengthen the framework, institutions and infrastructure to support human security  To expand the capacity of our citizens knowledge for accumulation and use, innovation, creativity entrepreneurial activity and  To reduce socio-economic and regional inequalities within our borders, move people out of poverty inclusion and promote through meaningful economic participation social more economic A key aspect of Policy Framework to effect is competitive, through This innovation-driven involves: transformation economy.
building diversification and deepening  Creating A New Growth Dynamic - creating new engines of growth for by economic widening the production base and building production clusters and promoting new and sustainable high value- added industries to strengthen the encouraging economy the initiatives while to increase 26 is this policy competitiveness and productivity of industries.
An external existing the aspect of for exploration of the potential regional cluster development by partnering with resource-rich neighbouring countries in specific to produce globally industries competitive products; creating  Supporting Culture and Creative an - Industries endogenous growth dynamic based on culture and creativity to promote our world class artistes in a manner that could sustain livelihoods while developing and packaging value-added new activities to expand the range of products and services offered locally and internationally.
Areas of focus include the performing and visual arts, literary and fashion industries, architectural design and the software industries;  The Green Industry and Alternative Energy Sources - transforming the existing consumption-based an growth economic environmentally-friendly one that emphasises the efficient use of resources and minimises pollution environmentally- by friendly and supporting green industries that can successfully engage in the global friendly environmentally technology market.
Creating a greener transportation system, and developing energy sources and wave and wind energy industries are part of this initiative.
the An important element of into agenda technologies alternative utilising involves taking into account considerations; environmental and access expansion,  Creating New Economic Spaces - dispersing productive activities across the country to expand the economic creating space and opportunities for investment and including export development of five (5) growth poles which will benefit from a special package of fiscal incentives, such as the granting of Free Trade Zone Status tax the Agriculture, in incentives Tourism Manufacturing Sectors.
our identifies diversification strategy the for seven sectors selected formation of strategic business clusters and strengthening of value Food chains: Sustainability, and Culture Creative Industries, Maritime, Tourism, Financial Services and Information and Communication Technology; and and Additionally, Energy, the location, potential  TTBizLink Multi-Language Platform – expanding the existing TTBizLink into several languages based on factors such as cultural linkages, strategic geographical importance, and countries with market at penetrating new export markets.
This Multi-language Platform will allow investors to access helpful links to Government and business services and information in six (6) languages other than English, namely Arabic, Chinese, Hindi, Spanish, French and Portuguese.
aimed 27 is policy framework all The encompassing and acknowledges that the process of economic transformation must occur simultaneously with social transformation, and must not only involve strategic reform measures within the social sector, but on a deeper level, and the attitudes.
transforming values of The areas targeted for reform in the social sphere are the social services including safety net programmes geared towards reducing poverty, the education and training system, the health system, regional and community development and housing and community creation.

for social Specifically, our policy transformation addresses: strategies.
These  Stepping Out of Poverty – designing and structuring social safety net programmes that better targeted, developmental and involve clear reform exit measures with opportunities for lifelong learning, will encourage citizens to advance towards better paying jobs through education and training thereby creating greater equity; coupled  Education for Opportunity and Freedom – fostering a strong education system that is seamless and relevant to our development needs.
This includes: diversifying the curriculum; training of teacher; teaching new adopting methodologies such as the infusion of learning in process; increasing the number of Workforce Assessment Centres; Labour Market developing technology the a System (LMIS); Information strengthening; and refocusing the training strategy - all of which will enable citizens to reintegrate into the education and training system, build a Innovation National System and assist in the alignment with the absorptive capacity of the labour market;  A Healthier Nation – building a high quality health system with emphasis on preventative medicine to ensure that citizens have access to health care that is of a high standard, are less prone to health in particular, non- problems, communicable diseases (NCDs), and are physically and mentally able to produce and excel;  Consulting the Citizen – promoting encouraging by inclusiveness citizen participation and consensus building where decisions impact directly on the citizen and on communities;  Planning - for Sustainable Communities promoting development based on citizen participation and inclusion, sound development planning sensitive to the needs of the differently-abled, elderly and gender in areas such as Land Use Policy and spatial planning; and building housing settlements that allow residents to work, do business, attend school and their neighbourhoods.
In relation to the housing sector, settlements are designed on the basis of fostering that sustainable include avenues for attractive business opportunities; communities recreate within 28  Greater All Self-Reliance and Prosperity – for institutionalising the measures to effect the social and economic transformation so as to positively impact socio-economic problems such as crime, poverty and inequity; and build a cadre of human of creating and generating wealth to usher in an era of prosperity for all.
resources capable upon and integration planning must sustainable Responsible development be circumscribed within a spatial context and by respect for the environment.

Population growth, climate change and changes in the country‘s development thrusts have resulted in competing demands for the country‘s limited land resources.
The draft Planning and Development of Land (PADL) Bill allows for delegation of development planning and development control to Municipal Corporations; and coordination of planning and building level; approvals at establishment of a statutory ―Chief Building Inspectorate‖ at the level of the Commission to provide a technical oversight function to the Municipal Corporations; provision of a ―One-stop Shop‖ of statutory agencies involved in the development regulatory regime, and the creation of a statutory appeal process to replace the current ad-hoc procedures of appeals to the Minister.
The new Land Use Policy will facilitate and development a clearly sustainable manner identifies land use through zoning of coherent that the municipal in agricultural, commercial, and conservatory spaces.
residential that governs possible is critical Protecting and conserving our natural resources to advancing economic development and improving our quality of life, and this must be balanced with promoting economic activity that uses our resources as productively as possible to provide the socio-economic greatest benefits.
Maintaining the equilibrium between economic activity and the provision of social services requires adherence to a legislative and policy framework the management of renewable and non- resources.

environmental renewable Therefore, legislation finalising draft such as the Air Pollution Rules, the Solid and Hazardous Waste Rules and the Beverage Container Bill will encouraging industries and companies to footprint, increase their efficiency and conduct energy audits.
Also, amendment of the Green Fund legislation to include the restoration of areas that have been damaged environmental poor practices and the establishment of the National Parks and Recreation Authority to protect environmentally sensitive areas while simultaneously creating green spaces will secure the needs of future generations.
their carbon reduce by international Furthermore, updating the National Environmental Policy to incorporate all recent commitments strengthens Trinidad and Tobago‘s obligation to the global community (such as the United Nations Conference on Sustainable Development in Rio de 29 at home.
Janeiro (Rio+20)) and enhances the consistency and integrity of policy and execution Also, implementation of the Climate Change Policy will increase the use of new and innovative technologies that have lower levels of emissions, encourage the use of clean energy technology and renewable energy and promote more energy- efficient technologies and practices.

foundation Efforts to transform and improve lives must be guided and fortified by the tenets of good and effective governance.
The of Government‘s development plan is that of inclusion and, therefore, participation, consensus building, accountability, transparency, responsiveness, equity and gender- mainstreaming will continue to be integral to the decision-making process.

Soliciting comments from the individual, the family, the community and the wider population will effectively ensure direct citizen participation.
Labour, Civil Society and the Private and Sector are all partners with the State in forging our country‘s development agenda.

As a small, open, developing country, Trinidad and Tobago acknowledges the of multi-lateral important development institutions in providing technical and financial assistance to advise and help fund the transformation process.

Institutions such as the Inter- the American Development Bank, Caribbean Development the and European Union have been significant partners as we forge ahead.
role the policy Setting framework is imperative to chart our desired development path and achieve appropriate our goals.

The MDGs and Government vision for Trinidad and Tobago are congruent as they all seek to empower and improve the lives of individuals.

As the timeframe for the current policy framework comes to a close, is necessary stock of our take achievement and plan for the years ahead.
We have already commenced the planning process for the next phase of the policy agenda from 2015 to 2021 that will seek to intensify efforts to bring forth continued prosperity for our people and nation.
to it Methodology for MDG Report In addition to the UN's Guidelines for country reporting on the MDGs, this Report built upon the efforts of the Social Indicator's Committee established in 2003, comprising several government Ministries, Civil Society, Private Sector and regional and international organizations including the UNDP.

the In 2011, an Inter-Ministerial team was to review, comment and convened update the draft Report.
More recently, in 2013, comments on the draft Report following from were solicited Ministries: Ministry of the People and Social Development; Ministry of Education; the Ministry of Gender, Youth and Child Development; Ministry of Health; Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources; Ministry of Trade, and Industry, Communications; Ministry of Finance and the Economy; Ministry Tertiary Education and Skills Training.

This process was led by the Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development.
Investment 30 that Consequently, information comprehensive view of efforts being undertaken to accomplish each MDG the Report Goal.

extends contains beyond the reporting requirements for the indicators to include sections such as a policy context for each goal and key projects and programmes.

Moreover, it was felt that each goal must adequately and quickly present the reader, at a of glance, accomplishments.
Each Goal, therefore, contains key highlights after each indicator and these are presented as short precise statements of progress.

In addition, the Report sought to present some of the issues faced in moving towards the MDG targets and how these were being addressed.

status with the These combined efforts resulted in modified targets in the case of Goals 2 and 6 as well as new and modified Indicators as discussed in the Introduction of this Report.
several Goals for The additional indicators sought to measure progress with respect to issues and challenges development which the country faces which were not adequately reflected in the original list of Indicators.

The production of this Report was constrained by the unavailability of timely and relevant data.

In 2011, the Housing and Population Census was conducted and the updated data for estimating current poverty levels will be made available in 2014.
In instances where there were little or no data available, proxies were used to address from these international agencies were also used to In most augment country data.

be not instances, disaggregated the to Urban/Rural dichotomy.

could according Data gaps.

data data It is anticipated that the data challenges would be addressed and updated information presented in a subsequent 2015 MDG Report of Trinidad and Tobago.
Currently, the CSO is being strengthened and refocused based on a thorough restructuring of its operations and current and future national needs.
In preparing the Trinidad and Tobago Millennium Development Report 2014, Government‘s intention was to present a 31 32 GOAL 1 Eradicate Extreme Poverty and Hunger TARGETS Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people whose income is less than one dollar a day INDICATORS Proportion of population below $1 (PPP) per day Poverty gap ratio Share of poorest quintile in national consumption Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all, including women and young people Growth rate of GDP per person employed Employment-to-population ratio Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people who suffer from hunger Proportion of employed people living below $1 (PPP) per day Proportion of own-account and contributing family workers in total employment Prevalence of underweight children under-five years of age 1.9 Proportion of population below minimum level of dietary energy consumption 33 GOAL 1 Eradicate Extreme Poverty and Hunger Targets:  Halve Between 1990 and 2015 the Proportion of People Whose Income is Less than US$1.00 Per Day;  Achieve Full and Productive Employment and Decent Work for All, Including Women and Young People;  Halve between 1990 and 2015 the Proportion of People who Suffer from Hunger Introduction Millennium Development Goal 1 – Eradicate Extreme Poverty and Hunger – is of unmistakable importance to Trinidad and Tobago.
Although the Human Development Index for Trinidad are needed and Tobago remains high,7 greater advances in wealth distribution and in further reducing already declining poverty levels.
The intention is to reduce poverty levels to the point of eradication to achieve the key result of ―a society from poverty‖.8 free fulfilment of The importance of poverty eradication was further emphasised when it was placed as a national, medium-term priority in the context of the country‘s development agenda of becoming a knowledge-based, innovation driven economy.9 Government acknowledges that the existence of poverty threatens this development the agenda.
Poverty deprives the nation‘s citizens of the right to live with dignity and free from want.

Housing, health and education are often minimal and affected families are typically unable to fully participate in meaningful social and economic activities.

Socio-economic disparities as well as a sense of hopelessness can be created, thereby fostering dependence and a shirking of individual responsibilities.

Poverty also has the potential to heighten social tension.
Child poverty, can also lead to the abuse of the involvement of youth in criminal activity, which robs our country of valuable human capital.
children and The loss of human capital is, therefore, the greatest threat that poverty poses to 7 United Nations Human Development Index 1990- 2012 8 Annual Performance Report 2013 9 Trinidad and Tobago Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014 34 since critical human the future development of Trinidad and Tobago capital development is viewed as the single for most transforming the country‘s economy and society10.
This is aligned to UNESCO‘s philosophy that ―skills are vital for poverty reduction, economic recovery and sustainable development‖11.

success factor healthcare, The approach used to combat poverty from 1990 up to 2009 varied.
It ranged primarily from the utilization of make- shift programmes aimed at offering temporary employment, to the delivery of social support services such as grants, including food support, and a system of subsidization of basic services like education, transportation and utilities like fuel.

Focus was placed on facilitating access to education through upgrading and expansion of school infrastructure from pre-school to secondary level.

Nearing 2001, special emphasis was also placed on tertiary education.
Whereas this approach impacted on poverty as evidenced by declines in the poverty rates between 1992 and 200512, the rates were still unacceptably high, given our sustained economic prosperity.

increasing access to In 2010, the Government of Trinidad the and Tobago sought approach to addressing the issue of poverty to achieve even greater results.

This revised approach was based on the principles of ‗Prosperity for All‘ and to revise 10 ibid.
11 (any particular document /report) 12 Trinidad and Tobago Survey of Living Conditions 1992 and 2005 ‗Everyone Counts‘, and the philosophy that all citizens of Trinidad and Tobago ―have the right to and deserve a decent standard of living that conforms to the tenets of a just, humane and civilised society.‖13 These principles materialised in the form of key policy shifts, one of which sought to create and adopt an analytical framework that addressed the needs of citizens based on the stages of their life cycle.
Government‘s belief remains that this targeted approach will be more effective in breaking the cycle of poverty – especially for children, young adults, women and communities – and in specifically targeted creating opportunities socio-economic for advancement.

The focus has thus been on the following areas: i.

Each individual member of the family at each stage of his/her life cycle; The collective family unit; ii.

iii.

Each community; and iv.

Each region of the country.


in being targeted The policy shift towards regional-based five development has resounded growth poles or strategic regions of investment for development.

This initiative stemmed from the national vision to create prosperity for all through innovation and and diversification.
entrepreneurial-based The intention is to reduce regional by disparities collaboration development creativity, in 13 Ministry of Planning and the Economy, 2011, Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014, p. 81.

35 decentralising economic activity thereby improving the standard of living among citizens and ultimately combating poverty throughout the country.

This would also serve to fulfil the national mission of economic inclusiveness while at the same time promoting investment and diversification.
These policy shifts were buttressed by seven Development Pillars which were also established in 2010.

In particular, Pillar 2 – Poverty Eradication and Social Justice – has placed necessary emphasis on economic inclusion, setting specific for poverty reduction, and targets protection and care the most vulnerable in the society.

for Medium-Term Targets 2011 to 2015 relating to Poverty Reduction 1.

Reduce Poverty by 2 percent per year to 2015 2.


Reduce the Poverty Gap from 4.6 percent to 3.5 percent by 2015 3.

Reduce the Gini Coefficient from 0.39 to 0.21 by 2015 4.

Fulfil 90 percent of the Millennium Development Goals by 2014 and 100 percent by 2015 5.

Improve HDI Ranking by 15 points by 2015 Government‘s policy shifts in combating poverty were articulated in the country‘s Medium Term Policy Framework 2011- 2014 and more recently, in the National Performance Framework 2012-2015.
These documents also outlined national reduction as targets for poverty highlighted above: Based on the results of the 1992 and 2005 Survey of Living Conditions (SLC), as well as the 1997/1998 and the 2008/2009 Budgetary Household Surveys (HBS), poverty levels have been declining.

Both surveys also revealed that a low percentage of citizens suffered from hunger and that the Poverty Gap continued to narrow.

This progress suggests the positive impact of policy approaches to reducing poverty.
Notably, the low unemployment rate of 5.3 percent during 200914 may have also contributed to reduced poverty levels during that year.

The Surveys also showed that the proportion of underweight children under five years of age declined.
This may be attributable to Government‘s promotion of healthy eating habits, the implementation of the National School Feeding Programme which provides breakfast and to vulnerable lunch children of school age as well as the provision of food cards via the Targeted Conditional Cash Transfer Programme to These low households.

further programmes are highlighted below in this Goal.

income these successes, Despite income is inequality persists.
However, expected that the implementation of the growth poles development strategies will address the disparities while further reducing poverty levels.
it Government‘s multi-dimensional 14 Central Statistical Office 36 for key income strategies, that have sections of the margins of approach in combating poverty informed several namely: restructuring the economy to provide earning meaningful opportunities the traditionally population operated on the economy; increasing access to adequate and affordable social services like housing and healthcare; empowerment vulnerable; of strengthening social capital at the community level to promote synergies that provide support and produce opportunities sustainable for development; and building the country‘s human capital through education, training and skills building.
poor and the Target: Halve Between 1990 And the Proportion of People 2015 Whose is Less Than Income US$1.00 Per Day Trinidad and Tobago, is well on its way to achieving this Goal by 2015 as data from the Household Budgetary Surveys showed a 38 percent drop in the proportion of the population living below the poverty line between 1998 to 2009 based on the definition of ‗poor‘ used in official national surveys.

poor.
poor.

The poor is defined as those who: lack jobs; are unemployed or under- levels of employed; have are and attainment educational uneducated or under-educated; and have inadequate skill sets and are altogether unskilled or semi-skilled.
reduced of and single and/or poverty In recognition of the multi-dimensional nature gender mainstreaming, the data from the SLC and the HBS also revealed that female- headed parent households with persons having low levels of educational attainment and training had a greater probability of being poor and had reduced access to potable water and quality housing.
However, more recent data based on the 2011 Housing and Population Census revealed significant increases in the percentage of households with access to potable water (as described in Goal 7).

There have also been improvements in the quality of the housing stock evident analysis of both the 2000 and 2011 census data.

This data showed declines in the number of households with outer walls made of wooden/concrete and wood/galvanise materials during the period.
Indicator: Proportion of Population below the Poverty Line The 1992 and 2005 Surveys of Living Conditions (SLC), the 1997/1998 and Budgetary Household 2008/2009 Surveys (HBS) as well as the 2000 Population and Housing Census developed for analysis a set of common points which described the nation‘s SIGNIFICANT DECLINES IN POVERTY LEVELS In Trinidad and Tobago, two measures are used for analysing poverty levels - the indigence line and the poverty line; and the two of the main surveys used for calculating these measures are the 37 HBS and the SLC15.
The metrics used in both surveys for determining poverty levels are shown below in Table 1.1.

Both surveys are regarded as valid for the purpose of gauging poverty levels in Trinidad and Tobago.
TABLE 1.1 Indigence and Poverty Lines for Trinidad and Tobago 2005 Survey of Living Conditions US Dollars17 2008/2009 Household Budgetary Survey US Dollars Indigence Line Poverty Line $1.31 $2.41 $3.42 $6.80 Source: 2005 SLC & 1997/1998 & 2008/2009 HBS of the was indigent, Based on the 2005 SLC, 1.2 percent of the population (approximately 15,600 persons) earning TT$3,060 or less per annum; and 16.7 percent population (approximately 217,100 persons) was classified as poor and fell below the poverty line, representing a decline by 4.3 percentage points since the 1992 SLC.
A further 9 percent in 2005 (approximately 117,000 persons) was (Table 1.2 considered below).16 vulnerable the the poverty two periods.

This from 24.1 percent line showed a below significant decline by 9.3 percentage points to 14.8 percent, representing a 38 percent drop between is believed to be due to a combination of growth in the availability of employment targeted generating poverty reduction programmes, skills training programmes, income transfers and other socio-economic restructuring activities.
The data from both HBSs also showed that the population living in from 8.3 extreme poverty declined percent in 1997/1998 to 2.6 percent in 2008/2009 – a 69 percent drop.

programmes, Poverty by Region levels of poverty The map below18 (Chart 1.1) shows the proportion of the population living below the national poverty line by Municipality or Regional Corporation and, by extension, the in certain areas that were higher than the national poverty rate.
The map reveals that less than 30 percent of population and in Couva/Tabaquite/Talparo Regions was living below in 2008/2009.

At the other extreme, 50.1 to 59.3 percent of the population in Mayaro/Rio Claro, Siparia and Tobago fell the poverty poverty Martin below Diego line the the line.

Based on the 1997/1998 and the 2008/2009 HBS, the population living 15 The SLC and HBS calculate poverty using both the indigence and poverty lines.
The absolute poverty line was determined following a costing of a basket of goods deemed necessary to ensure that basic dietary needs were met.

16 Calculations are based on a population size of 1.3 million.

17 Based on an exchange rate of US$1:TT$6.4 18 The Map was developed by the Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development based on the 2008/2009 Household Budgetary Survey.
38 TABLE 1.2 Poverty Measurements (1992-2009) Survey Year SLC SLC 1992 2005 HBS 1997/1998 HBS 2008/2009 Population Below The Poverty Line Population Living In Extreme Poverty Poverty Gap Gini Co-Efficient 21.0 16.7 24.0 14.8 -- 1.2 8.3 2.6 7.0 4.6 5.3 4.2 0.42 0.39 0.39 0.39 Source: 1992 & 2005 SLC & 1997/1998 & 2008/2009 HBS CHART 1.1 Percentage of Households Under the Poverty Line by Regional Corporation Source: Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development 39 The dispersion of poverty among these Municipalities suggested that the issue was not necessarily a rural/urban phenomenon, but may be related to other multi-dimensional factors like the availability employment of opportunities.
Further investigation is required into these factors especially given the relatively high percentage of households under the poverty line in traditionally non-rural areas like Port of Spain and Tunapuna/Piarco.

to at policies develop Moreover, Government recognised the need and programmes bringing targeted poverty alleviation measures closer to the persons who needed them.
Thus, an important thrust of the economic and social transformation effort is the wider dispersion of productive activities across the country.

One of Government‘s key for effecting this programmes transformation is the five growth poles mentioned earlier.

These growth poles are to be spread strategically across the nation, and each growth pole will be a centre of investment in a specific cluster industry.
These clusters would serve to the in jobs create surrounding thereby impacting positively on poverty levels in those areas.

citizens for communities Chart 1.2 shows the five growth poles targeted for development, of which, four are intended to address the disparities within Regions and promote economic inclusiveness.

These four growth poles will be located in the South West Peninsula, North Coast of Trinidad, North East of Tobago and East Port of Spain.
CHART 1.2 Strategic Investment Growth Poles Source: Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014 pg.

67 40 Poverty by Sex showed In comparing the overall poverty levels for males and females, the 2008/2009 HBS data significant difference in the percentage of poor female-headed households which stood at 36.7 percent compared to poor male- headed households which accounted for 63 percent (Chart 1.3).
a CHART 1.3 Poverty by Male and Female Headed Households E G A T N E C R E P 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 63.2 36.7 51.5 30.0 11.7 6.8 Relatively Poor Extremely Poor Total Poor Male Female Source: CSO.

2008/2009 Household Budgetary Survey for higher The differences in the percentage of households classified as ‗relatively poor‘ compared to ‗extremely poor‘19 were male-headed also households, consistent with the overall data.
Moreover, the higher percentage of poor male-headed households persisted despite the historically lower employment force participation rates among females than labour and males as discussed further in this Goal.

It is therefore recognised that there may be other contributing factors to this result and as such, further research is required.

When examining poverty by sex and municipality, the 2008/2009 HBS data revealed a dispersion of poverty between the sexes in both rural and urban areas.
It also showed that more municipalities had a slightly higher number of poor women than men.

In seven of the fifteen Municipalities,20 women outnumbered men in terms of being classified as relatively poor and extremely poor.

Men outnumbered women in four municipalities21 in these classifications, but with minimal differences in numbers.
Given that more municipalities had more women who were poor in comparison to poor men but with little difference in numbers, the 2008/2009 data suggests that only a slight poverty gap existed at that time in Trinidad and Tobago in terms of region and sex.

These results also pointed to the need for community level data within these municipalities which could offer specific insights into the factors affecting poor households and perhaps reveal trends not observable at the municipal level.
What is encouraging to note is that the gaps between males and females in a number of capacity-building areas, in been particular education, have 19 The relatively poor are defined as those individuals who fall between the indigence line and the poverty line of $TT469.20 and $TT1329.24 (per month).

The extreme poor households are those falling below the indigence line.

20 These were: Penal/Debe, Princess Town, Sangre Grande, Diego Martin, Chaguanas, San Fernando and Arima.
21 These were: Mayaro/Rio Claro, San Juan/Laventille, Point Fortin and Siparia.

41 narrowing, as further discussed in Goal 3 of this Report.

Indicator: Poverty Gap Ratio Poverty by Ethnicity The 2008/2009 HBS data revealed that the ethnic groups primarily impacted by poverty were persons of African, East Indian and Mixed descent (Chart 1.4).
Of these groups, a slightly higher number of Africans were poor when compared to East Indians, while Mixed persons22 represented a little more than half the size of the two poorest ethnic groups.

The data further revealed that no household was deemed to be poor Syrian/Lebanese among population; and minimal households among the Chinese, Caucasian and Other groups.
the CHART 1.4 Poverty by Ethnicity 1207 1142 182 247 0 5 0 0 9 1 223 1 1 752 1500 1000 500 0 Relatively Poor Extreme Poor Source: 2008/2009 Household Budgetary Survey 22 Mixed persons in Trinidad and Tobago comprise persons primarily of a combination of African and East Indian but can also include persons of other combinations of ancestry.
THE POVERTY GAP HAS DECREASED BUT INCOME INEQUALITY PERSISTS The Poverty Gap reflects the average shortfall of the poor from the total population from the poverty line - counting the non-poor as having zero shortfall - expressed as a percentage of the poverty line.

This measure reflects the depth of poverty as well as its incidence23.

The poverty gap ratios24 shown in the 1992 and 2005 SLC analyses indicated a reduction in the poverty gap from 7.0 percent to 4.2 percent.
Using the HBS data, the ratios declined from 5.3 percent in 1997/1998 to 4.2 percent in 2008/2009.

However, the Gini-coefficient remained unchanged at 0.39 in the 1997/1998 and 2008/2009 HBSs, indicating no change in income inequality between the two periods.

Indicator: Share of the Poorest Quintile in National Consumption AVERAGE MONTHLY EXPENDITURE OF THE RICH EIGHT TIMES HIGHER THAN THE POOR Based on per capita expenditure, the 2005 SLC the nation‘s grouped households into - quintiles.
Data for the poorest quintile showed a monthly 23http://mdgs.un.org/unsd/mdg/Metadata.aspx?Indic atorId=2 24 Poverty gap ratio is the mean distance separating the population from the poverty line (with the non-poor being given a distance of zero), expressed as a percentage of the poverty line.

42 minimum expenditure of TT$127.0 (US$19.85) and a maximum monthly expenditure of TT$884.0 (US$138.13).
The average monthly expenditure of the richest quintile was more than eight times the average expenditure of the poorest quintile.

A substantial proportion of the total monthly expenditure of the poorest quintile – 41.1 percent – was spent on food, representing 17.4 percentage points and 42 percent more than that of the richest quintile which spent 23.7 percent on items.

Non-food expenditure for the poorest quintile showed a figure of 58.9 percent versus the richest quintile with a figure of 70.3 percent.
food an which revealed represented The 2008/2009 HBS data, which was divided into deciles, as opposed to quintiles, average expenditure of $TT576.35 per month for the poorest decile, based on an income of $TT773.77 per average month, an expenditure rate of 74.5 percent.

The average expenditure rate of the richest decile was much lower at 59.7 percent based on the average monthly income and expenditure of $TT11,518.11 and $TT6,876.45, respectively.
Moreover, expenditure on food for the poorest decile was 37.5 percent compared to the richest decile of 15.4 percent.
Both of these percentages suggest a relatively low food share since 37.5 percent was considered lower than that of Latin American Countries.25 25 Central Statistical Office and UNDP and In the absence of time series data, the unchanged Gini-coefficient of 0.39 in 2008/2009 1997/1998 and institute demonstrated the need to measures that would result in an increase in the disposable income of persons within the poorest quintile and deciles.
In an attempt to reduce the existing gap between the nation‘s poor and the rich in a fiscally responsible and viable manner, targeted income transfer generating initiated.

These programmes were provide included opportunities to empower the poor such as the Micro Enterprise Loan Facility and Micro Enterprise Grants highlighted later in this Goal.
Moreover, given the low food share of households in the poorest decile, emphasis has been placed on assisting these households with non-food expenditure items such as access income homes, low subsidized public transport and free healthcare, as discussed further below.
programmes income to to Achieve Full Employment and Target: Productive and Decent Work for All, Including Women and Young People Indicator: Growth Rate of GDP per person Employed NEED TO INCREASE WORKER PRODUCTIVITY For the period 1990-2011, the growth rate of GDP per person employed increased significantly, moving from - 17.20 percent in 1990 to 56.88 percent 43 in 2000.

However, the figure declined to 33.65 percent by 2011 (Chart 1.5) suggesting increase productivity.
the need to CHART 1.5 Growth Rate of GDP per Person Employed (1990-2011) E G A T N E C R E P 80 60 40 20 0 -20 -40 56.88 33.65 -17.20 1990 2000 2011 Source: Central Bank of Trinidad and Tobago & CSO In order to increase productivity, a Productivity Council was established in 2009, to, inter alia, advise Government on productivity strategies and policies.
Indicator: Employment-to-Population Ratio INCREASED JOB OPPORTUNITIES FOR WORKING POPULATION BUT MORE NEEDED FOR THE YOUTH The employment-to-population ratio showed moderate increases over the 21- year period 1990 to 2011.

In 1990, Trinidad and Tobago‘s ratio of 45.65 percent indicated a rate that was below the internationally accepted range of between 50 and 75 percent.

This suggested that a substantial proportion of the population was not directly market-related participating activities.
in the 2000 and 2011 censuses, In however, increases in the employment- to-population ratio were recorded at more acceptable levels at 53.70 percent and 59.14 percent, respectively (Chart 1.6).

The overall increasing trend in the ratio suggested that a reasonable working-age of proportion population became employed pointing to an job opportunities for this group and/or more skilled persons accessing jobs.
increased availability of the CHART 1.6 Employment to Population Ratio (1990-2011) E G A T N E C R E P 80 60 40 20 0 74.3 45.65 37.8 1990 75.3 53.70 72.3 59.14 47.0 49.3 2000 YEAR 2011 Male Labour Force Participation Rate Female Labour Force Participation Rate Employment-to-Population Ratio Source: CSO by However, when analysing labour force participation rate by sex, the data also showed that more of those jobs were attained by males than females as indicated force the participation rates during 1990-2011.
The female labour force participation rate remained below 50 percent for this entire period, moving from 37.8 percent in 1990 to 49.3 percent in 2011. the Consequently, programmes like Women’s Unemployment labour Relief 44 Programme were developed to cater to the employment needs of women.

On the other hand, while the participation rate for males remained above that for females, the former declined slightly from 74.3 to 72.3 percent over the same period.
necessary work experience desired by employers in both the private and public sectors.

Indicator: Proportion of own-account and contributing total employment family workers in in the increase Despite job opportunities evident by overall decline in unemployment rates since 2009 (Chart 1.7), the unemployment rate for persons 15-24 years continued to remain high.
During 2000 to 2011, the unemployment this age rate category remained above 20 percent26 indicating the need to pay specific attention to youth employment.

The issue was notable among tertiary graduates, of which 18 percent was unemployed after one year.27 for the its supply to strengthen Government has been addressing these issues in a number of ways.
It has been promoting entrepreneurship among the youth and tertiary graduates and has begun linkages between the labour demands of the from the economy and education and to improved labour market information.

Labour market studies, for example, were the conducted facilitate development of the growth poles initiative discussed earlier.
Another initiative – the On-the-Job Training Programme offer opportunities for the youth to gain the training system continues to to – 26 Central Statistical Office, Continuous Sample Survey data.

27 MTPF 2011-2014.

Data based on graduates from the University of the West Indies.
MORE PERSONS JOINING THE LABOUR FORCE COMPARED TO SELF-EMPLOYMENT Own-account workers and contributing family workers are viewed as being their employment vulnerable since arrangements are often informal and these persons to be more tend susceptible to economic downturns.

These factors put own-account workers and contributing family workers at risk for experiencing poverty.
CHART 1.7 Proportion of Own-Accounts and Contributing Family Workers in Total Employment, Both Sexes and Overall Unemployment Rate (1990- 2011) 30 20 10 0 E G A T N E C R E P 22.69 18.45 17.36 20.00 1990 12.10 2000 YEAR 4.90 2011 Proportion of Own-Account and Contributing Family Workers in Total Employment, Both Sexes Overall Unemployment Rate Source: CSO In Trinidad and Tobago, while the and proportion own-account of 45 the contributing family workers in total employment declined over the period 1990-2000 (Chart 1.7), it is notable country‘s overall that unemployment simultaneously rate declined during that time.
It is possible that as persons left the vulnerable state associated with own-account and family employment, they were more successful in finding stable jobs in the mainstream labour market.

of own-account However, there was a levelling off in the and proportion contributing family workers in total employment between 2000 and 2011 while the unemployment continued to decline.
to overall strengthen Government has been consistently promoting entrepreneurship as part of and economic its social and more transformation agenda specifically, through its Micro and Small Enterprise Policy (2013-2016).

to be Several initiatives continue implemented and formalise the micro-enterprise sector while at the same time addressing the vulnerabilities of own-account workers.
Initiatives are based on promoting standard setting, including training and certification; and innovation through the adoption of communication information technology (ICT) and new methods and technologies.

Special areas of focus for the enterprise development youth, women and the disabled.

mentorship; include and Target: Halve between 1990 and 2015 the proportion of people who suffer from hunger Index The Global Hunger (GHI) furnishes us with a global measure of in reducing the country‘s success hunger.
The GHI scoring is compiled as a combination of: (1) Undernourishment; (2) Child underweight; and (3) Child mortality.

Assessed quinquennially, Trinidad and Tobago‘s GHI score has moved from the moderate to low scoring category over the period 1990 – 2013 indicating that was progress made in the areas covered by the Index.
Indicator: Proportion of Underweight Children Under Five Years of Age GREATER EFFORT NEEDED TO REDUCE UNDERWEIGHT CHILDREN The available data28 showed a decline in the percentage of under-weight children from 22 percent in 2000 to 18.8 percent in 2006.

These rates signalled an improved were significantly higher than the average for the Latin American and rates Caribbean regions whose rates were 9 and 7 percent, respectively.
situation but This decline in underweight children may the attributable implementation of the Maternal and be to 28 Multiple Indicator Cluster Surveys, 2000 and 2006.

46 in the Child Health Policy, which, inter alia, aims to promote both maternal and child health including low birth weight.
fight against mal- Further, nutrition, vis-à-vis hunger, the National School Nutrition Programme, currently provides some 44,190 hot breakfasts and 97,831 lunches daily to students enrolled in 822 pre-primary, primary, secondary, vocational special and schools across the nation.
Through this Programme, the National Schools Dietary Services Limited (NSDSL), the State provides one third of the daily dietary intake to vulnerable The NSDSL employs over 70 caterers island-wide, with menus aimed at meeting one the recommended daily quarter of allowance for breakfast and one third of the RDA for lunch.29 (RDA) of nutrients administered by children.
Indicator: Proportion of Population below Minimum Level of Dietary Energy Consumption LOW PERCENTAGE OF CITIZENS SUFFER FROM HUNGER fell below the population According to the 2005 SLC, 1.2 percent of the minimum level of dietary energy consumption.

This result was similar to that of the 2008/2009 HBS which revealed that extreme poverty was very low in Trinidad and Tobago, given that less than 3 percent of all households did not reach the minimum food consumption to have a balanced nutrition.
required utilised initiatives These results pointed to the success of various by Government in improving access to resources to meet the nutritional needs of the population.

The Grow Box Programme, for example, seeks not only to establish home gardens in urban areas where land is scarce, but also to encourage families to produce safe, healthy, their own food, backyards.

For fiscal year 2013, 1,500 families were trained in grow box technologies.
fresh in Further, the Targeted Conditional Cash Transfer Programme (TCCTP), a short- term food assistance programme which promotes nutritional and food security to vulnerable households, was initiated and continues to be implemented.

The TCCTP enables families to purchase basic food items with nutritional value, the health of thereby enhancing persons these households and in reducing the intensity of this aspect of poverty.
Government has also been encouraging healthy eating habits among citizens through education and awareness campaigns.

Breaking the Cycle of Poverty other Like economies, emergent Trinidad and Tobago is faced with development challenges in trying to construct a modern, relevant education and to build a knowledgeable, skilled and marketable work force.
The country is also faced training system 29 http://moe.gov.tt/units_sds.html 47 infra-structure with addressing the issues of: reduced access to credit and capital markets; inadequate and governance structures; environmental degradation; capital flight; lack of and access to adequate and affordable health care, housing and other social unequal services; development.

these conditions that poverty continues to exist.


Breaking the cycle of poverty requires self-sufficiency, opportunities for wealth generation and the effective use of human, physical, institutional and productive resources.30 and is under crime It (PPPs).

We It is imperative that these development issues be addressed if the cycle of poverty is to be broken.
Government‘s efforts are based on collaboration with civil society and by engaging the private sector through, for example, corporate social responsibility and private public partnerships remain committed to attaining this MDG Goal and recognise the economic resources that we possess must be aligned with efforts to tackle these issues, and that these resources must be better managed for efficiency gains.
There is for short-term need, measures like greater expenditure on micro-enterprise training programmes than on cash transfers.

our Long-term measures programme of economic and social transformation and include economic and restructuring creating technologically a more advanced work force.
for example, inclusion, involve and and In order to achieve even greater success in the battle against poverty, there is need to review social programmes for relevance, sustainability and efficiency, and to develop better mechanisms that will more effectively target those in need.

This remains hindered by the lack of specific data on socio-economic vulnerability at the community level.
In- depth research to attain poverty profiles of the poor at the municipal and community levels must therefore be conducted; a pilot project is already underway in one community.

This will not only serve to improve the targeting mechanisms welfare programmes but facilitate to a greater extent the equitable distribution of the resources.
institutionalisation cyclical evaluations will play a key role in impact of regularly assessing poverty programmes, including training programmes targeted the poor, and will provide at information the articulation of for effective policies.

Moreover, reduction social the for of for number identified A of multi-dimensional initiatives have been simultaneously undertaken to break the poverty cycle.
Key outcomes the initiatives were: access to adequate and affordable housing; self-reliant and communities; and an sustainable efficient and effective social protection system for the poor and vulnerable.31 These initiatives were aligned to the key strategies as previously mentioned, namely: restructuring the economy to 30 National Performance Framework 2012-2015.

31 National Performance Framework 2012-2015 page 68.
48 housing increasing access income earning provide meaningful opportunities; to adequate and affordable social services healthcare; like poor; empowerment strengthening social capital at the community level; and building the country‘s human capital.
and the of The Way Forward Restructuring the economy to provide meaningful income earning opportunities Improving the Standard of Living across Communities As the previously mentioned, identification of the five regional growth poles was intended to combat poverty by improving the standard of living for citizens in these areas through the elimination of regional development disparities.

A variety of areas or clusters within each growth pole have for building already been identified industries.
This would be achieved entrepreneurship, through among Government, collaboration Private Sector and Civil Society and by harnessing the existing resources and potential of communities within these geographic spaces.

required To date, approvals for the governance the systems implementation the growth poles were attained.
The been structure governance the established which to execute for has includes strategies collaboration with Economic Development Board working in community stakeholders to oversee this initiative.

Baseline studies also commenced to identify the areas of competitive advantage in each pole.
In relation to the South West Growth Pole, for example, a situational analysis was completed which suggested possible clusters for development in the areas of fishing, asphalt energy, agriculture, manufacturing, garment and wood and wood related products.

A labour gap analysis for this growth pole was also completed.

Further, through the Ministry of Public Utilities, several programmes are being implemented to provide electricity, water and sanitary facilities to rural communities.
The impact can be seen in in households with water closets and access to potable water as shown in Goal 7. tremendous increase the Targeted Sectors for Development Agriculture and Food Security Food Security sustainable a is development issue linked not only to economic stability but to malnutrition and poverty eradication.

By developing a productive, modern and competitive agricultural sector, Government intends to simultaneously tackle poverty and attain economic diversification.
The intention is to achieve the key result area of becoming a ―food secure nation by 2015 and the national outcome of and to having adequate access 49 affordable food.‖32 and In developing a strategy to deal with unemployment, poverty particularly among the youth and women, agriculture was identified as one of the avenues through which sustainable job opportunities could be created.

In so doing, two national targets were established.
The first target was to increase employment in agriculture to 5 percent by 2015, which, in 2012, stood at 4 percent.

The food second target was to reduce inflation to 25 percent by 2015.

This is likely to be accomplished since as of September 2013, the food inflation rate was 9.3 percent.

To date, several key initiatives to build the agriculture sector have been undertaken.
These pertained to, inter alia, increasing agricultural production; the distribution of and improving land; to access tenure of strengthening youth farmers; and participation increasing productivity locally produced goods.

agricultural land encouraging in agriculture; the for Of note is the Youth Apprenticeship Programme in Agriculture which allows persons aged 15-25 to be exposed to technological knowledge and skills involved in the business of agriculture.
A total of 615 trainees graduated from the Programme while 41 persons enrolled for the period September 2012 to March 2013.

In addition, through the 32 Annual Performance Report 2013, Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development.

Agriculture Now Initiative, 291 persons were trained in agricultural techniques in fiscal year 2013, with the aim of achieving the target of 3,000 persons trained by 2015.
Agriculture The Professionals Development Programme also allows tertiary level graduates with degrees in Agriculture to be mentored in primary agro-processing, production, agricultural academic development and professional skills in the sector.

In fiscal year 2013, 28 professionals graduated from the programme and 3 new agri-businesses were established.
Increased Access to Adequate and Affordable Housing, Education and Training and other Key Social Services Breaking the cycle and effects of poverty a broad-based requires the response.

Our efforts toward reduction of poverty resulted in several measures aimed at enfranchising the poor and indigent of Trinidad and Tobago.

Housing The Accelerated High Density Housing Programme is aimed at increasing the availability of low and middle income housing units for rent or purchase by low and middle families.
During fiscal year 2012-2013, 3,000 new housing units were completed, representing a 157.5 percent increase from the previous year of 1,165 units.

Three housing developments were income 50 home improvement grants were upgraded and 57 subsidies for new homes were also issued.

Moreover, from fiscal year 2011 to September 2013, and 2,382 emergency issued.
Additionally, during fiscal year 2013, 220 sanitary plumbing projects, 337 house electrical wiring projects and 574 minor house repairs projects were completed.

These projects were targeted at low income families.

A programme of squatter regularisation, aimed at providing basic infrastructure such as drainage, water and electricity, was undertaken by the Land Settlement Agency (LSA).
In fiscal year 2013, 20 squatter sites comprising 3,525 lots were granted final approval from the Town and Country Planning Division.

A further 500 persons were selected via the Land for the Landless Policy which allows access to a 2 percent low mortgage rate facility.

Additionally, state assistance for home ownership for persons at the lower and middle income scales was initiated.
Moreover, for fiscal year 2013, 1,500 Certificates of Comfort were to households within squatter settlements throughout the country, thereby providing them with security of tenure.

issued Free Healthcare Free healthcare is provided to all adults and children in Trinidad and Tobago at public health care institutions.

The State has invested heavily over the years and continues to invest in the Sector to enhance and expand health care facilities and to widen the scope of expanded.
therapies available to health care citizens.

Some of these improvements are highlighted in Goals 4, 5 and 6 of this Report.

In addition, the Chronic Disease Assistance Programme (CDAP) was programme provides free prescription drugs and other pharmaceutical items to citizens combating chronic health conditions.

For the period October 2012 to March 2013, 37,071 new patients accessed treatment drugs free of charge at private establishments.
specific This Increasing Access to Social Protection Public Assistance Grants, Disability Grants and Pensions are offered to citizens who are poor and vulnerable, including the elderly, single female- headed households and the differently- abled.
These grants are intended to improve access to social protection while building an efficient and effective the poor and for social system vulnerable.33 During fiscal year 2013, 25,785 Public from 25,233 Assistance Grants up grants received in 2012; 24,312 Disability Grants; and 82,509 senior citizens received Senior Citizens Pension as of fiscal year 2013. received persons Apart from these grants, a number of socially displaced persons also benefit the Street Dweller, Removal, from Rehabilitation Reintegration and Programme and the Street Outreach Programme.
These programmes cater to the needs of the socially displaced 33 Annual Performance Report, 2013, Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development.

51 ranging from accommodation to medical assistance and re-integrative support services.

In fiscal year 2013, 170 street dwellers were brought into the Street Dweller, Removal, Rehabilitation and Reintegration Programme; and under the Street Outreach Programme, 142 street dwellers were referred for rehabilitation and 164 for mental health services.
Additionally, persons 60 years and over have access to free transport on the Public Transport Service buses and the National Ferry Service.

Also, a dial-a- ride service for differently-abled persons has been instituted.
Increasing Access to Food and Reducing Hunger in Households of level line with our commitment to In increasing food access to all, and addressing the problem of the 1.2 percent of the population falling below dietary the minimum consumption, as previously mentioned, breakfast and lunch are provided daily through the National School Feeding Programme to students in need at pre- primary, primary, secondary, technical and vocational institutions.
As at June 30th 2013, 157,122 meals were provided and for the period October 2012 to March 2013, 50,000 vulnerable citizens also received meals.

This initiative is implemented in addition to the Grow Box Programme discussed earlier as well as the TCCTP highlighted further below.

Empowerment of the Poor and Vulnerable It to seeks programme that is developmental in nature.
provide opportunities for the empowerment of the poor while improving the quality of life of the household through retraining, job placement or small business development.

Clients who make strides towards self-empowerment graduate from the programme after two years.34 For fiscal 2011 to March 2013, over 40,397 persons benefitted from the TCCTP.

Of these beneficiaries, over 5,200 persons graduated from the programme and were no longer deemed indigent.
The TCCTP and Government‘s Micro Enterprise Loans Programme Facility and Micro Enterprise Grants Programme encourage self-reliance and provide empowerment opportunities for the poor and vulnerable by offering loans and grants to those who aspire to become entrepreneurs.

During Fiscal year 2013, 65 Micro Enterprise Loans were distributed to 5 Community-Based Organisations (CBOs) and 273 Micro Enterprise Grants were distributed.
Employment Assistance The Unemployment Relief Programme (URP) provides temporary employment assistance but also simultaneously provide empowerment opportunities for the poor and vulnerable since it was restructured to incorporate training and re-training components for participants.

These components are geared toward introducing and re-introducing persons into the world of work and viable employment.
The TCCTP, as previously mentioned, is facility an electronic cash transfer 34 http://www2.mpsd.gov.tt/content/targeted- conditional-cash-transfer-programme-0 52 to work During the fiscal year 2012, it was found that a number of mothers who enrolled in the programme had children with physical disabilities; more than 200 mothers had children with cerebral palsy.
It is recognised that women caring for children with a physical or mental disabilities contributed to their inability in mainstream 8:00a.m-4:00 p.m. type jobs.

Therefore, the URP, which employs persons within their neighbourhood, caters specifically to women and the working hours are designed to facilitate family or other commitments.

For the period October 2011 to June 2012, 28,000 persons the were programme‘s rotation policy.
Further, the URP Women's Programme provides training for employed women in areas such as crafts, furnishings, cleaning, painting, community work, geriatric care and beautification of surroundings.
employed based on Strengthened Social Capital at the Community Level Community Based Micro-Finance engage reduction The Micro Enterprise Loan Facility is a poverty initiative which equips Community-Based Organisations in promoting to actively sustainable livelihoods among the poor through the provision of micro loans with minimal interest rates and support to micro entrepreneurs.
Under the Facility, the State provides grants to CBOs to lend to individuals in their communities in order to start new or expand existing micro enterprises.

MEL provides borrowers with the following benefits: (1) community-based business loan services; (2) business training for all interested persons; and (3) after-loan services and business support.
The Micro Enterprise Grants of up to $5000.00 have been given to over 1500 persons in the past three years.35 In addition, the Basket of Funding the Programme reduces poverty at community level by providing training and micro enterprise development activities.

To date, 33 projects were implemented throughout the country.
Senior Citizen Investment their vulnerability In recognition of the value of our senior citizens and to poverty, Senior Citizens Centres or multi-service facilities were established as outlets to provide physical, social and mental stimulation and support mechanisms to persons 55 years and older.

The aim of this initiative is to enable older persons to remain active, healthy, and productive and engage in lifelong learning.

Eight Senior Activity Centres were established during the period 2011 to 2013.
Community Infrastructure Grants The Self-Help Grants Programme was expanded as a means of reaching more of the nation‘s poor.

These grants promote community infrastructure and rehabilitation projects the provision of financial, physical and technical assistance to individuals and through 35 Ministry of the People and Social Development.

53 communities.

Labour benefitting communities is utilized.


from within Community-Based Development Training and Skills Government continues to construct and upgrade community centres which enable community cohesiveness and development by facilitating the planning of community-based activities such as training These programmes.
include the Community programmes Education Programme which trains persons in technical and vocational skills; and the Community Volunteer and which Apprenticeship delivers services to civil society groups aimed at poverty alleviation.

The Community and Regeneration Programme also offers multi- and trans-disciplinary projects to the poorest communities in a range of areas reporting, procurement and entrepreneurship.
Enhancement Programmes financial like Building Human Capital Education and Skills Development through Education as the key tool to combat poverty particularly There can be no doubt of the unmistakable role that human capital through development, education, plays in combating poverty and to its potential contribution terms of economic prosperity enabling citizens to self-actualise, create and innovate.

in In Trinidad and Tobago, education is a major focus for breaking the cycle of poverty.
It is seen as the main vehicle for elevating persons into sustainable and meaningful jobs and is integral to the national agenda of economic and social transformation of the country.

Efforts lifelong also learning Government has therefore embarked on key initiatives to build human capital such as reforming the education system and improving access to education, in particular, early childhood and tertiary include education.
promoting and instilling positive values and attitudes such as civic responsibility and the importance of enterprise.

The intention is to create a highly educated, skilled and motivated workforce, in order to break the poverty cycle.

Further details of these undertakings are discussed under MDG 2.
54 55 GOAL 2 Achieve Universal Pre-School, Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Education36 TARGETS Ensure that, by 2015, children everywhere, boys and girls alike, will be able to complete a full course of pre-school, primary, secondary and tertiary level schooling INDICATORS Indicator: Net Enrolment Ratio in Pre-school Education Net enrolment ratio in primary education Proportion of pupils starting grade 1 who reach last grade of primary Net Secondary School Attendance Rate Tertiary Education Participation Rate Literacy rate of 15-24 year-olds, women and men 36 This Goal has been modified by the Government of Trinidad and Tobago to suit the national context.
56 GOAL 2 Achieve Universal Pre-School, Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Education Target: Ensure that, by 2015, children everywhere, boys and girls alike, will be able to complete a full course of pre-school, primary, secondary and level schooling tertiary Introduction Trinidad and Tobago is in an enviable position of being able to provide to prep-primary, universal access primary, tertiary education to its citizens.
Having already and achieved Universal current Secondary Education, secondary Primary and initiatives also indicate that the country is well positioned to achieve universal early childhood education by 2015. that The remarkable gains in the education system were made possible through the commitment of successive Governments to treat education as the number one priority towards social and economic growth and in the fight against poverty.
A common thread in all Governments‘ education policy papers37 is the shared belief future competitiveness economic sustainability is ensured by investing heavily in its human capital, a critical asset in building a knowledge-based, innovative, competitive and prosperous economy.

The current Administration‘s commitment, is encapsulated in Pillar I of its seven- pillar Plan for national development.
country‘s and regard, this the in PILLAR 1: People-Centred Development– We Need Everyone and All Can Contribute in In a country of 1.3 million people, the optimum contribution of each and every citizen is crucial.

In a knowledge-driven economy, a strong basic education system and significant participation tertiary education make a decisive difference.
Accordingly, we commit to making human development a central thrust through the education system and through the creation of lifelong other learning, institutional strengthening and the building of a competitive economy.
SOURCE: People’s Partnership Manifesto, 2010 infrastructure skills to support building, 37 Draft Plan for Educational Development in Trinidad and Tobago 1968-1983; Education Policy Paper 1993- 2003; and Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014 57 Education, therefore, is perceived as fundamental to the achievement of all other development goals.
While it may not be a panacea, education provides citizens with the much needed knowledge and skills to alleviate poverty and hunger, combat diseases, reduce ensure mortality infant environmental sustainability.

and Even though progress has been made in increasing access to education at all levels, as the system expands, there is quality demand the improvements to keep pace with the ever changing social and economic environment.
social for therefore, challenge, The the progression from ensuring access to ensuring relevance, equal participation and quality education.

is secondary (Advanced Proficiency) levels of education while the MTEST has responsibility for tertiary education and technical/vocational education.

which includes The school system comprises public schools, both Government and Government-assisted (denominational schools), and private schools, which are managed by private interests.
All schools operate under the tenets of the Education Act Chapter 39:01 of 1966. Financing Education: counting the costs Education is so highly valued that, more often than not, the education sector receives the largest share of the annual national budgets compared to other critical sectors such as Health and National Security.

is highlighted in Table 2.

1.


This Structure of the Education System in Trinidad and Tobago TABLE 2.1 to its falls mainly under Since in 1962, Independence Trinidad and Tobago has built a complete education system from pre- tertiary education.

The school for responsibility administrative education the purview of two Ministries – the Ministry of Education (MOE) and the Ministry of Tertiary Education and Skills Training (MTEST).

The Tobago House of Assembly (THA), by Act No.


40 of 1996, the responsibility has administration of education in Tobago, including curriculum.

The MOE is the administrative authority for the pre- primary, primary, secondary and post- the for Annual Government Expenditure on Education/Training, National Security and Health for Fiscal Years 2009/2010 – 2013/2014 Fiscal Year Education and Training National Security Health TTD $Mn.
4,341 3,585 3,437 8,700 8,325 4,742 4,762 2009/ 2010 2010/ 2011 2011/ 2012 2012/ 2013 2013/ 2014 Source: Ministry of Finance: Annual Budget Statements 5.503.7 5,170.5 9,149.1 6,497 9,820 5,096 4,724.9 5,108.7 58 Over the last 5 years, an average of 15 percent of the national budget has been appropriated and Training.

Table 2.2 below indicates the percentage of the national budget allocated to education and training over the period 2009/10 to 2013/14.
Education to TABLE 2.2 Annual Government Expenditure on Education and Training as a Percentage of National Budgetary Allocation 2009/2010 – 2013/2014 Fiscal Year National Budgetary Allocation $TT Mn 44,366 49,015 47,000 2009/ 2010 2010/ 2011 2011/ 2012 2012/ 2013 2013/ 2014 Five Year Average 61,400 58,400 Budgetary Allocation Education and Training $TT Mn 3,437 Education & Training as a Percentage of the National Budgetary Allocation % 7.7 8,325 17.0 8,700 18.5 9,149.1 15.7 9,820 16.0 15.0 Source: Ministry of Finance: Annual Budget Statements The Government is largely responsible for financing all levels of education except for early childhood education which is financed mainly through fees paid by parents to private institutions.
The thrust of the government, however, is to regulate the sector and make early childhood education free and accessible to the wider population.

Further, the State continues to invest heavily in providing the physical infrastructure and administrative systems at the pre- primary level.

Public funding covers 100 percent of recurrent and capital expenditure of both Government and Government- assisted schools from pre-primary to secondary levels.
Therefore, education is provided free of charge at all Government and Government-assisted schools from pre-primary to secondary levels.

the At the tertiary level, there are two public universities: regionally- owned University of the West Indies (UWI) and nationally-owned University of Trinidad and Tobago (UTT).

UWI is an autonomous public institution which receives about 85 percent of its recurrent expenditure from Government transfers and subsidies.

Tuition fees make up the remaining 15 percent.


Regional governments fund 100 percent of the capital expenditure.
At the tertiary level, undergraduate at public and private students percent institutions 100 receive financial assistance fees through the Government Assistance for Tuition Expenses (GATE) Programme, which was introduced in 2006. for tuition for tertiary cost associated with public The assistance level tuition escalated from $102 million in fiscal year 2004/2005 to $625 million in fiscal year 2010/2011 due to the GATE Programme.
59 Going Beyond MDG Targets Quality Universal Early Childhood Care and Education by 2015: making it happen Since Trinidad and Tobago has already achieved universal access to primary and secondary education, additional indicators for pre-school and tertiary education have been included in the The Government has set Report.

targets to provide access to universal early childhood education for children between the ages 3-4 years by 2015 and a 60 percent participation rate in tertiary education by 2015.
These targets are consistent with Government‘s goal to develop a well-articulated and seamless education system from early childhood to tertiary level that meets the needs of all citizens as well as the developmental agenda for the country.

achieve to Pre-Primary Education Indicator: Net Enrolment Ratio in Pre-school Education38 NEAR UNIVERSAL PRE-PRIMARY EDUCATION ACHIEVED for pre-school Net enrolment rates children increased from 88.2 percent in 2006 to 89 percent in 2009.
Steady progress in the net enrolment rate is expected to reach universal proportions by 2015 in light of the under-mentioned initiatives.

38 This Indicator was added by the Government of Trinidad and Tobago.

and relevant institutionalisation of formal, The quality, inclusive education from an early age is essential in creating a society of successful adults and a workforce that is capable of leading and moving the country forward.
The focus on Early Childhood Care and Education (ECCE) continues to be high on Government‘s agenda.

Early childhood education has long been regarded as the foundation for basic education and lifelong learning and development.

Traditionally, early childhood education has been provided by private operators at over 700 private schools and accessed mainly by families who could afford to pay the fees.
There are approximately 194 Government and Government-assisted early childhood centres catering to Central Statistical 7,359 children.

from the 2011 census Office data indicated pre-school that population was 38,000 children.
the In an effort to regulate the sector to give every three to four year old child an equal start, the Government has been working ensure universal early childhood education by 2015. assiduously to To achieve this, Government has adopted a three pronged approach that includes the construction of new centres, the creation of ECCE spaces in underutilised primary schools and the providers engagement private of 60 through public/private partnership arrangements.
in 2007, ECCE the MOE Commencing initiated construction programmes aimed at providing service in lower socio-economic status areas.

Over the last two years, 29 new centres were constructed thereby providing spaces for approximately 2,175 children of the targeted age group.
forward, of Going the Ministry Education‘s main programmes for increasing the number of ECCE centres are the Seamless Education System (SES) Programme, which is financed in part by a loan from the IADB, and the Build 100 Programme financed by the State.

Under the SES, fifty new state-of- the-art ECCE Centres will be constructed in two phases of 24 and 26 respectively.
At the end of 2012, construction had commenced on 18 Phase 1 ECCE Centres with 6 more carded to commence in 2013; and site identification had commenced for the Phase 2 SES as well as the Build 100 Programme.

These initiatives have already started to yield results as demonstrated in enrolment rates.
increase the in to address The SES seeks the deficiencies in the ECCE sector not only in terms of the physical accommodation for pre-primary children, but in the curriculum, training of ECCE teachers and the management of the sector.

Given the disparate structure of the sector, Government‘s emphasis is on providing the enabling environment to for equitable access to all allow students, including those with different learning needs.
This will facilitate the smooth transfer from ECCE through to tertiary level via articulated curricula and performance standards.

Thus, in order to improve access to and quality of ECCE, Government continues to strengthen the institutional capacity to oversee implementation of the national standards and the curriculum guide for early childhood education.
Primary Education Indicator: Net Enrolment Ratio in Primary Education OVER 95 PERCENT ENROLMENT RATIOS SINCE 2005 Trinidad and Tobago has met the target of universal enrolment in primary education.

Net enrolment ratios have been over 95 percent for both males and females since 2005 (Chart 2.1).39 The data showed that enrolment ratios for males were slightly higher than that of females (see Chart 2.1 below).
While the difference is small, its consistency over time is noted and requires further investigation.

It is also noted since the reverse is observed at higher levels of the education system.

39 Data for 1991-1999, 2002-2004, and 2006 are not available.
61 CHART 2.1 Net Enrolment Ratio in Primary Education by Sex (1990 - 2009) O I T A R 100 98 96 94 92 90 88 Male Female 1990 2001 2007 2009 YEAR Source: Ministry of Education Indicator: Proportion of Pupils Starting Grade 1 who reach last grade of Primary HIGH PRIMARY LEVEL COMPLETION RATE BUT IMPROVEMENT IS REQUIRED Over the years, completion rates of pupils starting Grade I (First Year) who reached Grade 7 (Standard 5) (Chart 2.2) declined marginally.
In 2006, the completion rate rose to 98 percent before declining to 92.3 percent in 2009.

The data indicated that some children who had enrolled in first year did not last year of primary complete the education and may have dropped out for varying reasons.

Over time, the MOE has instituted several programmes aimed at providing an enabling environment at all levels of the system to encourage children to stay in school.
These included the provision of free meals, books and transport, as well as guidance and is social work services.

This data since, despite It suggests trend.

investigation these significant interventions, the survival rate is on a downward that is required to further determine the causes of student dropout and the remedies needed to ensure their education.
complete students CHART 2.2 Proportion of Pupils Starting Grade I (First Year) who Reach Grade 7 (Standard 5) (1990 - 2009) O I T A R 100 98 96 94 92 90 88 86 Male Female 1990 1998 2007 2009 YEAR Source: Ministry of Education During the period under review, there has been a general trend of a greater proportion of females reaching Grade 7 than their male counterparts.
This is instructive since the enrolment rates for males were marginally higher than those for females during the last three years of the data series.

Overview of Primary Education in Trinidad and Tobago Universal Primary Education: how it was achieved Since the 1960s, near Universal Primary Education (UPE) was achieved with equal access being extended to all 62 children irrespective of gender, race, religion and geographical location.
Over the decades full universal primary education was made possible through the of successful several key initiatives.

implementation in One such initiative was the Fourth (1995-2003), Basic Education Project which was funded in part by a World Bank loan and was born out of the the recommendations contained Education Policy Paper 1993-2003 National Task Force on Education (White Paper).
The objectives of the Project were to: enhance the cognitive and social development of children in early childhood education to prepare them for primary school; improve the quality of teaching and student achievement in improve classroom primary school; curriculum instruction strengthening; and to improve the physical infrastructure of facilities at ECCE centres and primary and secondary schools.
and The outcomes of the project included the construction of several new primary schools and ECCE centres, provision of textbooks and instructional materials, teacher curriculum revision.

Implementation of the various measures not only facilitated increased access to primary education but also impacted the quality of education delivered.

training and Today, there are 476 public primary eight schools education districts to which primary spread across the school-aged children have free access.
Of these schools, 137 are Government and 339 are Government-assisted 18 which denominational boards.

are managed by For the academic year 2009/2010, there was a total of 6,662 teaching and administrative staff at public primary schools.

Approximately 90.5 percent of primary school teachers were trained since they had graduated from Teacher‘s Training College, while 9.5 percent were academically qualified but had not attended college.
At the primary level, 77.53 percent of teaching staff were female, while 68.81 percent were female principals and 77.54 percent were female Vice-Principals.

The pupil/teacher ratio at the Primary level compares favourably with other countries.

Latest available data shows an improvement in the Pupil/Teacher ratio in primary schools to 18:1. its programme One of the major challenges facing primary education is the dilapidated the school condition of many of buildings which are well over 100 years old.
While Government has consistently invested in refurbishing schools, it has heightened of reconstruction and rehabilitation of schools in order to provide a safe and secure learning environment as well as to support the implementation of the new, expanded curriculum.

Within the past three years, 12 primary schools were constructed and another 10 are under construction.

Government plans to construct another 42 primary schools over the next 2 years.
63 time the construction Initiatives have also been undertaken to reduce for primary schools as well as the cost of include construction.

introduction pre-engineered construction methods, and award of Design/Build which eliminates the need for two sets of tendering.
contracts These of Assuring Quality and Relevant Education Testing and Assessment The main indicators used to measure student academic performance are the results of regional examinations administered to students at the primary and secondary levels.

local and the National Test to administered The National Test (NT) is a standardized all examination Standards I to IV40 pupils in all public and private primary schools in Trinidad and Tobago.
Its purpose is to provide and for making decisions data developing to improve educational output at the school, district and national levels.

Students in Standards I and III are tested in English and Mathematics.
strategies intended in the The performance of schools National Tests is also monitored and is measured using the annual Academic 40 Commencing in 2013, the NT will be administered to pupils of Standards I to III only, in order to facilitate the the Continuous Assessment introduction of Component (CAC) of the SEA.

Performance Index (API)41 which places schools in 1 of 4 categories: Excelling; Mostly Effective; Academic Watch; and Academic Emergency.
Table 2.3 shows that there was an increase in the number of schools that were placed in the Excelling category, while there was a decline in the number of schools which did not meet the required standard and categorized as being under Academic Watch.

TABLE 2.3 Performance of Primary Schools in the National Test (2011-2012) YEAR API Category Academic Watch Mostly Effective Excelling Total 2011 2012 No.
of Schools 120 % 22.3 No of Schools 28 % 5.2 394 73.2 384 71.4 15 529 2.8 98.3 121 533 22.5 99.1 Source: Ministry of Education Secondary Entrance Assessment their The Secondary Entrance Assessment (SEA) test is also a standardized administered to Standard V pupils to test in Mathematics, Language Arts and Creative Writing.

Students are placed into secondary schools based on the individual scores achieved.
Approximately 90 percent of skills 41 The Academic Performance Index (API) is an indicator of school‘s performance and is calculated based on the percentage of students meeting the required standards in Mathematics and Language Arts on the National Test.

The composite score is used to place schools into four categories: (1) Excelling (401- 560); (2) Mostly Effective (241-400); (3) Academic Watch (81-240); and Academic Emergency (0-80).

64 the students are placed at five and seven year secondary schools.
Students who score below 30 percent are allowed to repeat the examination in the following year.

The number of repeat students has been steadily decreasing each year.

The figure decreased from 4.7 percent in in 2012 as to 2.1 percent 2008 highlighted in Table 2.4.

TABLE 2.4 Number and Percentage of Students to Repeat SEA (2008-2012) YEAR No.

Wrote No.

Placed No.


and % of Repeaters 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 17855 17615 17268 17280 17863 17024 16964 16867 16872 17492 831 (4.7%) 651(3.7%) 401 (2.3%) 408 (2.4%) 371 (2.1%) Source: Ministry of Education Generally, more girls than boys scored in the above 90 percent and above 60 percent bands the SEA.

The in percentage of females scoring in these bands during the period 2005-2011, was significantly higher than male students.
Overall, the percentage of students scoring in the above 90 percent band or range declined from 8.7 percent in 2005 to 4.5 percent in 2011.42 The gender differential in the above 90 percent band was larger than the above 60 percent band.

The largest gender difference occurred in the 30 percent and below band where, over the period 2005-2011, approximately seven out of every ten students scoring in this band were males.
of issue emerging This finding is instructive in respect of the the underperformance of males especially when coupled with the data which revealed that a smaller percentage of males than females complete the full course of primary education.

This issue has not gone unnoticed and steps are being taken to unveil the underlying societal circumstances and develop appropriate policy responses.
Curriculum Review The Government, in keeping with its objectives to produce innovative and critical thinkers, has initiated processes to reform the primary and secondary schools curricula.

Under the Seamless Education Programme, nine subject areas of the primary curriculum were reviewed and the new curriculum was implemented in September, 2013 at Infants I and II and Standard I in all primary schools.

All principals and teachers have to implement the new curriculum.
trained been The new curriculum is intended to encourage children to embrace their varied talents and interests.

To realise this, the Continuous Assessment Component (CAC) of the Secondary Entrance Assessment was introduced.

specified of consists The CAC curriculum objectives for achieving skills and competencies not previously subject to assessment on a national scale.
These skills and competencies will be gained by students as they participate in active hands-on learning feedback supported detailed by 42 Ministry of Education 65 provided through their teachers from practice assessments.

Assessment will pertain to students engaged in specific the application of activities and standard scoring guides.

The CAC was implemented in Standard V as a part of the assessment criteria for the SEA for the first time in the academic year 2012-2013.
Special Education: meeting the needs of differently-abled students adopted has approach a GORTT The comprehensive towards Special Education.

It involves bringing the support services to the child rather than moving the child to the service.

Currently there are 12 public special schools; two government-owned and ten government-assisted.

There are also 14 private special schools registered with the Ministry of Education which offer programmes for students with special educational needs.
and happy children its vision educational to prepare for the Consistent with healthy, normal development of children, the MOE has prioritised the delivery of specialised services for learning.

The emphasis is on providing services to treat with the neurological of and children.

To this end, the Testing and Neuro-Diagnostics of Children Project was initiated and is being piloted at eight ECCE Centres and eight primary schools.
To date, 3000 students at these 16 pilot schools have been cognitive processing screened difficulties.

development for Secondary Education Indicator: Net Secondary School Attendance Rate43 HIGH RATES OF ATTENDANCE AT THE SECONDARY SCHOOL LEVEL The Net Secondary School Attendance Rate44 showed an increase from 87.2 percent in the 2007/2008 academic year to 89.9 percent in the 2011/2012 academic year.
Despite these high rates, like primary education, emphasis needs to be placed on the participation and completion level of education.

rates this for Overview of Secondary Education Trinidad and Tobago in 134 Government The current stock of secondary schools comprises and Government-assisted secondary schools and 29 private secondary schools.
Like their primary school counterparts, free students are provided with textbooks, while free transportation, breakfast and lunches are provided for needy students in public schools.

At the secondary level, for the academic year 2009/2010, there were 7,661 teachers, comprising 2,637 or 34.4 percent males and 5,024 or 65.6 percent in Government and Government-assisted secondary schools.

employed females, 43 This Indicator was added by the Government of Trinidad and Tobago.
44 The average attendance of secondary school children enrolled expressed as a percentage 66 secondary the For Pupil/Teacher ratio improved to 14:1 in 2009 (Chart 2.3).
schools, CHART 2.3 Pupil/ Teacher Ratio at Primary and Secondary Levels (2000 - 2009) O I T A R 25 20 15 10 YEAR Primary Secondary Source: Ministry of Education Universal Secondary Education: a bold and courageous undertaking to access then known as Universal secondary education (USE) was achieved in 2000.
The Government of the day took the bold decision to fast track USE by in secondary schools all placing Standard V students who wrote the placement secondary school examination the Common Entrance Examination (CEE).

The shortfall in places was met through the purchase of places at Private Secondary Schools and Life Centres, as well as the creation of new places via construction of ten new secondary schools under the SEMP (in the first instance) and establishment of 12 Government-assisted Secondary schools.
Prior to this, approximately 70 percent of students transitioned from primary to secondary school based on at the CEE.

their performance Moreover, there was an uneven distribution of secondary school places by educational districts resulting in uneven transition rates.

It was also found that children from the most disadvantaged homes who often lacked the wherewithal to do well did not obtain secondary school places.
for demand the major reform of In an effort to reduce the inequity in the system and at the same time satisfy the growing secondary education, the Government, in 1999, initiated the secondary school system45.

Though the Secondary Education Modernization Programme (SEMP), sweeping changes were made to secondary education.

Noteworthy, the SEMP was in line with the 1997 declaration by CARICOM Ministers of Education that all member states implement universal secondary education by 2005.
The SEMP was implemented over a 9-year period and ended in September, 2009.

Among the major achievements of the SEMP were:  Construction of 17 new schools the country distributed across low service with emphasis on areas, rural districts and those with the most urgent need.

All the schools were equipped with including ramps and facilities washrooms for wheelchair access for differently abled to cater schools students.
These new provided school places for 9,975 students; 45 Prior to SEMP the last major growth phase was during the oil boom of the 1970‘s when the junior and senior secondary schools were built.
67  Training of over 800 teachers in the Teaching of Reading, and instituted the Reading Intervention Programme;  Development of curriculum and Teachers Guides for Forms I-V in 8 core subject areas;  Establishment of the Textbook Loan Programme;  Outfitting of all secondary schools mobile computers, with laboratories, audio-visual equipment and expanded library facilities;  Training of teachers in various areas such as Computer Literacy, Visual and Performing Arts, Technology Education, Physical Education School Management and Leadership; and of  Training of Heads of Departments and Principals secondary schools in Education at the post- graduate level, including Masters;  De-shifting of 20 junior secondary schools and conversion of 18 comprehensive schools into single shift 5-year and 7-year schools, respectively.
of transformation Building on the successes of the SEMP, the Government continues to invest in the secondary education in order to meet the diverse learners and those of a needs of and complex, technologically labour market.

competitive advanced investments continue in These communication information technology, curriculum reform, teacher and training improving school infrastructure.
development, and and Among the goals of To this end, the eConnect and Learn (eCAL) Programme was introduced in 2010. the programme were: (1) to improve the learning environment for students; (2) improve the quality of instruction and support the infusion of ICT in teaching and learning and the development of 21st century skills in students; and (3) reduce to information between computers and students from wealthy and poor families.
in access inequity the in its received teachers have A key component of the programme has been the distribution of free laptops to all Form I secondary school students.

2010, inception Since approximately 69,000 students and 4000 free laptops at an annual cost of TT$53 million.

More than 650 laptops have also been distributed to Principals, Vice Principals and Schools‘ Supervisors.
With the maturity and continuous improvements the programme, students now have access to a wider learning information and array of resources for subject areas of the curriculum.

of its importance Much has been done over the past two decades to develop secondary education given in preparing students for life, the world of work and tertiary education.
However, much more is required to reduce the worrying issues of drop outs, unacceptable levels of academic performance of students 68 especially among males; and emerging issues such as bullying and school violence.

These concerns have not gone unnoticed by the Government and supportive measures being are implemented to address them.
Student Performance at the Secondary Level The major examinations administered to the secondary school students are regional Caribbean Secondary Education Certificate Examination (CSEC) for Form 5 students and the Caribbean Advanced Proficiency Examination for Lower 6 and Upper 6 students.

(CAPE) Caribbean Examination Advanced Proficiency has The performance of students in the Proficiency Advanced Caribbean (CAPE) Examination been consistently high over the period 2008- 2012.
The results presented in Table 2.5 show that over 90 percent of the students gained passes in Unit I and Unit II over the five years except for the year 2010 when 88 percent gained passes in Units I and II.

TABLE 2.5 Performance of Students at the CAPE (2008-2012) Caribbean Secondary Education Certificate Examination YEAR Subject Entries Unit I Subject Entries Unit II No.

% Passed No.
% Passed No.

% Passed Certificate Based on the 2012 Caribbean Secondary Education Examination (CSEC) results, 42.8 percent of the students were successful in 5 or more subjects while the percentage of students who obtained 5 or more subjects with English and Mathematics was 34.8 percent.

In 31 of the 35 subjects written, 50 percent or more of the students obtained a passing grade (Grades I –III) with 9 of the subjects reflecting a pass rate of 75 percent or more.
Physical Education and Sport recorded the highest pass rate of 92.4 percent.
When the results are disaggregated by gender, 56.0 percent of males and 62.2 percent of females who wrote the examination achieved Grades I –III.46 46 Ministry of Education, 2012 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 22,084 23,415 26,180 26,294 22,378 93.5 91.8 88.0 92.8 94.0 Source: Ministry of Education 1,455 1,564 12,073 12,350 10,617 93.0 90.6 88.0 93.3 93.2 Education and the New Economy Curriculum Improvements School curriculum and the development trajectory of Trinidad and Tobago are intimately intertwined given our policy objective to build the human resource capital base that internationally competitive.
It is, therefore, necessary that the school curriculum is geared towards producing a labour force that is relevant to labour market needs.

consultations have already Public commenced to review the secondary is 69 school curriculum to facilitate the new paradigm shift in the education sector.

The last review took place in the year 2000 under the SEMP.

Teacher Training and Development to a quality Teachers are pivotal education system.
Cognizant of this, the Teaching and Teacher Development Division was established with a mandate to produce and advance teachers who are competent and adequately equipped to efficiently and effectively implement the curriculum and improve student performance.

Over the last two years, training for teachers was provided in including Technology over 15 areas Education, curriculum assessment.

In addition, the MOE has the been working universities their to ensure programmes are aligned to the school curriculum.
closely with that and ICT Technical Caribbean Vocational Qualification Vocational Education– indicated The Technical/Vocational Programme in secondary schools was expanded in keeping with the MOE‘s Strategic Plan 2011-2015 which that children at secondary schools should be exposed to a more varied curriculum, including the exposure to skills-based subjects.

Efforts have increased to encourage students to pursue subjects in the Technical/Vocational area.
By extension, there should be an increase in the number of students requesting certification for the achievement of the Caribbean Vocational Qualification (CVQ) Standards and an increase in the variety of standards on offer to secondary school students.

increase Since the introduction of the CVQ programme in 2008, there has been a in the number of steady schools and students exposed to related skills-based subjects.
The MOE has it mandatory that all since made students undertake at least one CVQ skill with a view to ensuring that all students acquire a specific occupational skill as part of their general education and that Technical Vocational Education is for under-performing students and has little benefit for employment.
the perception remove Beauty standards/units areas In 2011, 1,400 students from 44 secondary schools participated in the in CVQ 23 occupational including Air Condition and Refrigeration, Auto- Mechanics, Therapy, Information Technology Usage and Support, Food Preparation and Poultry Rearing; and in 2012, 1,083 school students wrote the CVQ examinations at the CXC level in 25 occupational areas.

A total of 4,497 units were awarded while 583 persons obtained full units.
As at September 2013, 91 secondary schools offered CVQ subjects; and (32) of these secondary thirty two into new expanding schools are occupational 52 areas.

additional schools commenced CVQ the academic year programmes 2012/2013.

Further, in 70 Tertiary Education Trinidad and Tobago has a rapidly growing tertiary education sector, both at the public and private sector levels.
This has been made possible through the high levels of investment made by the Government to both regulate the sector and finance the tuition fees of students.

Various programmes are the certificate, diploma, offered at associate degree, baccalaureate degree, post-graduate certificate and diplomas, masters and doctoral degree levels.

Both local and overseas programmes are offered catering to academic education and training and technical and vocational education.
Indicator: Participation Rate47 Tertiary Education SHARP INCREASE IN TERTIARY EDUCATION PARTICIPATION RATE The tertiary education participation rate48 increased significantly from 15 percent in 2004 to 60 percent in 2014, thereby achieving its target of 60 percent tertiary education participation rate by 2015.

This increase is due to ongoing reform measures which have made tertiary education more accessible and affordable to students.
Among them was the Dollar for Dollar Programme that was instituted in September 2001, in which the State 47 This Indicator was added by the Government of Trinidad and Tobago.

48 The tertiary education participation rate is defined by the proportion of persons who have graduated from the secondary education system and subsequently enrolled in tertiary education.

in public paid half of the tuition fees for all new students enrolled tertiary institutions.
In 2004, the programme was subsequently replaced by the more all- embracing Government Assistance for (GATE) Programme Tuition Expenses which covers the full cost of tuition for undergraduate students at both private and public institutions once they satisfied the terms and conditions.
Further, students pursuing postgraduate studies at public institutions are eligible for 50 percent of tuition fees per academic year, while those at private institutions receive 50 percent of tuition fees up to a maximum of $20,000 and $30,000 per academic year for Masters and Doctoral programmes, respectively.

In September 2010, the GATE was expanded to include the Technical and Vocational Education and Training Programme at level 2.
The number of students benefitting from the GATE programme increased from 27,214 in fiscal year 2004/2005 to 55,740 in fiscal 2012/2013.

The average enrolment rate has been 53,000 between 2008/2009 and 2012/201349.

through expenses Additionally, citizens can assess soft loans to fund non-tuition related tertiary education the Government-funded Higher Education Loan Programme (HELP).

The fund was it assists in 2006 and established students with such as expenses accommodation and books.
Students may apply for loans up to $25,000 per academic year if studying in Trinidad and 49 MSSTTE: National Consultation, Securing and Expanding the GATE Programme, November, 2011.

71 Tobago or up to $75,000 per academic year if studying at any of the specially approved the CARICOM region.

In 2012, 1,475 persons benefitted from the programme.50 institutions within tertiary Undoubtedly, education expansion has come at a huge financial cost to the State.
The investment in tertiary education over the past decade has been significant; showing a figure upwards of US 4 billion dollars.

The Government, remains committed to expanding the system further, to ensure that all citizens have opportunities, access especially been disadvantaged due to systemic barriers.
those who have education however, to Technical Vocational Education and Training (TVET): more than just a second chance are students who Traditionally, Technical Vocational Education and Training (TVET) has been perceived as catering for the dropouts of the formal academic system or less for inclined.
Some of the academically the have issues programme over time include: (1) lack of stakeholder buy-in and acceptance of (2) under-qualified the programme; teachers to impart specialised skills; (3) insufficient lack of resources; and (5) high failure rate of students in the examinations.
teachers; affected that (4) Assuring Quality Tertiary Level education In the face of the rapid expansion and higher levels of participation in tertiary level education, greater emphasis is being placed on quality assurance and standards.

As such, the Ministry of Tertiary Education and Skills Training (MTEST) has worked toward the further harmonisation and strengthening of regulatory frameworks, systems and co- for quality ordinating mechanisms assurance and accreditation.
To this end, a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) between the Accreditation Council of Trinidad and Tobago (ACTT) and the National Training Agency (NTA) was signed on July 14th, 2010.51 50 51 Ministry of Science, Technology and Tertiary Education.

2010.

Policy on Tertiary Education, TVET and Lifelong Learning.
Given the paradigm shift in education to develop the skill sets of citizens and to promote entrepreneurship, TVET was restructured to give students a more viable alternative to the traditional academic subjects.

As such, the National Training Agency, which was set up in 1999, was given the mandate to rationalise and provide quality and assurance institutionalise to establish a strong link between school and the world of work and to foster more active private sector engagement.
TVET,52 mechanisms for As at 2012, there were 2,000 GATE approved programmes/courses, but only 95 were classified as TVET programmes.

The Standing Committee on the GATE Programme, however, has been working to increase the number of for TVET programmes that qualify 52 72 GATE funding.
Further, in 2013, a Joint Select Committee was convened for the to establish the guidelines to expansion accommodate TVET to the inclusion of Level II, in addition to Level III and above previously ineligible.53 of GATE funding which were in In an effort to increase access to and the TVET sector, participation Workforce Assessment Centres were to assess and certify introduced through non- competencies gained formal means using a system of Prior Learning Assessment and Recognition.
continued that obtain The future of TVET is assured through inter-ministerial the collaborations the purpose of the growth and development of syncretism between ―traditional‖ forms of education, TVET progammes and lifelong learning programmes.

for using a 5-level CVQ classification that was approved by CARICOM.
These are:  Level 1: Semi Skilled  Level 2: Skilled  Level 3: Technician  Level 4: Professional  Level 5: Advanced Professional and education Further, in 2005, the Accreditation Council of Trinidad and Tobago was formed to quality assure the entire system for education and training to ensure the imminent existence of a seamless training system.54 To this end, a Draft Tertiary Qualifications was developed and plans are underway to complete a National Qualifications and Credit this academic common a framework currency obtains, which facilitates cross institutional transfer and credit accumulation.
Framework.

Within Framework TVET is much more than providing second chances.

It‘s about producing innovative, enterprising, competent, certified and entrepreneurial citizens capable of contributing to the continued development of Trinidad and Tobago.

TVET, along with tertiary education and lifelong learning, also contributes to the sustainable development of the country.

Meanwhile, the NTA is working to ensure that all institutions offering TVET meet quality standards.
Through NTA‘s quality assurance process, the level of the institution is determined 53 Tenth Report of the Joint Select Committee on Ministries Literacy in Trinidad and Tobago Indicator: Literacy Rate of 15-24 year olds OVER 90 PERCENT LITERACY RATE In 1995, a National Literacy Study in Trinidad and Tobago55 showed that the literacy rate for persons 15-24 years was estimated to be 94.1 percent for males and 97.3 percent for females.

The Study estimated functional literacy to 54 Ibid.
55 Godfrey St Bernard and Carol Salim Adult Literacy in Trinidad and Tobago: A Study of the Findings of the National Literacy Survey 1995 73 be 84.5 percent for males and 93.5 percent for females in the 15-24 age group.

More recent data56 for persons 15-24 years revealed that the literacy rate increased to 99.5 percent for both sexes.
concern especially when Despite these rates there is major cause for the performance of students in English and the national and Mathematics at regional examinations was examined.

Greater emphasis is now being placed on strengthening the foundation in literacy and numeracy at the primary level and providing targeted school the interventions.
Ministry of Education has devised a Project aimed at improving literacy and numeracy levels in students enrolled in Infants Department to Standard I. regard this In The Way Forward in foregoing assessment of the The education country‘s progress indicates that the MDG target for universal primary education was met in terms of access and participation but there are qualitative issues that must be addressed.
This Report sought, however, to give a broader assessment of the overall education sector, hence the inclusion of additional indicators for pre-primary, secondary and tertiary education in the 56 United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation of Statistics 2008/2009.

(UNESCO) Institute Report.

The main measure used to determine country has attained whether a universal primary education is the net enrolment rate.
This means that each child of the specific primary age group should be enrolled in school.

However, the enrolment rates and completion rates for primary school suggested that there is an out of school population that is unaccounted for.

The problem may well existing mechanisms for data collection and reporting or, there are drop outs from schools who are beyond the reach of the system.
is required in order to account for the specific school age population and where necessary improve the efforts to retain children in school.

investigation lie with Further the While there is a range of services provided at all levels of the system to ensure that students make the best of their learning opportunities, the issues of dropouts and under-performance persist.

To address these issues, the Government has adopted a new approach the assessing towards developmental needs of children.
In 2012, the Testing and Neuro- Diagnostics Project was introduced.

The project is designed to treat with the neurological educational and development of students.

The project will be piloted in 8 ECCE Centres and 8 primary schools and subsequently extended to more schools.

Under this range of project a comprehensive services will be offered to students 74 including vision and hearing tests.
The country is attempting to reduce its reliance on the oil and gas sector and promote a development agenda based on innovation and creativity.

This requires a workforce equipped with the skills and competencies to assist in making that shift.

The data, however, show that students are performing below the required standards especially in English and Mathematics at the secondary level.

Cognizant of this, the focus is now on strengthening the foundation at the primary level to build these competencies.
(1) this include: Some of the measures proposed to address the development and implementation of a Literacy and Numeracy plan focusing on raising the level of achievement of students from the Infants to Standard 1 levels; literacy and numeracy coaches; and (3) Formation of literacy teams working with teachers in their respective schools.
(2) Training of To further support the economic shift, it is envisioned that the resources provided under the eCAL Programme will be creatively utilised to develop the skills of students to compete in an ICT driven global economy.

Moreover, this will enhance the teaching and learning process and may be more engaging for students.
While the Government continues to expend heavily on secondary education, questions are being raised about the quality of the graduates being produced and the low number of students gaining for implications the standard five CSEC passes.

This has the dynamic growth of the labour force, employment intake of opportunities and secondary school graduates for tertiary education.
the Mindful of this, some of the measures being undertaken include:  Commencement of examination public consultations for the reform of the secondary school curriculum.

This for a provides the opportunity closer the of curriculum to ensure that it is gender sensitive to the needs of boys and girls.
There is sufficient research that identifies gender as a impact on factor than can learning outcomes; and the opportunities  Co-hosting of Career Guidance Programmes in schools to give to students receive information on career choices, the world of work and to interact with jobs and career coaches.

The Programme is aiming for a 60 percent in participation of secondary schools by 2015. increase is initiative Another the National Mentorship Programme (NMP).
The Programme is geared toward positive youth development and is aimed at young people between the ages of 9 to 25 years from primary to tertiary level as well as the youth who may not have the opportunity to be exposed to a stable mentor.

Participants are paired with role models who will teach them 75 civic fundamental responsibility and positive ways of relating to their peers.

skills, life The NMP is also intended to impact on levels of school violence and the bullying that have been affecting schools.
While all primary schools and Government secondary schools are provided with security services there are still reports of school violence surfacing.

The MOE will be embarking on a recruitment drive to increase the number of guidance officers and counsellors in secondary schools and to have the services available in primary schools as well.

for One issue that continues to be of growing concern is the performance of boys in the education system.
The data indicates that girls are performing better than boys at all levels of the system.

Again, this has far reaching the growth and implications development of the society.

This issue is not confined to Trinidad and Tobago.

Countries such as the USA, Canada and the United Kingdom are also faced with it.
However, there is agreement that it is a new phenomenon since it did not exist 30 to 60 years ago in those countries.57 As highlighted later under Goal 3, the Defining Male Excellence Programme aims to address the issue.

However, more local research has to be done the underlying causes and possible recommendations.

to determine At the secondary and tertiary levels, greater alignment is needed between 57 ―Why boys under-perform in school‖.
of resulted the skills being produced and the skills shortages economy.

The the education output must, therefore, be linked with labour market demand, investment and industry diversification.

This mismatch has in unemployment and underemployment of university graduates.

To ameliorate this situation, tertiary level institutions have introduced additional programmes that are better aligned to the skills needed in the country.
These include 16 new programmes from first degrees to the certificate level offered by the College of Science, Technology and Applied Arts of Trinidad and Tobago (COSTAATT), additional programmes from the post graduate level to doctorate offered by the UWI.

four and Also, there has been increased access to online learning at tertiary education institutions such as COSTAATT and the UWI, St. Augustine.
Notably, the Standing Committee on the GATE Programme indicated that GATE funding will be prioritised based on the following: in  Key drivers of change the country and the global economy which may impact on growth, employment and skills over the medium term;  Quantification of the current and projected demands for skills in sectors with strong employment growth, economically significant sectors constrained by skills deficit and new/emerging sectors expected to deliver sustainable growth and jobs; and 76  Government‘s policy on the levels of entrepreneurship required to drive and sustain the economy.
Some of the projects and programmes related to the achievement of this Goal include:  Expansion of the eCAL Programme in schools;  Improving Schools; infrastructure in  Universal Early Childhood Care and Education;  Improving Academic Performance – Literacy and Numeracy;  Curriculum Reform;  Institutional strengthening in the Ministry of Education;  The revision of teacher training methodologies and expansion of teacher training facilities at the University of Trinidad and Tobago campuses at Valsayn, Corinth and O‘Meara;  Expansion of the UWI through the construction of the Debe Campus, South Trinidad;  Improvement works at the UTT Campuses in San Fernando and Chaguaramas;  Renovation works at the UTT, Scarborough Campus, Tobago;  Plans are being developed for an integrated campus in Tobago to include UTT, UWI and COSTAATT.
77 78 GOAL 3 Promote Gender Equality and Empower Women TARGETS Eliminate gender disparity in primary and secondary education, preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education no later than 2015 INDICATORS Ratios of girls to boys in primary, secondary and tertiary education Ratio of Men and Women in different disciplines in Tertiary Education Share of women in wage employment in the non-agricultural sector Proportion of Women in Different Sectors of the Labour Market Age and Sex-Specific Unemployment Rates Sex-Specific Average Monthly Income Proportion of seats held by women in national parliament Proportion of Positions Held by Women in Local Government 79 GOAL 3 Promote Gender Equality and Empower Women Target: Eliminate gender disparity in primary and secondary education, preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education no later than 2015 Introduction Trinidad and Tobago, like the rest of the international community, recognizes for gender equality and the need in order to women‘s empowerment build a just and sustainable society.
Women across the globe play a critical role in almost every sphere of their country‘s development.

Unfortunately, in some cases their contributions are overlooked and not valued for reasons varying from cultural factors, religion and discriminatory attitudes.
Trinidad and Tobago is resolute in its promotion of gender equality and the Understanding gender equality and women's empowerment for enjoy and men opportunities the rights through work or Gender equality implies a society in which same women opportunities, and outcomes, obligations in all spheres of life.
Equality between men and women exists when both in the sexes are able to share equally distribution of power and influence; have financial equal independence through setting up businesses; enjoy equal access to education and the opportunity to develop personal ambitions.

A critical aspect of promoting the empowerment of women, with a focus on identifying and redressing power imbalances and giving women more autonomy to manage their own lives.
Women's empowerment is vital to sustainable development and the realization of human rights for all.

equality gender is Sour ce: http://www.unfpa.or g/gender /empower men t.htm empowerment of women as evidenced by its ratification of the Convention on All Forms of Discrimination against Women (CEDAW) in 1990 as well as the implementation of other key pieces of legislation as highlighted later in this chapter.
More recently, in 2011, the country‘s commitment to addressing gender-related issues and accelerating progress towards accomplishment of this Goal was further demonstrated with the establishment of the Ministry Child of Gender, Youth Development.
The mandate of the Ministry is to, inter alia, spearhead the national portfolio on gender equality and empowerment; and its strategic objectives are: to advance the status and rights of women and men; develop policies relevant to gender specific and 80 issues thereby promoting the equitable advancement of both sexes in all spheres of development; promote change in gender discriminatory social consciousness and traditions; and build with consultative Non- government (NGOs) Governmental Organizations and private partners in advancing gender equality.
mechanisms agencies, empowerment.

Through the efforts of the Government, in partnership with NGOs, notable fostering a in strides were made for gender facilitative environment equality The and country has succeeded in removing in many gender-based disparities spheres including those relating to the three main indicators of the MDG 3 target of achieving gender parity in primary, secondary, and tertiary level enrolment.
Given the strong supportive environment built by Government, the to country accomplish this Goal by 2015 as measured by the gender parity index in levels and the share of enrolment women in wage employment in the non- agriculture sector.

is also highly likely in country‘s The accomplishments towards gender equity and equality have been improved reflected rankings and scores on a number of international gender indices.
On the Global Gender Gap Index, the country ranked 21st out of 135 countries in 2011; and from 2009 to 2011, the overall score on the index improved consistently from 0.730 to 0.737 (a equality).

score indicates of 1 Additionally, in 2012, the country was ranked 1st among the 135 countries surveyed with respect to the sub index on gender equity in the distribution of professional and technical workers.
Trinidad and Tobago also performed well in the Gender Inequality Index (GII) which measures the inequality between women and men three areas: reproductive health, empowerment and the labour market.

The country was ranked 53rd out of 187 countries with a score of 0.331 in 2011. in Trinidad and Tobago‘s progress in gender equality was also recognized in the Commonwealth Report Card 2010- ―Because you’re a Girl - Growing up in the Commonwealth‖.
This Report examined the importance of investing in women and girls to accelerate social, economic, and political progress.

Out of 54 Commonwealth Member States, Trinidad and Tobago ranked 3rd when evaluated across eight indicators: life expectancy; sheer survival; education for life; early pregnancy; studying hard; political participation; sporting chance; and the pay gap.
a creating for a attaining Two important principles governed the approach taken by Trinidad and Tobago towards facilitative gender environment equality and empowerment: firstly, the assurance that all citizens have equal the opportunity economy, and could do so profitably and effectively; and secondly, citizens could self-actualise and develop their innate potential.
These principles are to participate in 81 to for be achieving necessary considered prerequisites our overarching national goal of social and economic transformation that is based on utilising all our human capital to build a knowledge-based, innovative economy.

have principles These shaped Government‘s policy on gender equality and empowerment.
A main policy shift as outlined in the Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014 is to build a more inclusive and cohesive society in which there is greater equity in the distribution of resources for all citizens regardless of sex.

This policy, in turn, has informed several key strategies which have in enabled attaining and empowerment.
These include: the country‘s success gender parity  Promoting greater awareness of gender issues by shaping public policy and implementing practices which are gender-sensitive;  Reviewing and amending legislation in order that all to ensure legislation and public documents gender-sensitive and also are protect and ensure the rights of women and men in number of areas such as domestic violence and abuse; and  Developing specific programmes and projects such as training and employment initiatives tailored to men and women to address issues peculiar to each sex.
in order and primary Target: Eliminate gender disparity in secondary education, preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education no later than 2015 Indicator: Ratios of Girls to Boys in Primary, and Tertiary Education Secondary NEAR GENDER PARITY IN EDUCATIONAL ENROLMENT AT PRIMARY, SECONDARY AND TERTIARY EDUCATION ACHIEVED Trinidad and Tobago has achieved near gender parity in educational enrolment at the primary, secondary and tertiary levels.
An examination of Gender Parity Index58 (GPI) for education highlighted in Table 3.1 indicates that the Index at the primary level has approximated one over the period 1999 to 2010.

In addition, as discussed under Goal 2, Trinidad and Tobago had met the target of universal enrolment in primary education; and enrolment rates have been over 95 percent for both males and females since 2005 (see Chart 2.1 under Goal 2).
This suggests that gender parity has been achieved in primary education from a statistical perspective.

58 Gender differences are assessed in the Gender Parity Index.

A parity of less than one indicates differences in favour of males, while a value near one indicates that parity was relatively achieved.
82 TABLE 3.1 Ratio of Girls to Boys in Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Education (1999-2010) GPI in Primary Level Enrolment GPI in Secondary Level Enrolment GPI in Tertiary Level Enrolment Year implementation of the national policy to provide universal access to secondary education in 2000 and achievement of education have universal primary ensured that all males and females have equal opportunity to move seamlessly from primary school to secondary school.
N/A N/A N/A 1.28 0.98 2010 Source: Ministry of Education and Ministry of Tertiary Education and Skills Training N/A 1.28 However, it is noted that enrolment ratios for males are slightly higher than that of females.
While the difference is small and could be the result of data its collection consistency further investigation to ensure that females are not placed at a disadvantage in accessing primary education.

methodologies, requires In secondary education, the GPI was just above one over the period, indicating gender parity has been achievement at that level.
Successful At the tertiary level, the trend in the GPI was well above one over the period 1999-2010, indicating the existence of gender disparity in favour of females.

This is not surprising when considering that the results of the CSEC showed a higher percentage of females than males who Student performance in the CSEC is discussed further under MDG 2. successful.
were Indicator: Ratio of Men and Women in different Tertiary Education59 disciplines in MORE FEMALES ENROLLED AT THE UNIVERSITY OF THE WEST INDIES THAN MALES Enrolment data from the major tertiary institution, the University of the West is Indies, St Augustine Campus, consistent with the GPI figures in Table 3.1.
Female enrolment at the UWI exceeded that of male in six out of seven faculties for the academic years from 2005/2006 to 2009/2010.60 The Faculties of Natural Science, Medical Science, Agricultural Science, 59This Indicator was added by the Government of Trinidad and Tobago.

60 The University of the West Indies.

83 Science, Humanities and Social Education and Law had higher enrolment rates for women; the Faculty of Engineering remained the only one where male enrolment outstripped that of female.
The extent of the disparity is revealed in the ratio of the number of males to every 100 females in academic year 2009/2010: for the Faculty of Natural Sciences the ratio was 0.71; Medical Sciences 0.42; Agricultural Sciences 0.61; Social Sciences 0.33; Humanities and Education 0.25; and Law 0.29.61 Indicator: Percentage of Women in Wage Employment the Non-Agricultural Sector in STRONG PRESENCE OF WOMEN IN THE NON- AGRICULTURE SECTOR BUT INCREASED OVERALL LABOUR FORCE PARTICIPATION IS NEEDED Trinidad and Tobago is closing in on achieving a rate of 50 percent of women in wage employment in the non-agricultural sector.
For the 10-year period (2000-2009), the rate of female participation in non- agriculture sector averaged 42.65 percent.

This, in combination with the fact that the rates did not dip below 40 percent, except for 2001, demonstrated a strong presence of women in the non- agricultural figures compared favourably with the global rate for female participation in the non- agricultural force which approximated 40 percent.

sector.

These labour 61 The University of the West Indies.


Labour Force Participation by Sex and Age Overall, the data reflected a gender bias with men having a higher labour force participation rate which averaged 73 percent over the five-year period from 2009 to 2012.

More specifically, during 2011 to 2012, 6,900 females fell outside the labour force in the age range 15-19, while the figure for the age range 20-24 was 192,000.
Over the same period, the number of males in the age groups 15- 19 and 20-24 were 6,400 and 186,000, respectively.

These figures showed that a larger number of the female youth population between ages 15-24 were not participating in the labour force.

One possible explanation could be that females delayed seeking employment in level order institutions.

However, further study in this area to develop appropriate policy recommendations to increase female participation in the labour force.
required tertiary enrol in to is in Indicator: Proportion of Women Different Sectors of the Labour Market62 MORE MALE PARTICIPATION IN THE LABOUR MARKET THAN WOMEN The participation rate of men in the labour market has been greater than that of women.

Over the period 2007- 2011, the proportion of men to women in all industries averaged 3:2 (Table 3.2).

This difference remained fairly consistent over the period.
62 This indicator was added by the Government of Trinidad and Tobago 84 TABLE 3.2 Proportion of Women as Compared to Men in the Labour Market (2007-2011) Industrial Group Year Persons With Jobs Male Female Number % Number % 2007 354,200 60 233,600 40 Total All 2008 353,400 59 244,200 41 Industries 2009 350,000 59 238,400 41 2010 353,900 60 237,500 40 2011 356,600 60 239,500 40 Source: CSO labour Technicians force Males dominated the in almost every approximately 4:1 sector except in the following areas: Professionals; and Associate Professionals; Clerks; and In 2011, women Service Workers.
accounted of percent 53 Professionals; 43 percent of Legislators, Senior Officials and Managers; 65 percent of Technical and Associate Professionals; and 76 percent of Clerks and Service Workers.

for Indicator: Sex-Specific Unemployment Rates63 OVERALL DECLINES IN UNEMPLOYMENT RATES FOR BOTH SEXES BUT FEMALE UNEMPLOYMENT DECLINED AT A SLOWER RATE During 2007-2011, the unemployment rate for women continued to be higher than that of men by an average of 42.8 percent (Table 3.3).
It is noted, too, that the male unemployment rate fell by 41 percent between 2010 and 2011, while the female rate fell by 28 percent.

Though limited, the data demonstrates the need job opportunities for women.
to provide more TABLE 3.3 Unemployment Rate ( percent) by Sex 2007-2011 Year 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 Unemployment Rate (%) %percent) 2007-2011 Female Male 3.9 3.5 4.6 4.9 2.9 Source: CSO 7.9 6.2 6.3 8.3 6.0 Indicator: Sex-Specific Average Monthly Income64 AVERAGE MONTHLY INCOME FOR FEMALES LOWER THAN THAT FOR MALES The average monthly income for females was lower than that for males across nearly all occupational groups by an average of 20 percent during 2007- 2009 (Table 3.4).
In conjunction with this country‘s achievement of gender parity in education, this data suggested that increased opportunities for females through educational attainment did not proportionately into increased employment and equitable to salary males.

opportunities materialise compared 63 This Indicator was added by the Government of Trinidad and Tobago.

64 This Indicator was added by the Government of Trinidad and Tobago.
85 The data presented in Table 3.4 shows that the wage gap narrowed over the period.

In 2009, the estimated average income for men was 5.6 percent higher than that for females, as compared to 8.6 percent from the previous year.

The in wages were smallest differences and among Clerical, Agricultural Elementary the occupations.

For occupations that drew larger salaries, the differences were more significant.
TABLE 3.4 Average Monthly Income by Sex 2007-2009 Year Average Monthly Income All Occupations (TT$) Male Female 2007 2008 2009 4,112 4,640 4,697 3,306 3,758 3,762 Source: CSO public exception Gender wage parity continues to elude women in all occupational sectors, with sector of the administrative type work.

The data presented is significant when analysed within the context of higher poverty level among female-headed households and the consequences for breaking the cycle of poverty.
Indicator: Proportion of seats held by women in National Parliament NUMBER OF PARLIAMENTARY SEATS HELD BY WOMEN TRIPLED SINCE 1990 TO 2012 BUT PARITY IS YET TO BE ACHIEVED under-represented Internationally, women in government in most are countries worldwide compared to men, although there was an increase globally in the number of women who held parliamentary seats in 2012.
In the Caribbean Region, there was an increase of 9.5 percent in the number of women in these positions between 2000 to January 31, 2013.65 Both Dominica and Jamaica have had female Prime Ministers.

In Trinidad and Tobago, the number of in the Political System continues to increase; and in May 2010, the country‘s first female Prime Minister was elected.
females The achievement of this milestone of women politics represents a shift in cultural attitudes about gender roles and has served to encourage more in women to take an active part decision making at all levels of the society so as to effectively influence national development.

National efforts are being made to integrate gender equality and women‘s empowerment into every sector of the country‘s development.
Collaborative global network continues to take place to ensure that women have a real voice in all governance institutions, and that the participation of women at all levels of political governance is both respected and supported from the judiciary to the civil service, as well as in the private sector and civil society.

In so doing, women can participate equally with men in public dialogue and decision- making and influence the paths that future of their will determine the families and countries.
As such, the GORTT took a concerted step toward encouraging greater participation by 65 The Millennium Development Goals Report 2013.

86 the women municipal, regional and national levels.

in political service at Indicator: Proportion of Positions Held by Women in Local Government 66 Like other countries in the Caribbean Region, Trinidad and Tobago is moving decisively towards achieving parity within the political system.
The number in the of women who held seats Parliament increased from 11 percent late 1990s to 27 percent at the last general election in 2010 (Chart 3.1).

In absolute terms, the number of seats held by women in National Parliament over the years has tripled with 12 seats out of 41 held by women in the National Parliament in 2012.

In 2010, women made up 36 percent of all Ministerial positions.
the Following recent 2013 Local Government Elections in Trinidad and Tobago, women held 65 out of 191, or 34 percent, of local government positions.

This represented a marginal increase of 0.7 percent from the 2010 elections where women held 54 out of 164 local government positions.

Trinidad and Tobago is committed to increasing women‘s participation in government at both the national and local levels.
This is evident by the country‘s decision at the 2011 UN General Assembly a mentoring programme for girls from 11 to18 years old who were interested in entering the field of politics.
initiate to 66 This indicator was added by Trinidad and Tobago CHART 3.1 Proportion of Seats Held by Women in National Parliament (1997 - 2011) E G A T N E C R E P 30 25 20 15 10 YEAR Source: CSO Domestic Violence – a Barrier to Self-Actualisation Domestic Violence67 is a tragic reality that affects the lives of many women in all socio-economic and educational classes.
It occurs primarily within the family unit in both developed and developing countries alike.

Domestic violence is not limited by cultural and religious barriers, and impedes the right of women to participate fully in society.

Women are often victims of incest, rape and domestic violence that can have tragic results such as trauma, physical handicap or even death.
As we move forward in safeguarding our men and women, emphasis must be placed on the effective enforcement of 67 Domestic violence in Trinidad and Tobago is defined as any physical, sexual, emotional or psychological, or financial abuse committed by a person against a spouse, child, any other person who is a member of the household or dependent.

87 the laws like the Domestic Violence Act of 1999 to further demonstrate our zero-tolerance for domestic violence.
Government also recognises that a general change in attitude towards gender issues by enforcement agencies and the public was required.

Male Marginalisation – An Emerging Issue?

Both girls and boys have equal access to educational opportunities in Trinidad and Tobago which has resulted, in part, in the laudable achievement of gender in school enrolment at the parity primary and secondary level; and at the tertiary level, female enrolment is found to be higher than that of male.
In moving beyond enrolment levels towards performance of students, it is found that girls tend to outperform boys in the educational system as previously discussed in this chapter and in MDG 2 of this Report.

As in other Caribbean countries, the issue of female versus male performance in the educational evoked questions and concerns about male marginalisation and in Tobago.
Trinidad system has While men still hold higher paying jobs and form the major part of the labour force in this country, the concern of school male underperformance leading to male marginalisation is real given the nexus between education and economic empowerment.

Unchecked, long-term negative this can have in rates consequences such as decreased male participation labour market, increased poverty levels among males and anti-social and even criminal behaviour.
the in Lower Wage and Labour Market Participation Rates for Women Although narrowing, the wage gap between men and women in favour of the former exists and continues to pose a challenge in achieving gender equality in female participation in the labour market also for elevating and has empowering women, economically.

the work place.
the work place.

Lower implications not was there As noted earlier, even though more women than men attained tertiary level education, a commensurate increase in the number of female employed or equitable salary.

An IADB study in 201268 noted that while women in Latin America and the Caribbean were better educated they received lower wages.

Thus, there is a direct link between poverty and gender.
In Trinidad and Tobago, poverty is higher among females since women‘s wages are lower and fewer women in this group are in paid employment.69 Our policy of inclusion and economic and social empowerment of citizens 68 Latin American and Caribbean Women: Better Educated, Paid.

http://www.iadb.org/en/news/webstories/2012-10- 15/wage-gap-between-men-and-women,10155.html Lower 69 ADVOCACY BRIEF: Strengthening Women's Rights.
Economic http://www.unifemcar.org/ge_iss.cfm?SubID=168&lin k_=1 Security and 88 the to addressing dictates that special attention must be paid traditional societal views on the role of women, and structures and systems that stymy labour market opportunities for women and perpetuate gender inequality in the work environment.
The Way Forward Eliminating Violence against Women through The Government of Trinidad and Tobago has taken a stance to combat the harsh realities of domestic violence primarily legislation.

The Domestic Violence Act of 1999, for example, empowers any woman or other person, such as a child or dependant, being faced with domestic violence to seek a protection order.

The Act also treats sexual violence as a serious crime which carries a penalty of five or more years.
While this piece of legislation is meant to address violence in its widest sense, women and children continue face instances of abuse.

Through both Government and private sector agencies, a system has also been established to tackle the problem of domestic violence and address these gaps.
Together, the work of these entities is expected to lead to further law enforcement, improvements increased education and awareness on the issue among members of the public, and a wider range of support services in being offered to victims.

Some of these agencies are:  The Domestic Violence Unit - a ministerial unit which provides a Domestic Violence Hotline.
The National Domestic Violence Hotline (800-SAVE) is a toll free service that is operated on a 24 hours a day, seven days per week (inclusive of public holidays) basis.

It provides listening and referral service for victims of inclusive of domestic referrals to safe-houses.
and violence perpetrators counseling care  The National Family Services Division - a ministerial unit that centres, counseling manages and provides psychological for victims/survivor of violence and offers gender-sensitive training for public officials.
The National Family Services Division utilizes preventative, remedial, developmental supportive approaches to address, inter alia, issues relating to the child and family such as drug abuse, crime, domestic and/or family violence, issues, and sexual relationship also abuse.

investigates are referred from the Courts.


cases which Division and The  The Community Police Division - a ministerial unit which treats with domestic violence cases, in addition safe-houses and to providing assisting in winning legal recourse for victims.

 The Coalition against Domestic Violence is one of the main non- 89 organizations governmental assisting survivors of domestic violence.
This entity is an alliance of organisations and individuals working against domestic and other gender-based The Coalition engages research, public education, counselling and provides legal and educational aid to victims.

violence.

in  The Rape Crisis Society of Trinidad and Tobago, a Non-Governmental Organisation, provides support to survivors of sexual violence.

The counselling Society services and engages in public awareness programmes.

provides while at the same time empowering women.


involving transform on Gender To this end, after widespread public consultations key stakeholders and citizens, a Draft National and Policy It was Development was prepared.

inequitable designed to gender relations with the aim of improving women‘s status relative to that of men.

The is to influence state policy in all areas and to identify strategies to facilitate new and equitable relations between women and men.
intention and  Men against Violence Against Women (MAVAW), a social activist group, engages in public awareness actively programmes participates in reaching solutions to the problem of violence.

MAVAW provides assistance to victims and conducts research on the incidence and in relationships.

intensity of violence  The Caribbean Association for Feminist Research and Action is an association which established a training programme on domestic violence for police officers and social workers.
Developing and Implementing Gender Policy Initiatives In moving forward, there is still much more work to be done in relation to establishing a national regulatory framework to address gender inequality The Draft National Policy recognises the critical role of government in protecting the rights of workers, providing social protection and laying down equitable policy frameworks for entrepreneurship It also provides a and business.
framework gender of perspectives government and civil society, thereby promoting equal participation of men and women in the development process.

including all activities for in and full the Government has also embarked upon a Gender Responsive Budgeting initiative to ensure that budgets and economic policies equitably address the needs of men, women, boys and girls.

This is aimed at closing any social and economic gaps that exist.
Important to this cause is the critical role of all Ministries in their capacity to conduct gender This involves the identification of specific interests and collecting, needs and analytical research.

90 sex- analyzing and disseminating disaggregated data to constitute a baseline against which the differential impact of policy, project and budget commitments on women, men, boys and girls can be monitored.
To date, Draft Gender Budgeting Responsive Guidelines have been developed and, after consultation with key stakeholders, are being finalized.

The implementation of these Guidelines is expected to further impact on gender equality and empowerment within the country.
Addressing Male Performance in Education of into include: a To treat with the issue of declining male participation in tertiary and secondary education, Government commissioned and completed a gender study on the factors affecting male entry and re- the post-secondary and entry tertiary system.
education Recommendations being considered for implementation the establishment results-based performance management system for the education sector as a whole to provide data for strategic decision- making; the creation of a national database of student statistics to track student progress, retention, drop-out and re-entry; and the provision of incentives for institutions to ensure student retention and success.
These measures are expected be used to encourage to maintain established performance standards for male participation and achievement.

institutions the and perceptions implemented Government, through the Ministry of Gender, Youth and Child Development also Defining Masculine Excellence Programme which was developed as a means of stemming the tide of societal problems including violence associated with the negative of concepts masculinity.
One of the programme‘s key objectives is to reduce the incidence of domestic and other forms of gender- based violence.

The programme targets males aged 14 years and over and to provides facilitate group transformation, develop self-esteem and positive attitudes to life as well as build skills to assume positive leadership roles in all areas of life.
them with personal the skills and forward, in moving the Moreover, current review of the primary and secondary school curricula presents an opportunity for Trinidad and Tobago to produce a more gender sensitive curriculum to guide young persons on reproductive health and life decisions.

Promoting Equal Work for Equal Pay though As mentioned previously, there still exists a gender gap in Trinidad and Tobago in terms of equal work for equal the gap has been pay, narrowing.
This must be addressed if the country is to achieve even greater success towards gender equality and empowerment.

To foster women‘s ability to participate in the labour force and earn wages in a fair and consistent manner, special 91 in Harmony programmes were designed for women to develop and enhance their leadership skills and qualities.
For example, the Programme Women specifically targets unemployed women 26–45 years who are also single heads of household; and the Non-traditional Skills Training Programme for Women targets women 18–55 years and is geared towards assisting in reducing the level of poverty and vulnerability of women to gender-based violence and exploitation.
Gender Equality and Empowerment through Legislation and Law Enforcement As mentioned earlier, a critical part of achieving and gender equality through empowerment has been legislative transformations.

Several pieces of legislation, some of which were in fulfilment of key international been conventions, introduced, amended and ratified towards accomplishing this Goal.
These in include: already have In this regard,  Ratification of the Convention on forms of the Elimination of all Discrimination against Women in 1990. the Government has completed an appraisal of all laws containing discriminatory provisions vis-à-vis required women and which amendment to bring them into conformity with the Convention;  Passage of the Counting Unremunerated Work Act in 1996, thereby completing the ratification of Remuneration Equal the the Convention of Labour Organisation; International  Support for the creation of a Convention on Domestic Workers which was adopted in June 2011; and  Enactment and amendment of several pieces of legislation which and support These women‘s include the: gender empowerment.
equality  Domestic Violence Act, 1999;  Sexual Offences Act, 1986 and Offences the Sexual (Amendment) Act, 2000;  Public Assistance Regulations, 1997;  Maternity 1998; Protection Act,  Co-habitational Relationships Act, 1998;  Legal Aid and Advice Act, 1976;  Equal Opportunities Act 2000; and  Trafficking of Persons Act, 2011. these legislation While exist, as mentioned, in order to achieve even greater success in gender empowerment and equality, emphasis is now needed on law enforcement and the swift delivery of justice when rights are infringed.
On-going initiatives towards strengthening law enforcement agencies like reform of the judicial system are also expected to positively impact and thereby enable the fulfilment of this Goal by 2015.

92 of to pertaining establish a central data base system all agencies/organisations that collect domestic data violence.
The aim of the Central Registry on Domestic Violence is to monitor and supervise systems that would permit retrieval of requisite input data that would be necessary in enabling policy- makers and other stakeholders to:  Obtain a profile of victims and persons accused;  Understand the frequency and incidence of domestic violence;  Identify the groups at risk;  Develop intervention programmes; and  Monitor the effectiveness of and violence prevention intervention activities.
Some of the projects and programmes related to the achievement of this Goal include:  Strengthening State Accountability and Community Action to End Gender Based Violence in Trinidad is a collaborative and Tobago initiative with UN Women.
This project focuses specifically on reducing gender-based violence and sexual violence through the increasing state strategies of: competencies; actors‘ strengthening accountability; and promoting social and cultural change through youth-led and gender community responsive social communications.

The project the development of a multi-sectoral the strategic plan protection, and gender-based punishment violence and sexual violence.
is  Women’s City Centre prevention of is aimed at to address driven initiative of a collaborative the Government of Trinidad and Tobago and the IADB Project Team El Salvador.

This Centre will for provide women (a one-stop shop) across five major areas, namely: violence and against women; reproductive health; economic autonomy; community education; and child care.
integrated service sexual  Establishment of a Central Registry is an on Domestic Violence initiative the Government of through the Ministry of Gender, Youth and Child Development to 93 94 GOAL 4 Reduce Child Mortality TARGETS Reduce by two-thirds, between 1990 and 2015, the under-five mortality rate INDICATORS Under-five mortality rate Infant mortality rate Proportion of 1 year-old children immunised against measles 95 GOAL 4 Reduce Child Mortality Target: Reduce by two-thirds, between 1990 and 2015 the under-five mortality rate Introduction Child health concerns the segment of a population aged 0-14.
In Trinidad and Tobago, this cohort accounts for just over 20 percent of the total population with the most vulnerable being aged 0- 4, accounting for around 7 percent.70 Given the awareness that the health and well-being of the youngest is critical for future national development, the 70 Census 2011 Demographic Report, CSO Government of Trinidad and Tobago has embraced the Goal of reducing child mortality as part of its broader strategy to improve child health overall.
through access Its strategic approach to the issue the essential elements of includes fit and human development and a healthy nation, to quality healthcare and other basic services, with specific emphasis on vulnerable groups, including women and children.
More importantly, the Ministry of Health is taking a firm stance in addressing the internal gaps in data collection within the health system, formalising a modern health services structure and updating the policies and procedures to ensure alignment with modern day practices in order to significantly reduce the under- five mortality rate.
The growing importance of this issue is heightened by the fact that, from the reproductive health perspective, the country also faced relatively low fertility rates; the rate was 77.171 in 1990, dropping to 46.6 in 2005.

The latest data suggests that, in 2008, the rate stood at 54.2, a decrease of 22.9 from the 1990 figure.

However, there has been a minimal growth in the general fertility rate from 1.61 in January 2004 to 1.64 in January 2008.
The National Performance Framework 2012-2015 highlighted the Key Result Areas (KRAs) of a ―Fit and Healthy Nation‖ and delivering ―First Class population.

Healthcare‖ the to 71 General Fertility Rate (GFR), CSO.

The number of live births that occurs in a year per 1000 women of child- bearing age (15-49 years).
96 While the mortality rate of children aged 1-4 was found to be very low and declining, deaths classified as injuries, poisonings and external causes were found to be the top cause of deaths in this age group.

Consequently, closer monitoring is needed to ensure child from potential cases of protection violence.
Target: Reduce by thirds, between 1990 and 2015 the under- five mortality rate two Effective health policy can be credited with the reversal of the upward trend in child mortality since 2003 and up to the year for which the most recent data were available.

However, much more needs to be done to push the rate further down since it remains above the calculated MDG target of 5.4 per 1,000 live births based on the 1990 baseline, as well as the national target of 5 per live births73.
Emphasis has, 1000 therefore, been placed on effective maternal and child care management through heightened implementation of policies and procedures and making available more human resources.

trained Emphasis is therefore placed not only on good nutrition but also access to efficient and quality healthcare for citizens.

The outputs of these KRAs are expected to impact on reducing child mortality.
The importance of child health also features prominently in the Ministry of Health’s Strategic Plan 2012- 2016 in which child health is listed as a strategic core priority.

The prominence placed on child health in Trinidad and Tobago is reflected in the congruence of the MDG target and national target for reducing child mortality.

Trinidad and Tobago‘s performance has been mixed towards meeting this MDG.
The country has been highly successful in providing its population with the necessary to prevent immunization deaths from vaccine-treatable diseases.
In particular, immunization coverage for Measles, Mumps and Rubella was 83 percent in 2012.72 Also, while there was the under-5 little net change mortality rate (U5MR) when comparing the 1990 figure to that of 2008, the country has recorded significant gains in reversing the upward trend in this rate since 2003 and is now poised to push forward in bringing the rate closer to the MDG target.

Still, the U5MR is yet to reach single-digit figures.
in An analysis of the infant mortality rate and the causes of infant mortality revealed that neonatal deaths were the largest contributor to the high U5MR in and maternal and neonatal health care are needed to bring this rate under control.

that greater interventions 72 Expanded Programme on Immunization Report 2012.
73 Government of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago, Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014 97 Indicator: Under-five mortality rate REVERSED INCREASING TREND IN CHILD MORTALITY BUT FURTHER REDUCTION NEEDED Notably, a UNICEF Study in Infant and Under-five Mortality in Trinidad and Tobago estimated that the U5MR for 2013 at Public Health Institutions only was 13.2 per 1,000 live births.74 Although children are classified as those aged 0-14, a child‘s survival to age 5 is a strong indicator of the likelihood of his/her survival to maturity, given that children are most vulnerable in the first few years of their lives.
The U5MR, therefore, is a useful indicator of child mortality in general.

In 1990, the U5MR was 16.24 per 1,000 live births.

The Rate peaked at 27.4 in 2002 before declining to 16.0 in 2008, representing a decrease of 42 percent, as shown below in Chart 4.1.
CHART 4.1 Under-Five Mortality Rate (1990-2008) Under-five Mortality Rate The U5MRs (deaths per 1,000 live births) at Public Health Institutions only for the years 2011 to 2013 were:  2011:  2012:  2013: 19.0 18.0 13.2 Source: UNICEF Study in Infant and Under-Five Mortality Trinidad and Tobago.
Expanding access to public reproductive services, care child health and instituting measures to retain and recruit additional medical and nursing professionals, and increasing awareness of the importance of ante-natal and child care among the population aided in reducing the U5MR.
s h t r i B e v i L , 0 0 0 1 r e P 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 Under-five Mortality Rate Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2009 in gain Therefore, the country has recorded a the significant acceleration of this Rate since 2003 and is now poised to push in bringing the rate closer to the MDG target.
reversing forward The mortality rate of children aged 1-4 was found to be very low and declining, showing an overall decline from 3.6 deaths per 1,000 live births in 1990 to 2.8 deaths per 1,000 live births in 2008 (see Chart 4.4 below).

Deaths classified as injuries, poisonings and external causes were found to be the top causes group.

of Consequently, closer monitoring is needed to ensure child protection from potential cases of violence.
deaths this age in Despite the gains in reducing the U5MR, the targeted reduction in the child 74 UNICEF Study in Infant and Under-Five Mortality Trinidad and Tobago, 2013.

98 mortality rate may not be met by 2015.

Like many other developed and developing countries, the U5MR is yet to reach single-digit figures.
In a renewed effort to further reduce this Rate, current principal strategies and measures include:  Developing the Protocols and Procedures improved Maternal and Standard Operating towards Child Health Care;  Implementing an audit system to these adherence monitor protocols and procedures; to  Expanding and sustaining a cadre of trained professionals in Medical and Nursing Labour Wards, and Antenatal, Perinatal and Postnatal in secondary care management institutions;  Standardizing methods of data collection, data analysis, data reporting and medical records; and  Completing the Maternal and Child Health Plan.
intended initiatives are These to transform child health care structure and function and create a modern system to ensure proper procedures in treatment and overall health of the child.

This will improve the delivery of care that will positively impact the child mortality rate.

Under-Five Mortality Rate by Sex and Administrative Area Over the reporting period, both the male and female U5MRs demonstrated an increasing trend from 1990 to the early 2000s, followed by a general decline.
In 2008, the female U5MR was 14.1 deaths per 1,000 live births while the male Rate was 17.8.

Disaggregation by sex reveals that the U5MR was consistently higher for male children; averaging 25 percent more than the female rate for the period covered (Chart 4.2).
CHART 4.2 Under-Five Mortality Rate by Sex 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 I S H T R B E V I L 0 0 0 , YEAR Male Female Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2009 change The administrative of boundaries over the past two decades hindered the comparison of the U5MR in different geographic areas of the country across time.
Disaggregation by administrative area for 2008, however, revealed that the capital, Port of Spain, had the highest U5MR of 30.5 deaths per 1,000 live births in that year while the rural district of Mayaro/Rio Claro had the lowest at 7.5 per 1,000 live births (see Chart 4.3 below).
Excluding Port of Spain, the variation in the rate was relatively small with a standard deviation of approximately 3.1 from the national average of 16.0 deaths 99 per 1000 live births, suggesting minimal inequalities between geographic areas.

In the absence of comparisons across these observations time, however, cannot be taken as definitive trends but rather as a snapshot of the situation for that particular year.
CHART 4.3 Under-Five Mortality Rate by Administrative Area (2008) 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 I S H T R B E V I L 0 0 0 , 1 R E P n i a p S - f o - … / n a u J n a S … t i u q a b a T / a v u o C o c r a i P / a n u p a n u T o r a l C o i R / o r a y a M a i r a p i S o g a b o T e b e D / l a n e P n w o T s e c n i r P e d n a r G e r g n a S ADMINISTRATIVE AREA Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2009 Indicator: Infant Mortality Rate SPECIAL ATTENTION NEEDED TO REDUCE DEATHS AMONG CHILDREN UNDER 1 YEAR, ESPECIALLY DURING THE PERINATAL AND NEONATAL STAGES When the U5MR is decomposed into its constituents, the story of child mortality in Trinidad and Tobago becomes much clearer.
As illustrated in Chart 4.4, the largest contributor to the U5MR has consistently been the infant mortality rate with the deaths of infants under 1 year of age accounting for approximately 83 percent of all deaths of children under five years (<5 years) between 1990 and 2008.

The infant mortality rate also declined from a peak of 24.2 deaths per 1,000 live births in 2002 to 10.7 in 2011,75 representing a decrease of 61 percent.
CHART 4.4 Under-Five, Infant and 1-4 Year-Old Mortality Rates I S H T R B E V I L 0 0 0 1 R E P , 30 25 20 15 10 YEAR Under-Five Mortality Rate Infant Mortality Rate 1-4 Year-Old Mortality Rate Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report (Data for 2009-2011 are provisional estimates) An even more accurate diagnosis is obtained when the infant mortality rate is disaggregated.
As shown in Chart 4.5 below, the majority of infant deaths occur in the neonatal stage, that is, within the first 28 days of life.

Neonatal deaths accounted for an average of 77 percent of infant deaths between 1990 and 2009, and 64 percent of the deaths of children under-5 between 1990 and 75 Provisional data was provided by CSO.

100 2008.

Additional data suggests that most of these deaths in turn occurred within the first 7 days of life and therefore part of the perinatal period76.
high likelihood of surviving to adult- hood.
Causes of Child Mortality CHART 4.5 Infants Infant, Neonatal and Post-neonatal Mortality Rates 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 I S H T R B E V I L 0 0 0 , YEAR Infant Neonatal Post-neonatal Analysis of the top causes of infant deaths (under 1 year) between 1990 and 2008 supports the conclusion that the majority of deaths were attributed to conditions originating in the perinatal period77 (Chart 4.6).
CHART 4.6 Top Causes of Infant Deaths (1990-2008) 400 300 200 100 0 Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report (Data for 2009-2011 are provisional estimates the however, Like the mortality rate of children aged 1-4, post-neonatal mortality rate, which concerns infants who are older than one month and less than a year, remained low, showing little change from 3.7 per 1,000 live births in 1990 to an estimated 3.6 per 1,000 live births in 2009.
These findings illustrate that Trinidad and Tobago‘s greatest challenge lies in the care of new-borns and that children who live for more than a month have a 76 The perinatal mortality rate was not included because its computation includes the number of still births and is therefore an inaccurate estimation of the mortality rate within the first seven days of life.
Data concerning deaths within the first seven days, however, showed these to be the majority of neonatal deaths (CSO Population & Vital Statistics Reports).
YEAR Respiratory Conditions of the Newborn Other Conditions Originating in the Perinatal Period Congenital Anomalies and Chromosomal Abnormalities Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Reports Chief among these were respiratory conditions of the new-born, including respiratory syndrome, distress intrauterine hypoxia and birth asphyxia, and fetal and new-born aspiration of various substances.
This category of conditions accounted for an average of 34.5 percent of all infant deaths over 77 Respiratory conditions of the newborn are classified under the broader category of ‗certain conditions originating in the perinatal period‘ based on the World Health Organization‘s International Classification of Diseases 10 (ICD-10).
101 the reporting period, accounting for as much as 52 percent in the year 2000. of anomalies, Congenital including the heart and malformations circulatory system and the nervous chromosomal system, as well as for abnormalities, were approximately 18 percent of infant deaths, and as much as 26 percent in 2006.

This made congenital anomalies the second infant mortality overall.
largest cause of responsible Conditions classified as ‗other perinatal conditions‘, including bacterial sepsis of the new-born and haemorrhagic and haematological disorders of the fetus and new-born, were the third top cause of death.

These accounted for about 17 percent of all infant deaths between 1990 and 2008.

For specific years, however, as it surpassed in 2004, congenital anomalies as the second top cause accounting for 28 percent of infant deaths.
Although great strides were made in the latter half of the last decade to reduce the infant mortality rate, the fact that respiratory conditions of the new-born and other conditions originating in the perinatal period remain among the top three (3) causes of infant deaths, (30 percent and 21 percent, respectively, for the most recent year available), suggests that greater attention must be paid, not only to neonatal care, but importantly to antenatal care more which significantly influences neonatal example, Respiratory health.
a Distress Syndrome, which consistent contributor to infant death in For is in premature Trinidad and Tobago, occurs most frequently infants, children of diabetic mothers and those section.

delivered Premature births, in turn, are often the consequence of failures to detect high risk conditions during pregnancy.

caesarean by Children Aged 1-4 The mortality rate for children aged 1-4 has been historically low and continues to decline.

These deaths have not contributed hugely to Trinidad and Tobago‘s U5MR.
However, the causes of death among this cohort must still be examined to identify any particularly worrying trends.

fall under As Chart 4.8 below illustrates, almost 30 percent of the deaths of children between the ages of 1 and 4 is the result the of causes which classification of injury, poisoning and external causes.

While many, if not most, of these cases may be the result of accidental injuries, closer inspection is needed to ensure the protection of children from acts of violence or abuse.
Government has taken decisive action to protect the nation‘s children through the establishment of the Children’s Authority, and has already begun to several implement the recommendations the Cabinet- of appointed Child Protection Task Force discussed later in this Chapter.
of 102 CHART 4.8 Top Causes of Deaths of Children, 1-4 Year- Olds (2004 - 2008) 13.6% 10.0% 10.4% 10.9% 13.6% 28.1% 13.6% Injury, Poisoning & External Causes Congenital Malformations Diseases of the Nervous System Diseases of the Respiratory System Certain Infectious & Parasitic Diseases Neoplasms Other Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 1-4 The remaining causes of death account for similar proportions of total deaths in the Congenital age-group.
malformations, diseases of the nervous system and other causes of deaths each accounts for 13.6 percent.

Diseases of the certain infectious and parasitic diseases and cancer (neoplasms) are responsible for 10-11 percent each.

respiratory system, Although the actual numbers of deaths among this cohort may be low, the vulnerability of children warrants that child care continues to be improved upon and expanded to keep these figures as low as possible.
In both the cases of infant mortality and the mortality of children aged 1-4, it should be noted that unlike in many from rarely die other countries of the developing world, children chronic malnutrition in Trinidad and Tobago as initiatives have been hugely prior successful in treating with diarrhoeal conditions and preventing infectious diseases.
Similarly, expansion of the of Mother-to-Child Prevention Programme, Transmission (PMTCT) through the provision of anti-retroviral therapy and milk substitutes to all HIV positive mothers, has minimised the HIV infants.

Coupled with the provision of the necessary care to children who do contract HIV, these measures have resulted in HIV-related children deaths being extremely low.
This issue is discussed in greater detail under the MDG 6. transmission rate to and Still, more investigation is needed into incidence of diseases affecting the children of the micronutrient deficiencies as conditions such as protein-energy malnutrition (PEM), iron deficiency and child obesity do exist.
occurrence In addressing child mortality, it is also important to note that both infant and under-5 mortality are highest among the offspring of mothers or caregivers who have had no education, or who have attained only pre-school or primary school education.78 This shows another low educational attainment, which has also been linked to poverty as highlighted under Goal 1.
While greater emphasis must be placed on educating mothers risk associated with 78 2006 Multiple Indicator Cluster Survey reanalysed by UNICEF, April 2007.

103 for their children, in about caring addition to maternal care itself, it is also anticipated that Government‘s efforts in though building education to elevate persons out of poverty, as previously discussed, will also serve to mitigate this problem in the long-term.
human capital Indicator: Proportion of 1 year old children immunized against measles NOTABLE SUCCESSES ACHIEVED IN IMMUNIZATION AGAINST MEASLES AND OTHER VACCINE-PREVENTABLE DEATHS As illustrated in the previous section, infectious diseases are not a significant cause of child mortality in Trinidad and Tobago.
In fact, there have been almost no deaths in the country due to vaccine- preventable diseases with no new cases of polio since 1972; measles since 1991; neonatal tetanus since 1997; and rubella since 1999.
With specific regard to measles, the data indicates that the proportion of one-year old children immunized against the disease increased from just 35 percent in the year 2000 to approximately 89 percent in 2006, with 91 percent of 18- being infants month immunized.79 The number of one-year old infants immunized against measles was estimated at 83 percent in 2012. also old 79 Ibid.
TABLE 4.1 Child Immunization Schedule of Trinidad and Tobago Age 3 months Immunization Against Diphtheria, Tetanus & Pertussis, Hepatitis B Haemophilus influenza type B, Poliomyelitis Vaccine Pentavalent (DPT/Hep B/Hib), Attenuated trivalent oral poliomyelitis vaccine (OPV) 4-5 months 6 months 12-15 months Diphtheria, Tetanus & Pertussis, Hepatitis B infection, Haemophilus influenza type B, Poliomyelitis V Diphtheria, Tetanus & Pertussis, Hepatitis B infection, Haemophilus influenza type B, Poliomyelitis Measles, Mumps, Rubella, Yellow Fever 18 months Diphtheria, Tetanus & Pertussis, Poliomyelitis 5 years Diphtheria, Tetanus & Pertussis, Poliomyelitis, Measles, Mumps, Rubella Diphtheria, Tetanus, Yellow Fever 9-12 years Pentavalent (DPT/Hep B/Hib) Pentavalent (DPT/Hep B/Hib) Combined Measles, Mumps, Rubella (MMR) Attenuated Yellow Fever Vaccine Booster DPT OPV Boosters DPT OPV MMR Tetanus, Diphtheria (Td), Yellow Fever vaccine Source: Ministry of Health This success is largely due to the nationwide Expanded Programme on Immunization which provides free vaccines to children according to the schedule in Table 4.1 above.
Emphasis is especially placed on immunization during the first 5 years of life and is 104 enforced with enrolment in primary school being conditional on receiving the required vaccines.

of children were It was estimated in 2006 that only 50.2 percent fully immunized according to the Ministry of Health‘s schedule.80 Coverage increased to 92 percent in 201281 which has been effective in minimising the threat posed by vaccine-preventable diseases to the lives of children in Trinidad and Tobago.
Further Reducing Infant Mortality Infant mortality is viewed as a key indicator of the overall health of a community, state or nation and has implications for a country‘s economic fortunes in the long-run.

Moreover, the death of a far more child consequential for those directly affected.

Reducing infant and child mortality is, therefore, an imperative.
is As stated earlier, the largest contributor to the U5MR rate has been the infant mortality rate with the deaths of infants under 1 year of age accounting for approximately 83 percent of all deaths in the under-5 age group between 1990 and 2008; and that the majority of infant deaths occurred in the neonatal stage accounting for an average of 77 percent of infant deaths.

This illustrated that Trinidad and Tobago‘s greatest challenges were in the ante-natal and neo-natal care.

80 Ibid.
80 Ibid.

81 Annual Report on Performance 2013, Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development.

It is noted that Trinidad and Tobago arrested the upward trend in the infant mortality rate which peaked in 2002, falling drastically from 24.2 deaths per 1,000 live births to 10.7 in 2011.

However, the 2011 figure is a minimal decrease from the 1991 figure which stood at 11 deaths per 1,000 live births.

Thus, while progress has been made, more work is needed to further increase the survival rate of infants.
The factors affecting child health and infant mortality are wide and involve interrelated issues such as poverty, gender, health status and educational background of parents.

Further investigation is required in determining the extent to which these issues affect child health and survival in order to focus policy interventions for better outcomes.
As such, a multi-dimensional approach to increasing child survival is necessary, collaborative efforts among public health agencies and private medical providers, public social services, NGOs, families and communities.

including The Way Forward in addressing As Trinidad and Tobago moves forward the in combatting child mortality, Government has adopted a multifaceted approach issues based on a combination of legislative and policy reforms and implementation of key projects and programmes.
While there have been notable successes thus far, it is recognized that much more the needs to be done towards the 105 achievement of this Goal and the improvement of child health in general.

These are discussed further below.

Addressing Child Abuse and Neglect A key aspect of protecting our nation‘s children is the establishment of the relevant institutional and governance structures.

The Children’s Authority was inter alia, to safeguard established, children, from neglect and abuse.
While several pieces of legislation pertaining to protection of children remain to be the Children’s Authority proclaimed, represents a step in the right direction in addressing the external causes of deaths for infants aged 1-4. fully recommendations in December 2013, More recently, Government the Child established Protection Task Force which was tasked with making to accelerate the process of getting the functional, Children’s Authority ensure that relevant pieces of legislation were proclaimed and prevent problems protection within programmes and agencies.
The Task Force completed the exercise and its recommendations were accepted and are being implemented.

These efforts are expected to serve as further impetus in reducing the under-five mortality rate due to external causes.

existing child A Deeper Understanding of Under-Five Mortality related issues In order to effectively address some of the root causes of child mortality in Trinidad and Tobago, Government recognises that more investigation is required into these causes.
Examining incidence of diseases affecting the children of the micronutrient deficiencies will also play a critical role in understanding these issues and how to tackle them.

occurrence and Council comprises The machinery is already in place for investigating these issues in the form of the Inter-Ministerial Research Council.

key This stakeholders in the social sector and is aimed at conducting social research national relevant to this Body, development.
Through Government forged partnerships with Civil Society and conducting tertiary developmental research.

institutions advancing also has in Improved Maternal and Child Care the inevitable In advancing progress towards this Goal, Government has adopted a comprehensive approach based on deepening linkages between maternal and child care.
Moreover, the special attention is being paid to infant mortality 1-year and under, particularly during the perinatal and raising immunization coverage for measles from 85 percent; and further educating mothers in maternal and child care.

Consequently, several policy reforms and programmes have been undertaken and, in some instances, implementation heightened.
neonatal phases; Policy Reform  Formulation of a Childhood Obesity Prevention Policy 106  Revision of the Maternal and Child Health Policy  Finalisation of the National Breastfeeding Policy Some of the projects and programmes related to the achievement of this Goal include:  Implementation of a Maternal and Child Health Programme which includes growth monitoring, social services and nutritional support;  Launch of a public education campaign pertaining to child health and nutrition;  Continuation health of promotion campaign Combatting Childhood Obesity; the  Strengthening of antenatal care services through the purchase of necessary equipment, in particular, foetal monitors and refurbishment of primary healthcare centres;  Establishment of the Pre-conception and Inter-conception Care Education Programme;  Establishment of a Children’s Life Fund to provide lifesaving surgery to children in need;  Implementation pilot programme How to Nurture Baby for expectant parents; of a  Implementation of the Programme Right Start - Breast is Best - Mothers supporting Mothers;  Development and implementation of Procedures Standard Operating (SOP) for Obstetrics and Midwifery  Administration of the pneumococcal vaccine to children (as of 2012, 38,188 vaccinated); children had been  Expansion of laboratory and X-ray services for antenatal care through the Prevention of Mother-to-Child Transmission of HIV Programme; of to immunization via the Expanded Programme for Immunization;  Expansion access  Establishment
 of a National Plan of Action Committee to monitor the progress on selected indicators toward improved maternal and child health;  Continuation of the School Health Programme which conducts hearing and vision screening of 1st year infants, and school inspection and monitoring;  Provision of free health care at for children institutions public under 16 years;  Continuation of the National School Feeding Programme which provides free breakfasts and lunches to children in need, ensuring access to the required daily levels of nutrition; of Couva Children’s Hospital;  Construction the  Implementation of a Trinidad and Tobago Maternal and Child Health Coalition Programme to achieve improved reproductive, maternal and children outcomes among all stake holders; and  Developing a Strategic Plan for Non Communicable Diseases.
107 108 GOAL 5 Improve Maternal Health TARGETS Reduce by three quarters, between 1990 and 2015, the maternal mortality ratio Achieve, by 2015, universal access to reproductive health INDICATORS Maternal mortality ratio Proportion of births attended by skilled health personnel Contraceptive prevalence rate Unmet need for family planning 109 GOAL 5 Improve Maternal Health Target:   Reduce by three quarters, between 1990 and 2015, the maternal mortality ratio Achieve by 2015, universal access to reproductive health Introduction vision Our socio-economic of transformation will not be realised without particular care and attention to the health of the nation, especially that of maternal health.
The overarching aim for maternal health in Trinidad and Tobago is to have a society where women enjoy the highest attainable levels of health and that no family suffers the loss of a mother due to or treatable causes.

preventable Improving maternal (and child) health is among the priorities listed under the purview of the Ministry of Health as part of the wider goal of providing access to high quality healthcare services and first class hospitals as contained in Government‘s MTPF 2011-2014.
While the target for the proportion of births attended by skilled health professionals has already been met, Trinidad and Tobago is working assiduously to improve maternal health and achieve the MDG and national targeted Maternal Mortality Ratio82 (MMR) of 14 deaths per 100,000 live births by 2015 as articulated in the National Performance Framework 2012- 2015.
Moreover, the country is well on its way to achieving the second target – universal access to reproductive health – as over 90 percent of the population already has access.

Government is improve seeking continuously systems and procedures at health care institutions, increase access to high quality health services as well as to enhance the infrastructure of the health sector.
Additionally, the implementation of policies like the revised Maternal and Child Health Policy and Standard Operating Procedures for Obstetrics and Midwifery will contribute to meeting this Goal.
to The World Health Organization (WHO) defines health as, ―a state of physical, 82 The Central Statistical Office of Trinidad and Tobago, the primary Government data collection agency, uses the term ‗maternal mortality rate‘ when referring to the maternal mortality ratio as defined by the Millennium Development Goals.
110 and mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity‖, while maternal health refers ―the health of women during to pregnancy, the childbirth postpartum period‖.83 According to the WHO, an average of 800 women dies daily due to avertable complications that are related to pregnancy and childbirth.

Haemorrhage, high blood pressure, infection, unsafe abortion and obstructed labour are the main factors that directly contribute to maternal morbidity and mortality.
to raise economic productivity, or reduce infant and maternal mortality.

No other policy is as sure to improve nutrition and promote health, including the prevention of HIV/AIDS.

No other policy is as powerful in increasing the chances of education for the next generation.
"84 Target: Reduce by three quarters, between 1990 and 2015, the maternal mortality ratio In general, the lack of skilled health personnel attendance at birth, cost of insufficient medical health services, equipment and supplies, sub-optimal health care and systems, inadequate access to education and low income level all increase the risk of maternal mortality.
Moreover, causes other include lack of policies or the enforcement of policies pertaining to women's socio-cultural traditions, inadequate antenatal and record postnatal keeping and inadequate family planning services.

inefficient rights, care, The health of the population and, in particular, maternal health is crucial to the sustainable development of Trinidad and Tobago.
Indeed, the United Nations Secretary General, Kofi Annan stated, "Study after Study has taught us that there is no tool for development more effective the empowerment of women.

No other policy is as likely to than 83 World Health Organization.

Retrieved from on 24/02/2014.

As stated in the MTPF 2011-2014, health is a priority in this country‘s development agenda.

The loss of human capital giving, affect innovation, force and labour productivity of the country.
care can the Notwithstanding the recognition of the importance of maternal health and Government‘s dedication to reducing the maternal mortality ratio in Trinidad and Tobago, there still remains a serious in reducing the maternal challenge mortality ratio over a sustained period.

During the period 1990 to 2010, the ratio has fluctuated widely from year to year making it difficult to discern trends upon which polices and interventions can be based.
84 Annan, Kofi, ―Empowerment of Women the Most Effective Development Tool‖, United Nations Press Release 28/02/2005.

Retrieved from on 24/02/2014 111 Indicator: Maternal Mortality Ratio WIDE ANNUAL FLUCTUATIONS IN MMR The MMR is defined as the number of deaths of women due to complications of pregnancy and childbirth per 100,000 live births in that year.
It is calculated by dividing the total number of recorded or estimated maternal deaths by the total number of recorded or estimated live births in that particular year and then multiplying by 100,000.
CHART 5.1 Maternal Mortality Ratio (1990 - 2010) I S H T R B E V I L 0 0 0 , 0 0 1 R E P 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 YEAR In reviewing the downward trend data, it is noted that the MMR peaked in 1994 at 76.2 per 100,000 live births and fell to its lowest rate in 2003 at 27.8, representing a decline of 63.5 percent.
In the downward trend, the MMR also declined from a high of 66.3 in 2006 to 31.8 per 100,000 live births in 2010.

This represented a decline of 52 percent.


It should also be noted, however, that data from the public health institutions indicated that the MMR rate declined from 22.2 in 2011 to 20.0 in 2012.85 in stance designing The Ministry of Health has noted the fluctuations in the MMR during the period 1990 to 2010 and has taken a firm and implementing a complete framework using policies, programmes and projects in order to arrest the upward trend and reduce the MMR.
The Ministry of Health has begun other strategies to reduce the the MMR which Maternal and Child Health Policy.

These initiatives are discussed in greater detail later in this Chapter under the section The Way Forward.

include updating Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2011 Data for the 2011 and 2012 MMR for Public Health Institutions were 22.2 and 20.0, respectively.
Source: Trinidad and Tobago Annual Performance Report 2013 As depicted in Chart 5.1 above, the MMR has fluctuating widely from year to year over the period 1990 to 2010; exhibiting a general downward trend between 1994 and 2003, and a general upward trend between 2004 and 2010. the period 2004 Further analysis of maternal deaths during to 2008, revealed that out of the 44 maternal deaths that occurred, 11 were due to pregnancy with abortive outcome, whereas 33 were categorized as other direct obstetric deaths.
This is shown in Chart 5.2 below.

85 Annual Report on Performance 2013, Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development.
112 CHART 5.2 Causes of Maternal Mortality (2004 - 2008) Indicator: Proportion of Births Attended By Skilled Health Personnel Causes of Maternal Mortality 99 PERCENT OF BIRTHS ATTENDED BY SKILLED PERSONNEL 25% 75% Pregnancy with abortive outcome Other Direct Obstetric Deaths Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2009 The majority (30 percent) of maternal deaths occurred among women in the 30-34 years age-group while the minority (11 percent) of maternal deaths occurred within both the 15-19 and 25- 29 age-groups as shown in Chart 5.3.
The second largest percentage or 18 percent of maternal deaths were in the 40-44 age-group.

The 20-24 and 35-39 age-groups represent 16 percent and 14 percent deaths, of respectively.

maternal CHART 5.3 Maternal Mortality and Age Group of Mothers (2004 - 2008) 18% 11% Age Group of Mothers 16% 11% 14% 30% 15-19 20-24 25-29 30-34 35-39 40-44 Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2009 Trinidad and Tobago has achieved the targeted proportion of births attended by skilled health personnel.
However, although more than 95 percent of women receive perinatal care and 99 percent of birth attendants are skilled personnel (Table 5.1), the MMR has fluctuated.
TABLE 5.1 Person in Attendance at Live Birth (1999 - 2008)* YEAR Personnel Type Percentage Skilled Personnel (Doctors & Midwives) 1999-2008 Other Person Total 99 1 100 Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2009 The table above illustrates that over the period 1999 to 2008, consistently, 99 percent of the persons in attendance at live births was skilled personnel such as doctors and midwives, whereas one percent represented the attendance of other persons.
Currently, in Trinidad and Tobago there are 114 public health facilities.
From 2003 to the most recent year for which data the majority of occurrence of live births has been at in Port of institutions Government Spain, San Fernando, Mount Hope, is available, 113 institutions while Tobago, Arima, Tacarigua, Couva, Princess Town, Mayaro, Sangre Grande and Point Fortin (Chart 5.4) For this (83.5 time period, over 80 percent percent) of live births took place at Government a minority of approximately 0.1 percent of lives births occurred at other places.
An average of 15.63 and one percent of live births occurred at nursing homes and private homes, respectively.

Given the high percentage of live births at State institutions and the fluctuating MMR percent almost despite attendance by skilled personnel at these live births, reducing the MMR to the targeted 14 per 100,000 live births by 2015 remains a challenge.
100 an CHART 5.4 Occurrence of Live Births (2003- 2008) 100 E G A T N E C R E P 80 60 40 20 0 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 YEAR Private Homes Nursing Homes Government Institution Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2009 Target: Achieve by 2015 Universal access to reproductive health Universal access to reproductive health refers to the ability to achieve sexual is, that solving reproductive reproductive health through and healthcare, the methods, techniques and services that contribute to health and wellbeing by preventing and health problems.
All individuals should have equitable access to the appropriate healthcare needed.

Trinidad and Tobago is well on its way to achieving this target by 2015 as over 95 percent of women attend antenatal clinics at least once during their pregnancy.86 several challenges exist.

However, Poverty remains a barrier to accessing reproductive healthcare.
The Survey of Living Conditions 2005 noted that poorer households were more often found to be headed by women than by men.87 Female-headed households were disproportionally represented among the poor accounting for 38 percent of the poorest households compared to the national average of 33 percent.88 Poverty is a factor when it comes to the number of children a woman has – poor women tend to have more children and start childbearing at an earlier age than women of higher income.89 This is tied to the level of educational attainment which parallels socio-economic status.
Women with low educational levels who are poor and become pregnant early, including teenagers, are less likely to from access reproductive healthcare 86 Health in the Americas, 2012 Edition: Country Volume, Pan American Health Organization, 2012.

87 Analysis of the Trinidad and Tobago Survey of Living Conditions, Kairi Consultants Limited, 2007.

88 Ibid.

89 Health in the Americas, 2012 Edition: Country Volume, Pan American Health Organization, 2012.
114 early stages in their pregnancies for several reasons.

These include lack of financial resources and the stereotyping of such women by the community and by healthcare workers when they visit healthcare facilities.

Moreover, girls and women who become pregnant may try to hide it from family members and as such do not access reproductive healthcare until later in their pregnancies.
Indicator: Contraceptive prevalence rate and unmet need for family planning AVERAGE CONTRACEPTIVE PREVALENCE RATE INCREASING The contraceptive prevalence rate is the percentage of women – married or in- union – aged 15–49 who are currently using, or whose sexual partner is using, at least one method of contraception, regardless of the method - modern or traditional.
Modern methods include female and male sterilization, oral hormonal pills, the intra-uterine device (IUD), the male condom, injectables, the implant, vaginal barrier methods, the female emergency Traditional methods contraception.

include (periodic rhythm the lactational abstinence), withdrawal, amenorrhea method (LAM) and folk methods.

condom and Contraceptive prevalence is one of the proxy to average reproductive health.
contraceptive prevalence rate was 38 indicators access The for In 2008, rate Presently, percent in 2000 and 42.5 percent in the contraceptive 2006.90 remained at 42.5 prevalence are there percent.91 challenges in data collection related to contraceptive use.

In-depth research is needed into the cultural and social norms associated with utilizing and accessing contraceptives.
its through To address these issues, the Ministry of Health, Population Programme, implemented a condom management strategy to improve the availability and accessibility of condoms in the public sector clinics.

Accordingly, for the period 2008 to 2012, a total of 4,431,256 male condoms and 89,784 female condoms were distributed across the country by the Ministry of Health.
It should be noted that for the period 2011 to 2012, the Ministry increased its distribution of male condoms by 25 percent from 811,330 to 1,017,502; and for from females, distribution rose 19,005 to 28,527, representing a 50 percent increase over the same period.
the issue of In addressing family planning, the Population Programme has expanded its services to cater to the needs of males and has also established services including for adolescents, health promotion material such as its calendar with an annual theme reflective of sexual and reproductive health.

The Programme also provides 90 2006 Multiple Indicator Cluster Survey 3, UNICEF, April 2007.

91 2006 Multiple Indicator Cluster Survey 3, UNICEF, April 2007.
115 for women and cervical screening counselling on Sexual and Reproductive Health Matters, including family life.

Sustaining Reductions in the MMR Stabilising the MMR at low rates and creating the conditions for its sustained reduction over time pose a challenge to the country‘s development prospective.

In Trinidad and Tobago, antenatal healthcare is available to all pregnant women free of charge via the public health system network.
This provision has resulted in high utilisation of pre- natal health services.

Many pregnant women also choose to attend private antenatal clinics and pay a fee for service.

issue of the reproductive health.
The health authorities, in collaboration with private partners, have been improving addressing In to access addition to the provision of free pre- and post-natal services at the nation‘s hospitals and health centres, the Family Planning Association of Trinidad and Tobago (FPATT) provides sexual and reproductive healthcare to men, women and youth through information and counselling and access to reproductive services through its clinics in strategic locations in both Trinidad and Tobago.
A significant element of FPATT‘s programme is its outreach services to more remote areas as well as to marginalized groups.

The Way Forward testing A wide range of services are provided at the antenatal clinics.

According to the Multiple Indicator Cluster Survey (MICS) 2006, around 98 percent of attendees received blood pressure for urine measurement, bacteriuria and proteinuria, and blood testing to detect syphilis and severe improve the nutritional anemia.
To status of women during pregnancy and to reduce the occurrence of anaemia, iron and folic acid tablets are made available to all pregnant women at all public antenatal clinics at no charge.

The women are also educated on issues the stages of pregnancy, such as nutrition during pregnancy, and are encouraged exclusive breastfeeding for the first 6 months.
practise to of impacts on the mother and It is widely acknowledged that the quality of treatment received by a pregnant woman the survival and future development of her unborn child.

In fact, monitoring the the health development of the unborn infant is a critical element in predicting potential complications during pregnancy or birth.

This is one reason why Trinidad and Tobago is among many countries that adopt Maternal and Child Health (MCH) programmes.
designing continuously More importantly, the Ministry of Health and is implementing an array of initiatives to enhance the current MCH programme to improve the early intervention and treatment in order to prevent untimely 116 deaths among women.
These initiatives include:  Updating the Maternal and Child Health Policy;  Developing and implementing Standard Operating Procedures for Obstetrics and Midwifery;  Strengthening ante-natal and post- natal care services through the purchase of additional equipment, in particular, fetal monitors, and refurbishment primary healthcare centers; of  Increasing the training complement that for midwives to pregnant women the professional care in the pre-natal, intra-natal and post-natal period;  Intensifying programme monitoring ensure obtain and evaluation; and  Conducting a detailed analysis of maternal mortality needs with resultant specific and effective interventions to improve maternal health.
of and several Tobago that of It is recognised by the Government of the Trinidad achievement the Millennium Development Goals hinges on the ability of women and children to in access health services.
This the keeping with Article 12 of Convention on the Elimination of Discrimination against Women which states take all to eliminate appropriate measures discrimination against women in the field of health care in order to ensure, on a basis of equality of men and women, access to health care services, that ―Parties shall is to related goes family those including further, planning.‖ It ―Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph I of this article, States Parties shall ensure to women appropriate services in connection with pregnancy, confinement and the post-natal period, granting free services where necessary, as well as adequate nutrition during pregnancy and lactation.‖ Maternal health is, therefore, not an isolated issue and cannot be treated as such.
It is linked to the health of the population and infant health.

Moreover it is interconnected with wider socio- economic including concerns, productivity linked to economic growth, gender equality, poverty, level of education and even crime.

In light of the above, the Ministry of Health will continue to maintain its firm stance in designing and implementing a framework using policies, complete programmes and projects in order to reduce the MMR.
117 118 GOAL 6 (revised) Combat HIV/AIDS, Dengue and Hypertension92 TARGETS Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the spread of HIV/AIDS INDICATORS New HIV Positive Cases at Public Health Locations HIV prevalence among population aged 15-24 years Condom use at last high-risk sex Proportion of population aged 15-24 years with comprehensive correct knowledge of HIV/AIDS Achieve, by 2010, universal access to treatment for HIV/AIDS for all those who need it Proportion of Population with Access to Anti-retroviral Drugs Number of Deaths due to AIDS Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the incidence of Malaria, Tuberculosis, Dengue, Diabetes and Hypertension Proportion of Women with Access to Anti- retroviral Drugs Incidence and death rates associated with malaria Incidence and death rates associated with Tuberculosis Incidence and death rates associated with Dengue Incidence and death rates associated with Diabetes and Hypertension 92 This Goal has been modified by Trinidad and Tobago 119 GOAL 6 Combat HIV/AIDS, Dengue, Diabetes and Hypertension Targets:  Have halted by 2015, and begun to reverse, the spread of HIV/AIDS  Achieve, by 2010, universal access to treatment for HIV/AIDS for all those who need it  Have halted by 2015, and begun to incidence of Malaria, and reverse, Tuberculosis, Dengue, Diabetes Hypertension the Introduction In Trinidad and Tobago, Malaria has almost been eradicated and the death rate associated with Tuberculosis (TB) has been low.
Emphasis has, therefore, been placed on combatting Non- Communicable Diseases (NCDs) such as diabetes and hypertension.

These illnesses threaten not only the health of significant segments of the population but also the economic well-being of society as they increase the nation‘s disease burden and reduce its labour productivity.
the country‘s medium-term of becoming a knowledge-based economy, by depriving the country of healthy, productive human capital, similar to the effects of infant and maternal mortality.

threaten They goal the surrounds Considerable progress has been made in the fight against HIV/AIDS.

After a consistent rise in the HIV incidence rate, an aggressive multidimensional strategy has yielded positive results as the number of newly diagnosed infections decreased among the general population from 2008 to 2011.
While the overall HIV incidence has slowed, a concern increased prevalence among the youth cohort (15- 24 years).

This is especially worrisome since the results of surveys show that comprehensive knowledge of HIV/AIDS among this cohort has increased and they are more likely to use condoms than adults.
However, it should be this noted increased incidence of HIV is not as significant so as to prevent its reversal with effective, targeted policies, some of which have already been formulated and are being implemented.

the magnitude of that 120 there has been a Concomitantly, decrease in the numbers of HIV infected infants born to HIV positive mothers, with Tobago achieving a zero percent infection infants.
The number of deaths from AIDS has also declined sharply in the context of the broad expansion of access to anti- retroviral therapy by pregnant women and by the wider population.

rate among Government‘s policies and targets pertaining to this Goal have been outlined in the Medium Term Policy Framework 2012-2014, the National Performance Framework 2012-2015 as well as successive National Strategic Plans (NSP) for HIV and AIDS; the latest of which spans the period 2013-2018.
These documents also the which extent considerable Government has subscribed to the accomplishment of this Goal.

reveal to In the MTPF 2012-2014, for example, the delivery of quality healthcare services is set as one of five national priorities.

The intention is to build a fit and healthy nation thereby facilitating productivity citizens.
This priority is being addressed, in part, through more efficient and effective healthcare and improved access to health services for citizens, including the HIV infected and those with NCDs.
among Government went further in embracing MDG 6 by adopting the Goal as a key result area for national achievement, namely the spread of HIV/AIDS, along with more effective to contain through promoted management of NCDs.93 A preventative approach to tackling NCDs continues to be awareness campaigns, encouraging participation in sport and recreational activities and adopting healthier lifestyle choices, all of which have been identified as areas and for measurement in the NPF 2012-2015. monitoring national to The Plan has The NSP 2013-2018 further detailed the combatting country‘s approach HIV/AIDS.
three overarching goals congruent with those of the MDGs, namely: to reduce the incidence of HIV infections; to mitigate the negative impact of HIV and AIDS on persons living with HIV and affected by HIV and AIDS; and to reduce HIV and AIDS related discrimination.

Several national targets for fighting the disease Targets of the National Strategic Plan 2013- 2018 1.

Reduce the incidence of new infections to zero in infants and less than 500 per annum in young people and adults 2.
Reduce the prevalence of HIV infection to less than 1 percent within the overall population 3.

Halve the rate AIDS related mortality 4.

Reduce HIV and AIDS related stigma and discrimination by 75 percent 5.

Reduce the direct and indirect costs associated with preventing and treating HIV and AIDS as a result of reduced numbers of HIV infected individuals.

Increase in comprehensive knowledge of HIV and reduction in risk behaviours 6.

7.
7.

Achievement of Goal 6 of the MDGs which is to combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseases 93 National Performance Framework 2012-2015, Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development.

121 were also developed as shown in the box above.


Chronic the Beyond combatting HIV/AIDS, Government of Trinidad and Tobago has recognized the urgency of tackling the vector-borne disease - dengue fever, and Non-Communicable the Diseases of diabetes and hypertension given the serious threat they pose to the health of citizens and the wealth of the country.

Consequently, MDG 6 has been modified to include targets for the these diseases Trinidad and Tobago context.
to better suit be Malaria, which was included in the original MDG 6, remains under control in Trinidad and Tobago.

Also, the expansion of tuberculosis treatment has kept the death rate associated with this disease low.

Still, the incidence of TB ensure must addressed continuous success.

Similarly, the dengue death rate has been kept at a structured minimum interventions, outbreaks continue to pose challenges.

NCDs such as diabetes and hypertension remain difficult require combat continued attention.
although and due to to to sustained concerted, A national response has thus been launched to these diseases with notable tackle success in many areas.

Emphasis has been placed on improving health care increasing education and services, awareness and strengthening the policy and legislative framework.

effective Furthermore, there has been consistent and collaboration among Government, Civil Society and Private Sector bodies.
This collaboration has to a strong supportive contributed environment these addressing diseases.

In moving forward with more intensive effort, it is expected that the country will draw closer to the full achievement of this Goal.

in Target: Have halted by 2015, and begun to reverse, the spread of HIV/AIDS Trinidad and Tobago has pursued massive and persuasive education and awareness campaigns on an on-going basis for many years in order to halt and reverse the spread of HIV.
These have been successful overall in slowing the spread of the disease in the general the population and in number of persons being tested.

However, more has to be done to address stigmatization faced by at-risk populations as well as in halting the spread of the disease among the youth population.
increasing Indicator: New HIV Positive Cases at Public Health Locations OVERALL DECLINE IN HIV INCIDENCE FOR GENERAL POPULATION BUT STIGMA ASSOCIATED WITH TESTING REMAINS At the end of 2011, 30,346 people were estimated to be living with HIV/AIDS in 122 Trinidad and Tobago.94 Although great strides have been made in combating the disease, HIV/AIDS remains the of eighth most cause mortality country with the in approximately three new cases of HIV infection diagnosed daily.95 important With a total population of approximately 1.3 million, the HIV/AIDS prevalence rate is calculated to be 1.5 percent.
Consequently, the epidemic in Trinidad and Tobago has been classified as generalized, with HIV prevalence in the adult the benchmark of 1 percent.

It is also characterized as concentrated since prevalence in at least one of the key at- risk populations exceeds 5 percent.

surpassing population Since the first cases of AIDS were reported in 1983, there had been a worrying general upward trend in the incidence of HIV infections in Trinidad and Tobago.
This was captured by new cases reported annually at public health locations (Chart 6.1); peaking at 1,709 new infections in 2003.

The data for the period 2004 to 2011, however, is encouraging.
There has been a general decline in reported HIV positive through screening and testing sites offering same day testing and counselling; the number of persons tested annually rose to 55,221 in 2011 from 26,147 in detected cases 2007.96 CHART 6.1 New HIV Positive Cases at Public Health Locations (1990 - 2012) S E S A C YEAR 4 0 0 2 6 0 0 2 8 0 0 2 0 1 0 2 2 1 0 2 Source: Ministry of Health to approach Notably, the overall downward trend from 2004 coincided with the shift to a more concerted and comprehensive national combatting HIV/AIDS as outlined in the country‘s first National Strategic Plan for HIV and AIDS, now in its second cycle.
The NSPs are coordinated and led by the National AIDS Coordinating Committee which was formed in 2003. female ratio The past two decades have also witnessed changes in the HIV positive for the total male to population.

Up until the mid-1990s, HIV prevalence was significantly greater among males with a ratio of about 2:1, thereafter narrowing to 1.2:1 between 2000 and 2005, and equalizing over the following two years.
Since 2008 and 94 National Strategic Plan for HIV and AIDS 2013-2018 95 Trinidad and Tobago Global AIDS Progress Report 2012 (formerly UNGASS) 96 Trinidad and Tobago Global AIDS Progress Report 2012.

123 onward however, there has been a reversal in the metric with a small shift as more females are being recorded as of positive with HIV approximately 1:1.1.97 ratio a This reversal in the numbers suggests that the HIV incidence rate is slightly higher among women than men.
However, it should be noted that, in general, women are more likely to access testing than men in Trinidad and Tobago and, therefore, more likely to be diagnosed as HIV infected.

to get On the other hand, a greater proportion of all men who are screened are diagnosed as positive for the disease.

This could be explained by men‘s tested only when tendency illnesses themselves.98 Consequently, it is quite probable that more men than the recorded number are HIV positive but are unaware of their HIV status.
Also, treatment and care site level data suggest that the male to female ratio is 1:1.99 present These statistics underscore the need to continue and expand on strategies and programmes to halt the spread of the disease.

Indicator: HIV Prevalence Among Population Aged 15-24 years INCREASED TESTING AMONG YOUTH COHORT BUT MORE RESPONSIBLE SEXUAL BEHAVIOUR NEEDED the HIV As noted earlier, while prevalence is decreasing overall, there remains a concern regarding its spread among the youth population.
Most At-Risk Persons: Youth The status of Most At-Risk Populations (MARPs) remains a source of concern for Government.

This is especially so for the young, aged 15-24, who account for 16.6 percent of cumulative HIV cases reported between 1983 and 2010.100 are already Young people are also at risk given the trends in youth lifestyles in Trinidad and Tobago with studies estimating that by age 15, a significant proportion of adolescents sexually active.101.
Apart from behaviour, there are also in providing preventive services to youth due to societal considerations which further contributes to the spread of HIV and other sexually transmitted diseases among this group.

challenges 97 National Strategic Plan for HIV and AIDS 2013-2018 98 Trinidad and Tobago Global AIDS Progress Report 2012 (formerly UNGASS) 99 The Ministry of Health 100 Ibid.

101 National Strategic Plan for HIV and AIDS 2013-2018 124 Indicator No.

of PLHIV (15- 24 yrs.)

Total No.
Total No.

of persons aged 15- 24 at year end Prevalence Rate TABLE 6.1 HIV Prevalence within Population 15-24 Years (Per 100,000 Persons) (2009-2011) 2009 Cumulative Value 3,475 (Cumulatively diagnosed from 1983 to end year) 2010 Cumulative Value 2011 Cumulative Value 3,654 (179 newly diagnosed) 3,841 (187 newly diagnosed) 259,929 261,438 212,618 to increase intends Government awareness of the issues and ensure the rights of Persons Living with HIV/AIDS, including the at-risk populations.
Policy and legislative interventions will also be used to create an enabling environment for HIV prevention among vulnerable groups.

These will serve to address problems contributing to the spread of the disease like alcohol consumption and drug trafficking as discussed later in this Chapter.

1,300 1,400 1,800 Most At-Risk Persons (by Sex) Source: Ministry of Health; CSO As Table 6.1 illustrates, the number of newly diagnosed cases for the 15-24 age-group increased from 179 to 187 between 2010 and 2011.
HIV prevalence rate within this cohort of the population increased from 1,300 per 100,000 persons (or 1.3 percent) in 2009 to 1,800 per 100,000 persons (or 1.8 percent) in 2011.

This increase was recorded despite the decrease in HIV incidence reported the general population over the same period.
for Other At-Risk Persons (SWs) In Trinidad and Tobago, like many other countries, at-risk populations include not only Men who have Sex with Men (MSM), Sex Workers and substance abusers, but also prisoners and migrants.

vulnerable and populations discrimination associated with HIV which deters access to prevention and treatment services.
Through advocacy principles, and human stigma These rights face Disaggregation of the cumulative cases of HIV between 1983 and 2010 revealed a greater HIV prevalence among young females compared to their young male counterparts in a ratio of approximately 2:1.102 This can be partially explained by factors including age-mixing with older partners, partnerships, transactional sex, the lack of ability to negotiate condom use with partners and higher poverty levels among young women.103 concurrent Most At-Risk Persons: Men who have Sex with Men An assessment of the vulnerability and risk among MSM is ultimately limited by inadequate data collection, although steps are being taken to rectify this problem.
It was estimated in 2006, there was an HIV however, prevalence of 20.4 percent within this that 102 Trinidad and Tobago Global AIDS Progress Report 2012 (formerly UNGASS) 103 Ibid.

125 of population.104 the segment Assessments have also highlighted that stigma and discrimination in Trinidad and Tobago have resulted in a situation where MSM limit their access to HIV prevention, care and support services.
Most At-Risk Persons: Sex Workers SWs have thus far been largely beyond radar and, the HIV assessment consequently, HIV prevalence in this group is unknown.
Like MSM, however, stigma and discrimination act as barriers to their access to sexual and reproductive health services, HIV/AIDS information and social support.105 Most At-Risk Persons: Substance Users Substances users were 19.8 percent or six times at greater risk for contracting the HIV virus than the entire population based on survey data acquired between 1996 and 2002.

Their vulnerability educational stemmed poor the use of attainment along with cocaine.
Socially displaced drug users were, in particular, at a higher risk of HIV infection since 25 percent of the sample106 was HIV positive.

from Apart from the system of response to the HIV/AIDS challenges already in place, emphasis will be placed on interventions to effect behaviour change and on the promotion of good sexual and reproductive health in order to 104 Ibid.

105 Ibid.
105 Ibid.

106 Data was obtained from 121 female substance users admitted to an all-female rehabilitation centre in Trinidad and Tobago between 1996 and 2002. reduce the vulnerabilities of this at-risk population.

Indicator: Condom Use at Last High Risk Sex CONDOM USE IS MORE PREVALENT AMONG YOUTH THAN OLDER PERSONS The most recent data shows that among the youth aged 15-24, 62 percent reported using a condom at their first sexual encounter.
This figure was found to be higher than that of the cohort aged 25-49 which stood at 39 percent.107 It should be noted, however, that persons in the 15—24 age cohort were more likely to report condom use than older persons.

These figures point to the challenges faced in mitigating the spread of HIV in Trinidad and Tobago with condom use ultimately being quite low.
In particular, condom use among men in Trinidad and Tobago has been hindered by the need to project and maintain an image of male machismo while female condom use has been limited due to a lack of both access and knowledge.108 107 Ministry of Health, 2007 108 National Strategic Plan for HIV and AIDS 2013-2018 126 Indicator: Proportion of Population Aged 15-24 years with Comprehensive Correct Knowledge of HIV/AIDS Target: Achieve by 2010, universal access to treatment for HIV/AIDS for all those who need it MORE YOUTH ARE KNOWLEDGEABLE ABOUT HIV/AIDS of There have been encouraging signs regarding the the proportion population aged 15-24 years with comprehensive correct knowledge of HIV/AIDS.
Between 2008 and 2012, this figure increased from 56 percent to 63 percent.109 Although this is a small increase, it is a movement in the right direction and provides the platform for further educational efforts to combat HIV/AIDS among youth.
Further, a 2009 study of MARPs confirmed that over 80 percent of SWs, drug users, homeless people and youth knew that either proper use of condoms or abstinence were the best means of protection against HIV.110 the spread of The data suggests that the massive education and sensitization programme undertaken by the State has begun to the disease.
curb Government continue to intends promoting healthy sexual attitudes among the youth, both within schools and out of school, in consultation and partnership with parents and other key stakeholders.

109 Trinidad and Tobago Global AIDS Progress Report 2012 (formerly UNGASS) 110 Ibid sexual heterosexual Trinidad and Tobago, by and large, is injecting society and HIV not an transmission has been predominantly activity, more driven by specifically, contact.
Information dissemination, treatment and prevention strategies have positively impacted on condom use, widespread knowledge of HIV/AIDS and access to anti-retroviral drugs and consequently, AIDS morbidity.

Indicator: Proportion of Population with Access to Anti-retroviral drugs INCREASE IN THE NUMBER OF PERSONS USING ANTI-RETROVIRAL DRUGS Anti-retroviral drugs are provided free of living with HIV charge to persons (PLHIV) and AIDS in Trinidad and Tobago.
Initiatives to increase access to treatment have been highly successful with the percentage of eligible adults and children receiving ARV therapy sharply rising from an estimated 46 percent in 2006111 to 75 percent in 2010, and 73 percent in 2011112.

There are currently eight treatment sites in the country and national capacity has been increased through improved laboratory surveillance.
Treatment and 111 Estimates were derived from a UNAIDS modelling software called Spectrum 112 Trinidad and Tobago Global AIDS Progress Report 2012 (formerly UNGASS) 127 care were further expanded with the successful the community-based home care project in one county of the country.
implementation of Indicator: Number of Deaths Due to AIDS IMPROVED ACCESS TO TREATMENT RESULTED IN LARGE REDUCTION IN DEATHS DUE TO AIDS is evidenced by Strategies and programmes to increase access to treatment have had positive the results.

This dramatic reduction in the number of deaths due to AIDS over the last decade, from a peak of over 250 in 2001 to a low of 42 in 2011, despite only moderate reductions in HIV incidence over the same period (Chart 6.2).
Even more impressive has been the reduction of the number of deaths to below the recorded number in 1990.
CHART 6.2 Number of Deaths Due to AIDS (1990 - 2012) S H T A E D 300 250 200 150 100 50 YEAR Source: Ministry of Health Indicator: Proportion of Women with Access to Anti-retroviral Drugs INCREASED ACCESS BY WOMEN TO ANTI- RETROVIRAL DRUGS cause Mother-to-child transmission was the of new HIV predominant infections in children.
In Trinidad and Tobago, tremendous success has been achieved in minimizing infections via this route through the Prevention of Mother to Child Transmission (PMTCT) Programme.

This programme has made ARV drugs universally available at all public sector health institutions.

in Chart 6.3, As presented the proportion of pregnant women receiving ARV therapy is particularly high with an average of 73.5 percent between 2005 and 2009.
Estimates for 2010 and 2011 were 81.3 percent and 81.9 percent, respectively, indicating that Trinidad and Tobago could reach all patients in the near future.113 CHART 6.3 Proportion of Pregnant Women Receiving ARV Therapy (2005 - 2009) E G A T N E C R E P 85 80 75 70 65 60 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 YEAR Source: Ministry of Health 113 Trinidad and Tobago Global AIDS Progress Report 2012 (formerly UNGASS) 128 it was estimated It should be noted More importantly, the provision of ARV therapy has yielded positive results.
In 2011, that HIV transmission from mother to child was 7.6 percent of live births from HIV positive mothers in Trinidad; and in Tobago, there have been no reported cases of HIV infected infants for several years.114 that programmatic data, which incorporates greater screening and is considered to be more realistic, shows that 0-2 infants are identified as HIV positive on a yearly is a tremendous basis.
While this achievement, with PMTCT Programme being strengthened and expanded, it is anticipated that more pregnant patients will access ARV therapy and that Trinidad and Tobago will move closer to reaching a zero transmission rate on a consistent basis.
the Target: Have halted by 2015, and begun to reverse, the incidence of Malaria, Tuberculosis, Dengue, Diabetes and Hypertension Indicator: Incidence and Death Rates Associated with Malaria MALARIA HAS BEEN LARGELY ERADICATED Unlike many other countries of the developing world, malaria has not been a significant health challenge, having been largely eradicated in Trinidad and Tobago.
Chart 6.4 illustrates this low incidence 114 National Strategic Plan for HIV and AIDS 2013- 2018. with an average of two cases per year between 2008 and 2011, and with no more than three cases in any one year.
CHART 6.4 Incidence of Malaria (2008-2011) S E S A C 4 3 2 1 0 2008 2009 2010 2011 YEAR Source: Ministry of Health or Further, when cases of malaria do arise, they tend to occur among foreign visitors and immigrants to Trinidad and residents who have Tobago, contracted the disease while travelling abroad.

Notably, none of these cases identified have been fatal, which is indicative of the health care system‘s capability treat with to effectively sporadic instances of the disease.
Indicator: Incidence and Death Rates Associated with Tuberculosis LOW INCIDENCE AND DEATH RATES ASSOCIATED WITH TUBERCULOSIS Tuberculosis has been identified as a national health concern and has thus received targeted attention through the Control Tuberculosis National Programme.
This entails implementing the World Health aspects Organisation‘s ―STOP TB‖ Strategy aimed at stopping the disease by 2015. being Elements 129 strategy the of of include pursuing high- implemented quality Directly Observed Treatment (DOTS) Course expansion and Short enhancement; addressing the higher vulnerability of HIV infected persons to contracting TB; strengthening primary health care system; and engaging all healthcare providers in combating TB.
included for Since 2011, strategies to curb the the also disease have development of a model the integration of TB/HIV treatment and piloting it in at least one primary care clinic; training for primary health staff in and management of TB/HIV; strengthening community support and participation in the piloted DOTS programme; and raising public awareness about TB prevention and access to screening and treatment services.
screening joint These initiatives have resulted in an Average Annual Rate of Decline (AARD)115 in TB incidence of 19 percent over the period 2000 to 2010.

Though significant, this figure falls short of the regional average of 29 percent.

It is anticipated, however, that with the expansion of TB prevention and screening services the AARD will further decline.
there significant is Notably, relationship between the incidence of HIV/AIDS and TB with 25 to 30 percent a 115 The AARD is the estimated percentage decline over the 10 year period 2000-2012.

According to the WHO, to achieve the target of halting by 2015 and beginning to reverse the incidence of tuberculosis the country must have an AARD greater than 0 percent.
of HIV screened TB cases was found to be co-infected.116 As pictured in Chart 6.5, TB treatment has had a positive impact in Trinidad and Tobago as evidenced by the low average TB mortality rate of 1.9 per 100,000 persons over the period 2006 to 2011.
However, the overall increase in the rate from 1.7 per 100,000 persons in 2006 to 2.1 in 2011 is cause for the national target of 0.6 per 100,000 by 2015.117 especially given concern, CHART 6.5 Tuberculosis Death Rate (2006-2011) E T A R 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 YEAR Source: UN Stats Millennium Development Goals Indicators Indications of treatment coverage are the percentage of also given by estimated HIV-positive incident TB cases who received treatment for both TB and HIV.
This figure was given as 60.5 percent in 2010.118 116 National Strategic Plan for HIV and AIDS 2013-2018 117 Ministry of Health Strategic Plan: Fiscal Years 2012- 2016, p. 65 118 Trinidad and Tobago Global AIDS Progress Report 2012 (formerly UNGASS) 130 It is expected that initiatives such as the expansion of the DOTS, which began in 2010, and further expansion and upgrading of treatment services will aid in reversing the observed increase in the TB mortality rate.
Indicator: Incidence and Death Rates Associated with Dengue LOW DEATH RATES DUE TO DENGUE BUT GREATER EFFORT NEEDED TO MINIMIZE FLUCTUATIONS IN ITS INCIDENCE A vector-borne disease spread by the Aedes aegypti mosquito, dengue is now viewed as being endemic to Trinidad and Tobago.
The number of dengue cases recorded annually over the past two decades has fluctuated dramatically between highs of 6,314 and 6,254 cases in 2002 and 2011, respectively, to lows of a few hundred cases recorded intermittently in the 1990s and each year over 2004 to 2007 (Chart 6.6).

to the Faced with this challenge, efforts to incidence of dengue minimise undertaken.
continues be include Preventative measures the communities‘ of regular surroundings with to eradicate the Aedes aegypti mosquito, house to house inspections by health officials education campaigns.

insecticide spraying public and CHART 6.6 Incidence of Dengue Fever (1990 - 2012) S E S A C 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 YEAR Source: Ministry of Health Much more success has been achieved in the treatment of dengue cases.
Dengue mortality rates have been consistently low for the period 1999 to 2008 with an overall average of 0.6 deaths per 100,000 persons.

The rate declined to near zero during 2004 to 2007, but increased to approximately 1.58 deaths per 100,000 persons in 2008, the highest ever recorded during the period (Chart 6.7).
CHART 6.7 Dengue Mortality Rate (Per 100,000 Mid-year population) E T A R 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.50 0.00 YEAR Both Sexes Source: CSO 131 Indicator: Incidence and Death Rates Associated and Hypertension Diabetes with CHART 6.8 Incidence of Diabetes and Hypertension (1990 - 2006) REDUCTIONS IN INCIDENCE AND DEATHS RATES ASSOCIATED WITH DIABETES AND HYPERTENSION BUT MORE EFFORT NEEDED Diabetes and hypertension, two chronic non-communicable lifestyle diseases, are closely linked to each other, with diabetics having a greater likelihood of developing hypertension.
These diseases are causes of major concern as both are among the top five causes of death in Trinidad and Tobago.119 S E S A C 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 YEAR Diabetes Hypertension Source: CSO illustrated in Chart 6.8, the As incidence of diabetes and hypertension in the country has been rising steadily with a 69 percent increase in the diabetes incidence rate from 1,175 new diabetes cases reported in 1990 to 1,984 cases in 2006; and a 158 percent increase in the hypertension incidence rate from 893 new cases in 1990 to 2,310 cases in 2006.
On average, 1878 new cases of diabetes and 1,910 new cases of hypertension were reported annually over the period to 2006.

There were some 1990 fluctuations over these years, however, with a peak of 2,639 new cases of diabetes reported for 2000; and a peak of 2,676 new hypertension cases in 2002.

Similarly, there were notable reductions in the incidence rates for many years during the reporting period as the rates fluctuated.
119 Government of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago, Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014.

Although quite high, the death rate associated with hypertension has remained fairly constant, with an average of 31.44 per 100,000 persons overall (Chart 6.9) over 1996 and 2008, excluding a peak of 40.71 per 100,000 persons in 1997.
CHART 6.9 Death Rates Associated with Hypertension per 100,000 Mid-year Population (1996 - 2008) 45 40 35 30 25 20 YEAR Male Female Both Sexes Source: CSO 132 generally, The data disaggregated by sex revealed that, the discrepancies between the death rates of females and males have been minimal.
The greatest difference occurred in 2006 with 36 deaths per 100,000 females compared to 27 deaths per 100,000 males.

By contrast, the death rate associated with diabetes showed a noticeable increase of about 20 percent from 90.14 per 100,000 persons in 1996 to 108.51 per 100,000 persons in 2008 (Chart 6.10).
More recent data shows that the rate climbed to 118.4 per 100,000 persons in 2012.120 CHART 6.10 Death Rates Associated with Diabetes per 100,000 Mid-year Population (1996 - 2008) E T A R 115 110 105 100 95 90 85 80 YEAR Male Female Both Sexes Source: CSO Data for the Death Rate associated with Diabetes for 2012 was 118.4 per 100,000 persons.
Source: Trinidad and Tobago Annual Performance Report 2013 120 Annual Report on Performance 2013, Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development.

Similar to hypertension, no consistent pattern was observed in the differences between the rates for men and women although the female rate was greater for seven of the 11 years.

On average, however, the female diabetes mortality rate over the period 1996-2008 was greater than that of males, which stood at 102.99 and 98.54 per 100,000 persons, respectively.
Modifying Behaviour and Attitudes towards HIV/AIDS and other Lifestyle-related Diseases HIV/AIDS in reducing and Tobago has made Trinidad the significant strides incidence of HIV and deaths resulting from AIDS.

The State has invested heavily over the years to combat the disease but challenges still remain.

The higher incidence of HIV among the youth and the reversal of the trend whereby women are now infected at a higher rate than men are worrisome.
Despite massive public awareness and sensitising programmes, stigma and discrimination against people living HIV and AIDS and at-risk groups still exist which act as a deterrent to some persons and treatment.

accessing testing the incidence of Further reducing only HIV/AIDS will increased investment but changes in people‘s attitude towards the disease.
require not targeted 133 Malaria, Tuberculosis, Dengue, Diabetes and Hypertension The challenges encountered in reducing the incidence of malaria, tuberculosis, dengue, diabetes, and hypertension are tied specifically to the very nature of these diseases in Trinidad and Tobago.

few With malaria having been largely eradicated from the country decades been ago, encountered low incidence rate although vigilance must in vector control to be maintained prevent resurgence.
challenges have in maintaining a by the Although TB is both treatable and curable, screening and the access of early treatment and care have been obstructed stigma, discrimination and fear associated with the disease.

Control of the disease is further complicated by its close relation to the incidence of HIV/AIDS.

However, training and updates for primary health staff in joint screening and management of TB/HIV is expected to mitigate this problem.
public education In the absence of a vaccine to combat dengue and with inevitable limits on the coverage possible by spraying of insecticides, greater focus is required on modifying public behaviour.

Despite and continued awareness campaigns, poor practices such as blocked drainage and open water storage vessels remain.

These practices create breeding ground for the Aedes aegypti mosquito, the vector which the disease.
This situation is only made worse by the exogenous climatic conditions of the transmits season wet/rainy temperatures in Trinidad and Tobago.

and high Through the Ministry of Health, routine visits to homes within communities will be heightened during the wet/rainy season in order to examine conditions and mitigate the risk of these homes becoming breeding grounds for the deadly mosquito.
This, coupled with continued education and awareness campaigns is expected to further impact behaviour change and reduce the incidence of the disease.

in combating Similarly, behaviour modification is the major obstacle the incidence of diabetes and hypertension despite efforts to encourage healthy lifestyles.

Additionally, citizens have not fully utilized the range of health services available to them.
The Way Forward Reversing the Spread of HIV/AIDS and the Incidence of other Major Diseases at modifying Combating HIV and AIDS is a complex task given the multidimensional nature of the factors contributing to its spread.

A scaling up of efforts is now required behavioural aimed patterns, particularly sexual behaviour, in both the general population and among most-at-risk populations.
While public awareness campaigns have had some success, behaviour has not changed sufficiently the HIV to dramatically incidence rate.

education reduce and 134 The response to 2018 as outlined in the NSP emphasizes prevention across all modes of transmission, adopting a life cycle approach and focusing on:  Framing a stronger enabling environment for safe sexual health practice for all in Trinidad and Tobago.
This includes approving the National HIV and AIDS Policy as well as reviewing and revising legislation that may discriminate against key populations are more who vulnerable to HIV infection; infections change  Preventing new HIV and sexually through transmitted behaviour and communication programmes and combination prevention programmes, with a focus on youth aged 15-24 and key at-risk populations; and  Improving understanding of the scale, nature and causes of poor sexual health and HIV infection through strengthened clinical and behavioural surveillance and a unified monitoring and evaluation system.
Similarly, stigma and discrimination against persons living with HIV and AIDS and at-risk groups persist although there have been signs of change.

The unfortunate gradual consequence of stigma and discrimination is that of driving the further underground with epidemic persons being reticent to get tested or to access anti-retroviral therapy.
this Government will, therefore, continue to and promote attitudes positive groups through compassion towards PLHIV and key at- risk increasing awareness and understanding amongst the general population, including the workplace; community strengthening; and collaborating with faith-based organisations.

in and treatment sites Ensuring access to treatment has also been hindered by the centralization of the HIV/AIDS country.
But, progress is being made in increasing the number of sites; to date, eight public treatment sites are located Tobago.121 Trinidad across Importantly, even where treatment access is widespread, the inconsistent adherence to anti-retroviral therapy by patients curtails the effectiveness of this type of intervention.

Steps are being taken, however, these problems.


Assuring universal access to treatment and support for persons living with HIV, their families and orphaned children continues to be a priority in combatting the disease.

remedy to Data collection on HIV/AIDS also remains a significant challenge with limitations on the technological capacity for testing, storing and processing information from such tests.
The lack of mechanisms to collect data from the private health sector also obstructs the analysis of the epidemic in Trinidad and Tobago.

Measures to strengthen the surveillance capacity of the healthcare system have, therefore, been important aspects of the fight against HIV/AIDS.

121 Ministry of Health.

135 It is expected that with the NSP 2013- 2018, which implemented, is being issues will be diminished.
these Strategies are being pursued under five priority areas, namely: prevention; optimizing diagnosis, treatment, care and support; advocacy and human rights; strategic information; and policy and programme management.
These priorities implemented through key projects and programmes which are categorised under three broad areas: (1) expansion and strengthening of health care services; (2) introduction and expansion of education and awareness (3) campaigns; programme policy development and are legislative highlighted below.

changes.
These being and are Training Centre; (CDAP) Disease  Expansion of access to treatment for chronic diseases through the Assistance Chronic Programme which provides free medication, blood glucose meters, and testing strips for diabetics; Increasing access to treatment for cardiovascular ailments through the Adult Cardiac Surgery Programme for persons unable to afford such treatment;   Enhancement of access to medical services in rural areas through the Community Outreach Family Medicine Programme which provides mobile testing and other health services; Expansion and Strengthening of Health Care Services Some of the measures being undertaken to improve health care services include:  Establishment of the Healthcare Worker Mentorship Programme to minimize transmission of HIV from mother to child; Implementation of a National HIV Treatment and Care Delivery System such as expanded access to ARV treatment;   Expansion of laboratory services, surveillance and management of HIV including the installation of an HIV Electronic Patient the at System Information Paediatric HIV Clinic;  Establishment of the Trinidad and Tobago HIV and AIDS  Setting of nutritional and dietary guidelines for use in schools;  Establishment of an Integrated Management Strategy for dengue prevention;  Training of personnel to treat with dengue and TB/HIV; and  Continuation of the Directly Observed Treatment Short Course, an internationally recommended strategy for tuberculosis control.
Education and Awareness Campaigns and Programmes information and Disseminating sensitising the population are key aspects of combatting the spread of diseases and lifestyle related ailments.
Some initiatives in this area include:  an HIV Implementation Sensitization Plan for staff of the of 136 Ministry of Health and Regional Health Authorities; the Policy Development and Legislative Changes  the  Conduct of HIV sensitization theme on workshops Mainstreaming HIV/AIDS in the Work Place; Implementation of the Healthy Eating, Active Living campaign aimed at reducing childhood obesity in Trinidad and Tobago;  Conduct of a public awareness programme about the Tobacco Control Act; of a health Implementation promotion campaign targeting the reduction of modifiable risk factors including obesity, tobacco physical and inactivity, eating practices and the promotion of self-monitoring and management of NCDs;  Strengthening community support and participation in the DOTS Programme; unhealthy alcohol use, of  screening  Raising public awareness about increased and TB prevention and to access treatment services; Implemented the Fight the Fat campaign in all Regional Health Authorities selected Communities; and and   Development and implementation of a RAP Youth Sexual Programme as part of a pre-Carnival programme on sexuality.
It was implemented within the North West and North Central Regional Health Authorities.

Developing appropriate policies and enacting legislation are regarding as integral to the health care agenda.
These include:   to Implementation of the HIV in the combat Workplace Policy stigma and discrimination; of the HIV Implementation to provide a Testing Policy framework for greater access to safe and ethical testing services for the population;  Development of a policy to promote healthier lifestyles, with emphasis on sport, nutrition and exercise to tackle the growing problems of obesity, diabetes, hypertension and HIV/AIDS;  Development of a model for the integration of TB/HIV treatment, piloted in at least one primary care clinic;  Conduct of a data collection the STEPS Risk exercise via Factor Survey122 to in order acquire key data that would and inform programmes for the treatment of NCDs (an exercise was conducted in 2011); policies key  Review of the laws of Trinidad and Tobago and their impact on PLHIV; and  Proclamation of sections of the 122 The WHO STEPwise approach is a method used to collect, analyze and disseminate data for chronic disease risk factors in WHO member countries.
137 Tobacco Control Act smoking in spaces.
to ban confined public 138 139 GOAL 7 Ensure Environmental Sustainability TARGETS Integrate the principles of sustainable development into country policies and programmes and reverse the loss of environmental resources INDICATORS Reduce biodiversity loss, achieving, by 2010, a significant reduction in the rate of loss Proportion of land area covered by forest Carbon Dioxide (CO2) emissions, total, per capita (metric tonnes) Consumption of ozone-depleting substances Proportion of fish stocks within safe biological limits Proportion of terrestrial and marine areas protected Proportion of species threatened with extinction Halve, by 2015, the proportion of people without sustainable access to safe drinking water and basic sanitation Proportion of population using an improved drinking water source Proportion of population using an improved sanitation facility By 2020, to have achieved a significant improvement in the lives of at least 100 million slum dwellers Proportion of urban population living in slums 140 GOAL 7 Ensure Environmental Sustainability Targets:  Integrate the principles of sustainable into country policies and loss of reverse the development programmes and environmental resources  Reduce biodiversity loss, achieving, by 2010, a significant reduction in the rate of loss  Halve by 2015 the proportion of people without sustainable access to drinking water and basic sanitation.
 By 2020, to have achieved a significant improvement in the lives of at least 100 million slum dwellers.

Introduction The Government of Trinidad and Tobago is steadfast in its commitment to people- centred involvement in sustainable and environmentally development, which will engender a heightened sense of all collective responsibility amongst sound citizenry.
It is envisioned that by 2033, Trinidad and Tobago will be a place where people enjoy a high quality of life within a safe and healthy environment.

To do this would of decentralization, devolution of power, geographic diversification of economic activity and constitutional reform to ensure greater people participation in governance.
strategy require a When referring to sustainable development it should be noted that it is based on the Brundtland Report (1987) and involves the three interconnected pillars of Economic, Social and Environmental Sustainability.
That report defines sustainable development as “development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.” It is, therefore, on this basis that an overarching approach to development is clearly articulated in the Medium Term Development Framework 2011-2014, which guides Government‘s shared priorities and the interventions within cross cutting national development framework.123 The Millennium Development Goals recognize that environmental sustainability is a critical component of global, economic and social well-being.124 In the same vein, Trinidad and Tobago is committed to the development of a new growth dynamic that transforms the existing consumption- an based environmentally-friendly model using economic stability, social sustainability economic growth into 123 Ministry of Planning and Sustainable, Corporate Communications Unit supplemental publication 2013: “Vision and Action – Making Sustainable Development Happen in Trinidad and Tobago.” 124 Government of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago, “Working for Sustainable Development in Trinidad and Tobago”, June 2012.
141 and environmental protection as foundational pillars.

its development sustainable Thus, promoting biological diversity,125 maintaining water and air quality, conserving and increasing our forest cover, and promoting green initiatives to reduce conserve our resources policy considerations for the environment as the country develops.
footprint and important carbon are to they relate Ozone targets as of Trinidad and Tobago has already met some MDG the ‗Consumption Depleting Substances‘ and the ‗Proportion of the Population Using an Improved Sanitation Facility‘.

The targets for the ‗Proportion of Land Area Covered by Forest‘ and the ‗Proportion of Dwelling Units using an Improved Drinking Water Source‘ are significantly advanced and are likely to be met by 2015.
However the country is still to currently addressing implement measures to reduce the levels of absolute carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions.

is committed to Trinidad and Tobago continuing sustainability efforts in order to achieve the goal by 2015. the challenge environmental With respect to the proportion of the urban population living in squatter settlements, the Government has embarked on a number towards of housing improving the livelihoods and dwelling spaces for the low income households.
As such, the target is likely to be achieved by 2020. initiatives geared 125 Biological diversity is defined as the variability among living organisms; this includes diversity within species (genetic diversity), between species and of ecosystems.

These To this end, Trinidad and Tobago has established an institutional framework and other initiatives to ensure protection of the around environment.
legislative and policy reform as well as projects and programmes aimed at balancing economic environmental transformation, conservation at their core.

coalesce social with and Making Sustainable Development Happen in Trinidad and Tobago The Government of Trinidad and Tobago is deliberate in its efforts to propel this diverse nation with sustainable development at the core of its national policy agenda.
It is for national recognized that all plans development relating to resource allocation and utilization must incorporate the concept of sustainability in order to ensure long- term economic, social and environmental sustainability.

conservation environmental As the nation pursues its growth and development path, there has been an increased recognition that the overall goals and of economic development must take place in a more harmonious synchronized manner.
The ProEcoServ Programme,126 which is a new initiative of the GORTT in collaboration with the University of the West Indies, integrates ecosystem assessment, economic scenario valuation of ecosystem services into national development and and is a project for Ecosystem Services funded under (ProEcoServ) 126 The Project Programme the Global Environmental Facility (GEF) which is an independently operating financial organization that provides grants for projects change, to biodiversity, international waters, land degradation, the ozone layer, and persistent organic pollutants.
The UNEP and Department of Life Sciences at UWI supports this effort.

climate related 142 sustainable development planning.
Trinidad and Tobago has representation on a number of multilateral environmental fora, one of which is in the United Nations Conference on Sustainable Development (Rio +20 Conferences on Sustainable Development) and is also represented at the TABLE 7.1 Multilateral Environmental Agreements Ratified by Trinidad and Tobago, with the Ministry of Environment and Water Resources and Ministry of Food Production as responsible Agencies meetings of the Open Working Group on Sustainable Development Goals.
In addition, the country is party to several regional and multilateral environmental agreements, the development of the institutional framework for sustainable development.
(Table 7.1) facilitate which TITLE Atmospheric Conventions United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) Kyoto Protocol to the UNFCCC Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer Montreal Protocol Land and Biodiversity-related Conventions World Heritage Convention Convention on Wetlands of International Importance especially as Waterfowl Habitat (Ramsar) Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITIES) Cartegena Protocol on Biosafety Cartagena Convention Ratification/ Accession Entry into Force 24 June 1994 21 March 1994 28 January 1999 28 August 1989 28 August 1989 16 February 2005 22 September 1988 1 January 1989 16 February 2005 17 December 1975 21 April 1993 21 December 1975 1 August 1996 21 December 1975 19 January 1984 1July 1975 5 October 2000 24 January 1986 11 September 2003 11 October 1986 International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC) 18 September 1962 2 October 2005 Specially Protected Areas and Wildlife (SPAW) Protocol 24 January 1986 August 1999 United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification (UNCCD) Waste and Chemical Conventions LBS Protocol Rotterdam Convention Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Waste and their Disposal Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants Marine Conventions International Convention for the Conservation of Atlantic Tunas United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) 8 June 2000 26 December 1996 28
 March 2003 16 December 2009 13 August 2010 24 February 2004 18 February 1994 5 May 1992 13 December 2002 17 May 2004 30 March 1999 21 March 1969 17 October 2007 16 November 1994 Source: Compiled by the Socio-Economic Policy Planning Division, Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development 143 Sectoral Initiatives Assessing Environmental Performance There are a number of environmental laws, policies and development plans all geared towards addressing the issues relating to environmental sustainability levels.
Table 7.2 at represents several of these sector policy instruments which guide the national sustainable development thrust.
the sectoral TABLE 7.2 Sector Policy Instruments Sector Policy Instrument Housing and Settlements Agriculture Environment Forestry Biodiversity Climate Change Greening Business Operations Water and Sewerage Energy National Spatial Development Strategy 2013-2023 National Physical Development Plan 1984 Fisheries Policy (2007) National Food Production Action Plan 2012-2015 Agriculture Incentive Programme National Climate Change Policy (2011) National Environmental Policy (2006) National Wetland Conservation Policy (2002) National Protected Areas Policy (2011) National Forest Policy (2011) National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan for Trinidad and Tobago (2001) National Tourism Policy (2010) National Action Programme to Combat Land Degradation in T&T 2006-2020 National Wildlife Policy (2013) Green Government Policy (2011) Integrated Water Resources National Management Policy (2005) National Water Resources Policy Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency Policy Framework National Energy Policy (Green Paper) Countries are assessed based on their ecological resources utilization levels which are mapped out as ecological footprints.
The Ecological Footprint is a data-driven metric that tells us how close we are to the goal of sustainable living.

The Global Footprint Network127 is an agency that advances the work on its sustainability and, according to 2007, data for Trinidad and Tobago‘s ecological footprint was 3.09 global hectares per person, compared to a world average of 2.7 global hectares per person.
However, with a biocapacity128 of 1.57 global hectares (gha) per person, Trinidad and Tobago ends up with an ecological deficit of 1.52 gha/persons.

The negative ecological remainder suggests that the demand for biological resources such as productive land and water resources used to produce food, energy, clothing and the like, outstrips the earth‘s capacity to replenish these resources.
Another useful sustainability measuring tool is the Environmental Performance the Index129 Index) Environmental Sustainability which benchmarks the ability of nations (which replaced (EPI) 127 The Global Footprint Network is a 501 member country non-profit organization established in 2003.

It is an international think tank working to advance sustainability through use of the Ecological Footprint a resource accounting tool that measures how much nature we have, and how much we use.
128 Biocapacity is the capacity of ecosystems to produce useful biological materials and to absorb waste materials generated by humans, using current management schemes and extraction technologies.

129 EPI ranks how well countries perform on high- priority environmental issues in 2 broad policy areas: protection of human health from environmental harm; and protection of ecosystems.

144 to protect the environment over the next several decades.
Trinidad and Tobago‘s performance is reflected in the ranking of 54 out of 163 countries studied in 2010.

The 2014 EPI ranked this country 79 of 178 countries.

This drop in ranking is largely due to the country‘s growing industrial sector and attendant increase in greenhouse gas emissions.

These indices show significant variations based on the international assessments conducted but are still useful benchmarks to note as we advance along our development path.
Conserving Biological Diversity in role important Trinidad and Tobago‘s biodiversity the plays an ecosystem services that support human well-being.

Directly, these include the flood provision regulation/erosion control, eco-tourism recreation, shoreline protection and the provision of food.
freshwater, of Currently, Trinidad and Tobago is guided by the National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan (NBSAP) 2001, in the process of being which is revised.130 As a signatory to the Convention on Biological Diversity since 1996, Trinidad and Tobago has accomplished many of its conservation objectives using the NBSAP as the its instrument principal for 130 The NBSAP to be revised in accordance with the decision X/2 of the 10th Meeting of the Conference of Parties, held in Aichi Prefecture, Japan, October 2010.
A revised and updated Strategic Plan for Biodiversity and Targets were adopted for the 2011-2014 period, with implementation to commence by 2014.

The Ministry of implementation.

Environment and Water Resources is the focal point for the Convention while Management the the National Authority Executing charged with ensuring the necessary steps are taken to promote biodiversity conservation.
Environmental is (EMA) Agency ratified resulting the Trinidad and Tobago in Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety 2000, which cemented its commitment to protect the country‘s biodiversity from the potential risks posed by living modified organisms from modern biotechnology.
As part of its international commitments under the protocols, various Trinidad and Tobago has developed a number of sectoral policy instruments issue of which center around the environmental and conservation Table 7.2. environmental preservation development Target: Integrate the principles of into sustainable country policies and programmes of reverse and environmental resources loss the Indicator: Proportion of Land Area Covered by Forest OUR FOREST COVER IS ON THE REBOUND The proportion of forest cover131 is slowly 131 Forest cover is defined as the percentage of a fixed area covered by the crown of an individual plant or delimited by the vertical projection of its outermost perimeter.
145 E G A T N E C R E P 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 on the road to recovery, moving from 44.1 percent in 2005 to 48 percent in 2012 (Chart 7.1).

This was in part due to the success of the National Reforestation and Rehabilitation Programme.

This Programme works through community groups, such as Fondes Amandes, to repair, preserve and protect the nation‘s forest, watersheds, wetlands, flora and fauna.
Watershed CHART 7.1 Proportion of Land Area Covered by Forests 1996 -2012 other national the Government recently As such, approved the National Forest Policy132 which builds on the previous policy framework for forest management and enhances policies, particularly the National Environmental Policy (NEP) (2006), the Protected Areas (2011) and the most recently Policy developed National Wildlife Policy (2013).
These are supplemented by national strategic plans such as the NBSAP and the National Action Programme to Combat Land Degradation.

The key challenge which the National Forest Policy seeks to address is the maintenance of forest ecosystems competing demands for land.
instruments light of policy in 19961997200020032005201020112012 GEF Project Implementation Framework Recent Initiatives YEAR Source: Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources Other reforestation work continues through the Northern Range Reforestation Programme under the purview of the Forestry Division of the Ministry of Environment and Water Resources.
The Government of Trinidad and Tobago remains committed to conservation and sustainable use of our biological resources and supports the need for effective implementation of policies to monitor, regulate, manage and improve the environment.
a of development The Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources was been involved in the Global Environmental Facility (GEF) Project Implementation Framework133 which now affords Trinidad and Tobago the opportunity to apply for access to $2,790,000 USD of GEF grant funding for a four-year project to improve its forest and protected areas.
These funds will implementation of the National Forest and Protected Areas Policies (2011) with some of the major outputs as follows: facilitate 132 Government of The Republic of Trinidad and Tobago, National Forest Policy, February 2011 133 146  Development of national legislation for wildlife conservation, national parks and other protected areas;  Development of a national protected areas system plan;  Designation of five areas in the new protected areas system; an  Development of ecological research and monitoring programme to areas management; protected guide  Development of management plans for the five pilot protected areas sites; and  Development of a strategic plan for sustainable financing of the system of protected areas; among others.
Two-Year Moratorium on Hunting The Government, through the Forestry Division of the Ministry of Environment and Water Resources, has implemented a two-year moratorium on hunting in Trinidad and Tobago effective October 1, 2013.134 This is in keeping with its integrated approach for the sustainable management of game species and in the emergence of increasing numbers of illegal hunting camps in state forests.

During the moratorium, steps are being taken to remove all illegal hunting camps on state lands.
Penalties and fines in the Conservation of Wildlife Act is currently being reviewed with a view to amending the existing legislation so that the penalties and fines will serve as a greater deterrent to and committing hunting, illegal 134 consumption and distribution of game and protected species.
Indicator: Carbon Dioxide Absolute Emissions (CO2) STEPS TAKEN TO REDUCE CARBON FOOTPRINT Trinidad and Tobago accounts for 0.1% of greenhouse gases as it relates to An global absolute emissions.135 important the in consideration discussion on Carbon Dioxide emissions is the fact that the Government of Trinidad and Tobago and the Ministry of Environment and Water Resources the use of absolute CO2 support emissions as a credible environmental indicator, in gigagrams (Gg) or metric that regard, absolute tonnes.
emissions recorded for 2008 stood at 80,823.35 Gg compared to 25,397.2 Gg for the baseline year of 1990.136 This places Trinidad and Tobago at 72nd place in the world with respect to annual total CO2 emissions.137 In With respect to emissions by sector, the revised 1996 Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change guidelines were to analyze greenhouse gas utilized (GHGs) emitted five sectors: industrial processes; waste; energy; agriculture; and land use, land use change and forestry.
from 135 The Government of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago, The National Climate Change Policy, 2011.

136 Ministry of Environment and Water Resources, Environmental Policy and Planning Division.

137 Ministry of Energy and Energy Affairs, ―Re-fueling T&T‘s Economic Engine: A New Policy for Energy, 2011-2015.

[International Energy Agency, 2003].

147 GHGs emissions Overall, there has been an observed increase of the GHGs emitted which is consistent with increased socioeconomic development.
Over the period 1990- 2006, have approximately quadrupled for the energy sector moving from 16,806 Gg in 1990 to 63,455Gg in 2006.

There has also been an increase of the GHGs emissions in the transportation sector from 1,313 Gg in 1990 to 3,617Gg in 2005, which correlates with an in the number of vehicles for the same period.

increase the The main contributors to the increased GHGs emitted industrial from processes sector were iron and steel, and ammonia and cement production.
Emissions in this sector increased from 5,500 Gg in 1990 to settle at 10,785 Gg in 2008.

The same increasing trend has been observed for the waste sector with the net annual emissions almost tripling from 15.96 Gg in 1990 to 47.16 Gg in 2008.
In the agriculture, forestry and land use sector, there was an observed net storage of carbon mainly due to the relatively large forest cover in Trinidad and Tobago as well as good forest management practices.138 The State recognizes the need to address these emissions in accordance with the decisions under the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change.
The decisions include adopting mitigation actions or those related to the avoidance or reduction of greenhouse gas emissions which must be supported Trinidad 138 Second National Communication to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change, April 2013.

Tobago and by the requisite legislative backing.

In 2011, the Government approved the Green Government Policy which provides a series of recommendations to all Government Ministries and agencies on how to ‗green‘ their everyday operations.
the use of The Policy encourages measures and practices that facilitate cost effectiveness and promote energy efficiency, wise use of resources and pollution prevention which ultimately of minimize the Government‘s environment.

adverse operations effects on the Additionally, the National Climate the Renewable Change Policy and Energy and Energy Efficiency Policy have been formulated in pursuance of a low- carbon development path for Trinidad and Tobago.
In this regard, a project entitled The Elaboration of a Strategy for the Reduction of Carbon Emissions for been Trinidad undertaken with oversight by the Ministry of Environment and Water this Resources.
The objectives of ongoing project are to facilitate the: Tobago has and  Institutional Strengthening for more effective and increased participation by government ministries and agencies in Trinidad and Tobago for the development of Sectoral Carbon Reduction Strategies;  Development and elaboration of a strategic and policy framework for carbon reduction emissions for the electrical generation, industrial and transport sectors in Trinidad and Tobago; and power 148  Development of an implementation framework for the Sectoral Carbon Reduction Emissions Strategy.
Indicator: Consumption Depleting Substances139 of Ozone for the development of a At present, the business-as-usual scenario power and generation, transport sectors is being developed.

Further, cost benefit analyses are also being potential undertaken mitigation measures.

industrial for The Government, in devising a low- carbon development path, has seen the need for the integration of adaptation strategies into the national planning function.
It is recognized that the impacts of climate change are expected to be cross-sectoral, transcending the bio-physical socio-economic systems.

As such, preparedness through adaptation planning to achieving the objective of sustainable the growth low development of a green economy and in accordance with the MDGs.
is critical towards carbon and country‘s In addition to those initiatives that are directly related to the reduction of greenhouse gases, the Government is taking concrete steps to diversify not only the energy sector but the wider economic structure in order to reduce the footprint.
Government‘s economic development policy centers around the expansion of the services sector, development of the creative sectors, greater adaptation and use of technology, and innovation, all building with economic competitiveness diversification.

potential carbon and the for USE OF OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES SUBSTANTIALLY REDUCED Over the years, legislative amendments and reform of several national policies have resulted in substantial decline of the consumption of ozone-depleting substances.
Consumption of ozone depleting substances declined from a high of 220 ODP tonnes in 1998 to 34.34 ODP tonnes in 2011 (Chart 7.2).

This was due to the full phase-out of Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) in Trinidad and Tobago and the use of less ozone depleting substances such as Hydro– chlorofluorocarbons and non-depleting alternatives air conditioning and pest control sectors.
refrigeration, in CHART 7.2 Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODP Tonnes) (1990 - 2011) 250 200 150 100 50 0 G N I T E L P E D E N O Z O ) S E N N O T P D O ( YEAR Source: United Nations Environment Programme Ozone Secretariat Further, as part of Trinidad and 139 Measured in Ozone Depleting Potential Tonnes or ODP Tonnes 1990-2011.
149 Tobago‘s obligations under the Vienna Convention and the Montreal Protocol (see Table 7.1 above), an extensive amount of work has also been undertaken by the National Ozone Unit of the Ministry of Environment and Water Resources, on the phasing-out of the ozone depleting substances.

The Unit, which was established in 1999, is charged with the responsibility of ensuring that Trinidad and Tobago meets the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer.
obligations under its of phasing-out Currently, work is being undertaken on the hydro- chlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) based on Trinidad and Tobago‘s HCFC Phase-out Management Moreover, Plan.

hydrocarbon refrigerant training for the air-conditioning and refrigeration sector is ongoing as well as training on the use of alternatives to methyl bromide for pre-treatment and quarantine purposes.
The National Ozone Unit continues to actively and its key sensitization activities with stakeholders in order to ensure that more are ozone-friendly practices adopted.

training engage in Indicator: Proportion of within safe biological limits fish stocks FOCUS ON ENFORCEMENT OF MANAGEMENT REGULATIONS TO ADDRESS DEPLETED FISH STOCK The proportion of fish stocks within safe to be a limits continues biological challenge.
As shown in Table 7.3 below, limits for many the safe biological commercially important species of fish have already been surpassed.

This was due, in part, to inappropriate fishing practices and outdated legislation which contributed to the improper management of fisheries stock.
In an effort to address the outdated legislation, the Institute of Marine Affairs in Trinidad and Tobago has commenced the process of revising the country‘s marine and environmental laws and policies through a review of its regional and instruments (conventions, protocols, resolutions and guidelines).
international legal TABLE 7.3 Proportion of Fish Stocks within Safe Biological Limits Species/Fishery Status Fully-/Over-exploited Fully-/Over-exploited Over-exploited Tuna & Bonitos King Mackerel (Kingfish) Spanish Mackerel (Carite) Shrimp Billfish Sharks Herring & Jashua Unknown Weakfish (Salmon) Fully-/Over-exploited Fully-/Over-exploited Croaker Fully exploited Snapper Unknown Cavalli & other Jacks Other Over-exploited Over-exploited Fully-/Over-exploited Unknown Source: CSO In order to address the issue of improper management of the fisheries stock, the Fisheries Monitoring, Surveillance, and Enforcement Unit of the Fisheries Division continues to be better outfitted with the necessary resources to enforce 150 management regulations as they relate to fishing practices.
Concrete measures have already been taken to institute better management practices.
Catches are inspected upon landing in the long-line fishery and, as of 2011, vessel monitoring systems have been installed on vessels larger than 24 meters in length.140 A new licensing system has been in effect since July, 2013 which grants fishing rights to owners of vessels based on their management with compliance regulations; in order to qualify for a license there must be no evidence that they have engaged in illegal, unregulated or unreported fishing practices.
and With respect to the issue of trawling,141 the Government has taken serious steps to curb its deleterious effects on marine life.

In September, 2013, the Ministry of Food Production mandated a ban on trawling in local waters for non-artisanal trawlers in the face of declining seafood stocks environmental damage caused by wide-range dragnets.
This was supported by the implementation of a closed season for trawling activities; an amendment of regulations governing the Fisheries Act; and the appointment of a multi-sectoral committee to consider a relief package which could be offered to fisherfolk who would be displaced affected by the change in legislation and the ban on trawling.

Thus, the serious 140 International Commission for the Conservation of Atlantic Tuna (ICCAT) 2012.

Trinidad and Tobago joined ICCAT in 1999.


141 Trawling is defined as a method of fishing that involves the manual or mechanized towing or pulling of a trawl net through the water or the bottom of the sea bed.

emphasis placed on enforcement and restrictions on poor fishing practices can only redound to the benefit of the fisheries and the environment in the not too distant future.
Target: Reduce biodiversity loss, achieving, by 2010, a significant reduction in the rate of loss Indicator: Proportion of Terrestrial and Marine Area Protected to Maintain Biological Diversity ACTION PLAN DEVELOPED TO ESTABLISH, RECOVER AND BETTER MANAGE PROTECTED AREAS the 10th Meeting of During the Conference of Parties to the Convention on Biological Diversity, Parties agreed to 20 Aichi Biodiversity targets.
Target 11 stated that: ―By 2020, at least 17% of terrestrial and inland water, and 10% of coastal and marine areas, especially areas of particular importance for biodiversity and ecosystem services are conserved through effectively and equitably managed, ecologically representative and well-connected systems of protected areas and area-based other conservation and integrated the wider landscapes and seascapes.” measures, effective into 151 The National Protected Areas Policy142 (2011) The Policy proposes the establishment of a System of National Parks and Protected Areas in Trinidad and Tobago within the context of the following six (6) categories of management: 1.
Scientific Reserves 2.

National Parks 3.

Natural Landmarks 4.

Nature Conservation Reserves 5.

Scenic Landscapes 6.

Recreation Parks Specifically, the policy provides a course of action for programmes concerned with the protection of the country’s natural heritage and the provision of outdoor recreation activities.
It incorporates and integrates the intent of Government policy in a number of related areas including environment, conservation, forestry, tourism and recreation as it relates to the administration of national parks, heritage sites and protected areas.
The policy identifies the deficiencies in the existing legislation to protect the country’s national resources and provides the basis for legislation necessary to provide a clear mandate to protect and properly use the outstanding natural heritage areas of the country.
While Trinidad and Tobago is in still the process of developing a national target for the proportion of terrestrial and marine areas to be protected, it has developed a National Protected Areas Policy that ensures conservation of full diversity of natural ecosystems whilst enabling the sustainable use of these resources.

This policy instrument is supported by the National Wildlife Policy and the National Forest Policy which all speak to the interventions to preserve and protect the natural environment.
Currently, the total terrestrial protected area143 under jurisdiction of the State is 142 With respect approximately 164,167 hectares which represents approximately 32 percent of the combined land area of Trinidad and to marine Tobago.

protected areas (MPAs), the Buccoo Reef Marine Park is the only legally declared MPA.
It is 7km2 in size and is the equivalent Archipelagic Waters the jurisdiction of the State.144 to about 0.1% of under 13 Sensitive Reserves, is managed There exist several categories of terrestrial protected areas, including 36 Wildlife Forest Sanctuaries, 11 Nature Reserves and 3 Environmentally Areas (ESAs).145 The 36 Forest Reserves have been classified as production forests and protection forests.

The protection of forests timber production and other forest products, conservation and biodiversity.
The Forest Reserves comprise game sanctuaries (21,428 hectares (ha)), watersheds (8,344 ha), nature reserves (458 ha) and other protection forests (42,986 ha).

Table 7.4 below shows the proportion of land and marine areas designated for biodiversity protection.

soil, water for of 143 The protected areas include nature reserves, game sanctuaries, and forest reserves.

144 Ministry of Environment and Water Resources.


145 An ESA is defined as a part of the environment that is a significant part of a country‘s natural heritage, and of great importance to the sustenance of life.

An ESA may even include areas with natural assets, which if destroyed could severely affect the economy of for the country or even the possibility of endangered, vulnerable or endemic species of animals or plants, which are dependent on the area.
life 152 TABLE 7.4 Proportion of Terrestrial and Marine Area Protected to Maintain Biological Diversity Total Area Under National Jurisdiction (k.m.)

Area Designated for Biodiversity Protection (k.m.)


Proportion of Total Area Designated for Biodiversity Protection (%) Land 5,128 Marine 73,633 221 5.85 4.31 >0.001 Source: Environmentally Sensitive Areas (ESA) Rules for and formulated and In recognition of the fact that more has to be done to protect and maintain Trinidad and Tobago‘s rich biological diversity, an Action Plan the Programme of Work on Protected Areas was is under the purview of the Forestry Division as the lead agency for execution.
The Plan establishes protected areas (PAs) in the Trinidad genetic diversity, conservation species, and natural habitats.

It would also be used as a tool for the maintenance and recovery of viable populations of rare or threatened species in their natural environment.

The Plan supports the national the implementation protected areas under the Convention on Biological Diversity146 of which Trinidad and Tobago is a member.
of ecosystems Tobago for of testimony to Trinidad and As a Tobago‘s deepened commitment to cherish and protect its biodiversity, Tobago Main Ridge Forest Reserve is on the tentative list of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization World Heritage Site 146 Trinidad and Tobago ratified its membership to the Convention on Biodiversity on August 1st 1996. because it is on record as the world's oldest legally protected forest reserve geared a conservation purpose.147 specifically towards Indicator: Threatened with Extinction Proportion of Species DECLINES IN SPECIES THREATENED WITH EXTINCTION HALTED TABLE 7.5 Threatened species in Trinidad and Tobago in 2013 (totals by taxonomic group) Threatened species in Trinidad and Tobago in 2013 (totals by taxonomic group) Mammals Birds Reptiles Amphibians Fishes Other Inverts Plants Total 2 4 5 8 25 10 1 55 Source: International Union for Conservation of Nature Red List In 2013, data from the International Union for Conservation of Nature Red List indicated that 55 species were becoming endangered in Trinidad and Tobago as detailed in Table 7.5 above.
The Government has taken decisive in action to arrest ‗sensitive‘ species.

In order to aid the of protection or vulnerable, threatened, endangered species, the Environmental conservation rare further decline and 147 http://whc.unesco.org/en/tentativelists/5646/ 153 Management Authority has declared a total of five species as Environmentally Sensitive Species in accordance with the Environmentally Sensitive Species Rules 2001.
These include the:  Trichechus manatus (West Indian Manatee) (2005);  Pipile pipile (Trinidad Piping Guan or Pawi) (2005);  Campylopterus Ensipennis (White- tailed Sabre Wing Humming Bird) (2005);  Leopardus pardalis (Ocelot) (2007); and  Phytotriades auratus (Golden Tree Frog) (2007).

In addition, five species of sea turtles are being designated as ESSs.

These are the: 1.

Chelonia mydas (Green Turtle); 2.

Eretmochelys imbricate (Hawksbill Turtle); 3.

Dermochelys coriacea (Leatherback Turtle); 4.


Caretta caretta (Loggerhead Turtle); and 5.

Lepidochelys Ridley).

olivacea (Olive their designation Since as environmentally sensitive species, the level of awareness and protection is preventing further devastating declines in the turtle population.

One of the strategies used to raise awareness for the protection of sensitive species is the engagement of local communities.
One such group, Nature community-based Seekers, conservation organization which was community is a established in 1990 to protect nesting leatherback turtles in Trinidad and Tobago.

Through their main project, Turtle Conservation the Matura Programme, they have demonstrated the community involvement in the conservation efforts and have received numerous awards for their successful considerable and efforts in protecting their charges.
importance of Target: Halve, by 2015, the of people without proportion sustainable access to drinking water and basic sanitation Indicator: Proportion of Population Using an Improved Drinking Water Source MORE PERSONS BENEFITING FROM IMPROVED PIPE BORNE WATER SUPPLY TO THEIR HOMES in increase In 1990, Census data for the period 1990 to 2011 showed an the number of households with access to pipe borne water in their homes (see Chart 7.5 below).
this percentage stood at 55 percent of households and by 2011, it had increased significantly to 76 percent.

With respect to pipe borne water in the yards of households, the data showed a decrease from 12.1 percent in 1990 to 8.9 percent in 2011.

This was as a result of more households benefitting from water piped to their homes.

The percentage of households with ‗private piped into dwellings‘ remained relatively 154 unchanged.
CHART 7.5 Proportion of Dwelling Units Using an Improved Drinking Water Source E G A T N E C R E P 80 60 40 20 0 Public Piped Into Dwelling Public Piped Into Yard 1990 2000 2011 YEAR Source: CSO The percentage of dwelling units with access to chlorinated water stood at approximately 89 percent in 2011 - an overall increase of 8 percent from 2000 (Chart 7.6).

The development and execution of the Water and Wastewater the Master Plan has resulted improvement of the water supply to the population.
in CHART 7.6 Proportion of Dwelling Units with Access to a Chlorinated Water Supply E G A T N E C R E P 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76 88.7 86.4 81.0 1990 2000 YEAR 2011 Source: CSO The Water and Sewerage Authority as of the water which in the executing agency of the Master Plan, has embarked on the renewal and expansion supply involves infrastructure improvement works the water treatment facilities; drilling of wells; and increased supply capacity of the Desalination Company of Trinidad and pipeline Additionally, Tobago.
installation been initiative undertaken in 55 communities under the National Social Development Programme.

other and These, initiatives, auger well for the continued improvement of the water supply to the population.
a has Indicator: Proportion of Population Using an Improved Sanitation Facility SIGNIFICANT INCREASES IN NUMBER OF HOUSEHOLDS USING IMPROVED SANITATION FACILITIES Chart 7.7 below indicates that, during the period 1990 to 2011, there were significant increases in the percentage of households in Trinidad and Tobago that had access to water closets148 (WCs).

In the year 2011, 88 percent had access, which represented a significant increase from 57.7 percent in 1990.
However, most of these households had linked to closets that were either soakaways or not linked to soakaways or sewers.

As such, a National Wastewater Infrastructure Improvement Programme was developed to improve the environmental conditions and 148 Water closet is defined as an enclosed room or compartment containing a toilet bowl fitted with a mechanism for flushing.

155 reduce the uncontrolled discharge of untreated the wastewater environment.
into CHART 7.7 Proportion of the Population Using an Improved Sanitation Facility E G A T N E C R E P 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Total with Water Closets Septic Tank (Soakaway/Not Linked) WC Linked to Sewer 1990 2000 2011 YEAR Source: CSO Target: By 2020, to have achieved a significant improvement in the lives of at least 100 million slum dwellers Indicator: Proportion Population living in squatter settlements Urban of ACTIVELY PURSUING INITIATIVES TO IMPROVE THE LIVELIHOODS AND DWELLING SPACES IN SQUATTER SETTLEMENTS the squatting population in While Trinidad and Tobago is relatively small, the issue of squatting remains of grave concern as successive governments grapple to find solutions to provide decent livelihoods and dwelling spaces for no-income to households.
legitimately acquire dwelling units has low-income inability The or and (MHUD) Tobago‘s led to squatting on vacant parcels of state land, in many cases, in high-risk, environmentally unsafe areas.

The Ministry of Housing and Urban estimates Development Trinidad squatting population to be in excess of 250,000 people.

These persons reside in over 250 squatting communities on state land in Trinidad and Tobago which for approximately 23,000 accounts squatting households149 (see Table 7.6 below).
TABLE 7.6 Number of Squatter Dwelling Units in Regional Corporations and Municipalities of Trinidad Regional Corporations and Municipalities Port of Spain Mayaro/Rio Claro Sangre Grande Princes Town Penal/Debe Siparia San Fernando Arima Chaguanas Point Fortin Diego Martin San Juan/Laventille Tunapuna/Piarco Couva/Tabaquite/Talparo TOTAL No.
of Squatter Dwelling Units 455 793 3080 1129 602 1571 623 157 1957 529 3157 2758 3269 2528 22610 Source: CSO, 2011 Population and Housing Census The Land Settlement Agency, an entity under the purview of the MHUD, is mandated to prevent or contain further to squatting on state regularize certain squatters under the Land the provisions lands and State of 149http://news.co.tt/public_html/article.php?story=20 120521180042698 156 (Regularisation of Tenure) Act No.25 of 1998150.
In November 2012, the Land Settlement Agency launched The Land for The Landless – Residential Lots Programme in an attempt to assist low income land with in acquiring households further assistance to be provided during the building phase of the low- To date, 500 cost housing unit.

housing lots have been allocated to Trinidad and Tobago nationals as part of the first phase of the Programme.
It is expected that this Programme would acutely address the extensive list of over 129,000 applicants who are currently awaiting housing through the MHUD and its executing agency, the Housing Development Corporation (HDC).

is Programme administered Another Government the Neighbourhood intervention which Upgrading commenced in fiscal 2011 with an investment of US$50 million comprising US$40 million of IADB Loan funding and US$10 million of state funding.
This Programme is Phase 2 of the National Settlement Programme which seeks to enhance the quality of life of low and middle income groups, and thus equitable and development sustainable communities in Trinidad and Tobago.

the of wholesome promote Programme The three components: Squatter Regularisation and Upgrading (US$25 million); New comprises Strengthening Home and Home Improvement Subsidy (US$17 million); and Sector and (US$8 Institutional the It million).
development of low income housing units and the overall upgrade of squatter communities.

is geared towards to living Social According Sector the Investment Programme 2013 Report151, the Government provided housing for many citizens who were in unfavourable conditions.

During the first quarter of fiscal year 2012, over 150 families received keys to their new home from the Housing Development Corporation.

Housing grants were also made available to citizens for home improvements and repairs.
Over 600 homeowners this benefited from including those financial assistance needing emergency relief as a result of natural and other disasters.

The Home Improvement Grant (HIG) team also conducted outreaches to assist persons with disabilities; over 100 persons benefited.

Overall, the programme benefited 1,624 persons, at an estimated expenditure of TT$24 million, on average TT$15,000 per beneficiary.
Additionally, approximately TT$22 million were disbursed to provide 1,241 persons with home improvement subsidies.

Further, three urban communities in Port-of-Spain are to benefit from the Emerging Sustainable Cities Initiative (ESCI), another development and 150http://www.mphe.gov.tt/agenciesdivisions/lsa.html 151 http://www.finance.gov.tt/content/Social-Sector- Investment-Programme-2013.pdf 157 include project between the IADB and the Government of Trinidad and Tobago.
to be The urban sector activities urban undertaken regeneration, flood prevention and solid waste management.
The ESCI, launched in 2011, is an attempt to the reduce sustainability of emerging cities in a structured and integrated manner as a result of rapid urbanization.152 challenges the to In recognition of the fact that the rise of squatter settlements is in part due to unplanned and unregulated land use, the Town and Country Planning Division of the Ministry of Planning and in Sustainable conjunction with the National Planning Task Force, have developed a new National Physical Development Plan (NPDP) for Trinidad and Tobago within the national planning framework.
Development, The outcome of the NPDP is the National Spatial Development Strategy (NSDS) 2013-2023 which enunciates the spatial dimensions of major land use and national and sectoral goals.

It sets the platform to guide more detailed regional and local planning at the municipal level as well as land use elements of the growth pole strategies.
Moreover, developed development infrastructure the NSDS has ensure to of major and been in facilities, services while equity 152 https://guardian.co.tt/news/2012-12-09/billion- dollar-development-east-port-spain preserving a high quality natural environment.
Within this planning framework which has a ten-year lifespan, the country is well poised to to significantly achieve improve squatter lives communities by 2020. target the the of Climate Change and Trinidad and Tobago’s Mitigation Response In our quest towards a more balanced approach to development that includes ensuring environmental sustainability, climate change mitigation strategies must also be developed and executed as part of for sustainable development.
the overall strategy is In that regard, it is befitting to discuss in brief the issue of climate change which the major regarded as overriding global environmental issue of our time, especially in light of its peculiar negative effects on Small Island Developing States such as Trinidad and Tobago.

As noted in the Prime Minister‘s statement earlier in this report, SIDS‘ progress in reaching the MDG targets can be obliterated by the unfettered effects of climate change.
other is associated with Climate change variations in the distribution of weather related patterns and far- environmental phenomena.

reaching influence is predicted to shift weather patterns, increase levels of precipitation, unpredictability flooding, and increase freshwater contaminate 158 incidence of coastal Its of reserves.

like sectors As such, climate change threatens agriculture, multiple human health, coastal zones, water resources, and human settlement.
Moreover, as a Small Island Developing State in the Caribbean, our country is particularly from vulnerability to climate change, climate variability and sea level rise.

exempt not is change The direct cause of global warming and increasing climate concentrations of greenhouse gases (GHGs) in the atmosphere.

The most significant of these gases is carbon dioxide, which is emitted from various sectors, the energy and including transport sectors.
on On November 28th 2009, the 20th Commonwealth Heads of Government Meeting (CHOGM) reached a ground breaking a agreement Commonwealth Change Declaration.153 The Declaration, signed in Trinidad and Tobago, called for continued implementation of all six elements of the 2007 Lake Victoria Commonwealth Climate Change Action Plan.
Climate It also stressed that a global climate change solution was central to the survival of peoples, the promotion of development and facilitation of a global 153http://secretariat.thecommonwealth.org/files/2165 41/FileName/BriefingNote-ClimateChange.pdf transition development path.

to a low emission The six elements of the 2007 Lake Victoria Action Plan are: 1.

Strengthening the quality of and participation in climate change negotiations 2.
Promoting action through Commonwealth networks the economic and human aspects of climate change 3.

Improved land use management and sustainable to deepen consideration of use of forest resources 4.

Work on the issue of transported exports 5.

Support for natural disaster management in member countries 6.
Technical assistance to least developed countries and small states to to such, Government execute to balance remains As committed the Declaration and employing the necessary policy shifts required appropriate economic programmes growth and sustainable development.

Cognisant of the intricate relationship between sustainable development and the environment, Government has devised to respond to this rising concern, which is stated below.
interventions targeted Key Climate Change Initiatives Several projects and programmes and have been initiated to address climate in Trinidad and change concerns Tobago.

These include:  The Project Mainstreaming Climate Change into National Development and Feasibility of Carbon Capture and Geological Formations analysed the policy and legislative gaps for national climate 159 Storage in change policy implementation and made recommendations for filling gaps.
The recommendations are currently being implemented;  The Project Carbon Reduction is aimed at identifying Strategy policy and technology intervention options in the power generation, transportation industrial sectors with a view to reducing greenhouse gas emissions in these sectors.
The results of this study will provide input in arriving at a long term reduction objective; and  The Low Emissions Capacity Building Programme is aimed at building capacity to measure, report and verify greenhouse gas emissions in emitting sectors;  The Clean Development Mechanism to aimed at pursuing projects reduce carbon emissions has been initiated; is geared  The Greening of the Priority Bus Route towards transforming the PBR into a green route through the conversion of electricity generated street lights to solar powered units; implementation of climate change policy; IADB  In 2013, the the national issued to Trinidad and Tobago grant funding in the amount of US360,000 for a climate change mitigation and adaptation technical cooperation project entitled Understanding the Economics of Climate Change Adaptation;  A study is underway to determine the feasibility of undertaking solar energy projects  The European Union is funding a project to determine options for wind power on the North East coast of Trinidad and Tobago; and to in  The Caribbean Climate Innovation Centre, launched in January 2014, is the first of its kind in the promote Caribbean entrepreneurship of climate change.
This is the first five-year project phase the Caribbean undertaken by Industrial Research in Institute collaboration with the Scientific Research Council of Jamaica in an agreement with the World Bank.
in a areas  The project to convert buses, maxi taxis and other state vehicles to compressed natural gas has commenced; compressed natural gas emits less carbon dioxide than the gasoline and diesel powered units; The Way Forward Balancing Economic Development and Environmental Conservation  An and active operational the Ministerial Committee on Elaboration of a Strategy for Carbon Reduction in Trinidad and Tobago has been established to the provide oversight for As discussed below, Trinidad and Tobago has made substantial progress as it relates to legislative and policy reforms associated with environmental the sustainability relevant implementation of many as well as 160 exist challenges projects and programmes.
However, there which Government is committed to resolving of through comprehensive coordinated strategies.

development and the in The continuation of the expansion of the energy sector while ensuring a reduction the country‘s carbon footprint has been one such challenge.

To this end, the Energy Efficiency Policy has been developed to ensure there is a balance of both economic development and conservation.
Further, Trinidad and Tobago joined the Low-Emission Capacity Building Programme154 to support the on-going efforts in developing a framework for Low Emission Development.

environmental to There remains great concern with respect to the issue of enforcement of national the legislation relating dumping of toxic industrial waste, undesirable agricultural practices and lead pollution.

As such, Government is committed the enforcement mechanism to address these issues.
strengthening to The issues of poor land practices, pollution as well as misuse of water as a result of a growing population, and industrial activities and increased change climate threats due variability would be addressed through to 154 The Low Emission Capacity Building Programme is larger Green, Low-Emission Climate part of the Resilient Development Strategy of the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP).

the implementation of the National Integrated Water Resources Policy.
This Policy framework would facilitate proper watershed management and protection of the environment.

the respect With coastal to environment, there is an Inter-coastal Zone Management Committee which has been established to develop a zone management policy coastal framework, strategy and action plan for Trinidad and Tobago.
In addition, the National Spatial Development Strategy 2013-2023 for Trinidad and Tobago is envisioned to articulate a more strategic approach to the integration of national socio- economic and spatial planning towards the sustainable development of the country.

As the highest level of spatial planning, the NSDS will provide the broad policy agenda for the country over the next 20 years.
Moving towards Environmental Sustainability is critical Protecting and conserving the natural resources to advancing economic development and improving the quality of life of our citizens.
The legislative and policy reform measures essential to this transformation are: Legislative Review  Enactment subsidiary legislation the Environmental Management Act to address noise and water pollution; under of 161  legislation of new Introduce dealing with industrial pollution, waste management;  Finalisation of and approval for air pollution legislation; and National  Enactment of the 2013 Planning and Facilitation of Development Spatial Bill Development which underscores preservation of the integral as environment component of the development planning process; Strategy an  Operationalization of the National Environmental Fund (Green Fund) grant facility in order to fund community environmental projects remediation, focused reforestation and conservation of the environment; on  Passing of the Forestry, Protected Areas and Wildlife Conservation Bill which has been disseminated for public comment; and  Amendment of the Certificates of Environmental Clearance Designated Activities) Order 2001 to include all quarries and the approval of a Quarry Policy for Trinidad and Tobago.
policies Policy Reform to Several have environmental already been developed and include the: sustainability relating  Climate Change Policy along with a Carbon Reduction Strategy, Renewable Energy Policy and Energy Efficiency Policy;  National Forest Policy along with  National the Protected Areas Policy and the National Wildlife Policy which involve the establishment of a Protected Areas and Forest Management Authority; Integrated Water Resources Policy to chart a new direction for improving the quality of and equity in accessing water and improved sanitation, as well as promoting water conservation and optimal use of the nation's resources; and Integrated Solid Waste/Resource Management Policy to facilitate the socio-cultural, integration economic environmental waste objectives, and minimization, prevention awareness promote and facilitate and involvement, partnerships public, between private, community stakeholders.
and pursue and of  In addition to the policies listed above, the National Energy Policy Green Paper is currently being finalized.

of the through The impact of the legislative agenda and policy environment in respect of environmental sustainability can only be successful felt appropriate implementation institutional systems, projects and programmes.
The numerous initiatives for being undertaken or planned implementation speak to Government‘s commitment to ensure that Trinidad and Tobago plays its role in preserving the environment.
In addition to the initiatives discussed earlier to mitigate 162 climate change concerns, some of the other projects and programmes related to the achievement of this Goal include: in Schools  Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency and Communities Project (pilot) involves training and installation of solar distillation units in 25 selected schools, of photovoltaic exterior lighting in 15 Community Centres; installation and to build  National Energy Communication public Campaign awareness and promote energy efficiency;  Establishment a Regional of Renewable Energy Research Centre which in being is collaboration with the United States Department of Energy; done  Analysis of Waste to Energy Potential in Trinidad and Tobago which is part of the an IADB- assisted Energy Sustainable Programme;  Reforestation Programme seeks to involve more NGOs and community undertaking currently groups reforestation conservation and efforts with the aim of replanting 400 hectares of forest each year for ten years;  Public Awareness Programmes to sensitize and educate the public on environmental and appropriate responses; issues  Integration of Environmental Studies in the School Curricula;  Marine Fisheries Research Project seeks to foster better conservation of fish stocks by enabling data coastal studies, collection on pelagic fish stocks, gillnet zone management and the upgrade of information management systems;  Development of a Wastewater Infrastructure Improvement Programme aims to improve the in environmental Trinidad and Tobago by reducing the uncontrolled discharge of the untreated wastewater environment; and conditions into  Water and Wastewater Master Plan to improve the water supply to the population including supplying a 24/7 water supply to all customer households by 2015. and Tobago Trinidad remains committed to satisfying the demands of economic development and improving the quality of life of citizens while ensuring environment sustainability.
163 164 Develop a Global Partnership for Development GOAL 8 TARGETS Develop further an open, rule-based, predictable, non-discriminatory trading and financial system INDICATORS Some of the indicators listed below are monitored separately for the least developed countries (LDCs), Africa, landlocked developing countries and small island developing States.
(Includes a commitment to good governance, development and poverty reduction – both nationally and internationally) Address the special needs of the least developed countries (Includes: tariff and quota free access for the least developed countries' exports; enhanced programme of debt relief for heavily indebted poor countries (HIPC) and cancellation of official bilateral debt; and more generous ODA for countries committed to poverty reduction) Address the special needs of landlocked developing countries and small island developing States (through the Programme of Action for the Sustainable Development of Small Island Developing States and the outcome of the twenty-second special session of the General Assembly) Official development assistance (ODA) Net ODA, total and to the least developed countries, as percentage of OECD/DAC donors’ gross national income Proportion of total bilateral, sector- allocable ODA of OECD/DAC donors to basic social services (basic education, primary health care, nutrition, safe water and sanitation) Proportion of bilateral official development assistance of OECD/DAC donors that is untied ODA received in landlocked developing countries as a proportion of their gross national incomes ODA received in small island developing States as a proportion of their gross national incomes Market access Proportion of total developed country imports (by value and excluding arms) from developing countries and least developed countries, admitted free of duty Average tariffs imposed by developed
 countries on agricultural products and textiles and clothing from developing countries 165 TARGETS INDICATORS Deal comprehensively with the debt problems of developing countries through national and international measures in order to make debt sustainable in the long term Agricultural support estimate for OECD countries as a percentage of their gross domestic product Proportion of ODA provided to help build trade capacity Debt sustainability Total number of countries that have reached their HIPC decision points and number that have reached their HIPC completion points (cumulative) Debt relief committed under HIPC and MDRI Initiatives Debt service as a percentage of exports of goods and services Proportion of population with access to affordable essential drugs on a sustainable basis Fixed telephone lines per 100 inhabitants Mobile cellular subscriptions per 100 inhabitants Internet users per 100 inhabitants In cooperation with pharmaceutical companies, provide access to affordable essential drugs in developing countries In cooperation with the private sector, make available the benefits of new technologies, especially information and communications 166 GOAL 8 Develop a Global Partnership for Development the pursuit of the national development agenda, namely promoting sustainable development, citizen peace security.
and The pillars of this country‘s foreign policy are: (i) consistent and effective relationship with the United States of America; (ii) closer cooperation and collaboration with Latin America; (iii) a the resurgent European Union; and (iv) a new discovery in our relationship with Africa and Asia.

relationship with the Trinidad continued and Tobago‘s economic prosperity is also linked to regional and international partnerships.
In recognition of the growing influence of Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa as emerging economies increasingly global impacting economic and trade arena as evidenced by their membership of the Group of Twenty, the diplomatic presence in these countries will be strengthened.

Trinidad and Tobago has sought to global build partnerships for trade and development by and the competence of institutions involved in trade and foreign policy negotiations.
In addition, partnerships will continue to be sought in emerging markets to encourage the flow of ideas, skills and technology for the benefit of our people.
strengthen improving capacity new and International Economic Relations is an Trade economic growth important driver of Island for Small 167 Introduction The Foreign Policy Framework flows, cultural financial activities The process of globalisation and liberalisation has not only integrated information trade, networks, and technologies, but has made countries interdependent that conflicts or so crises, even in remote destinations, have direct consequences for all nations.
At the same time, the global agenda for sustainable development is far from being achieved.

It is in this regard the primary function of Trinidad and Tobago‘s Foreign Policy has been that Developing States and the Government of Trinidad and Tobago is also cognizant of the key role that trade policy has and continues to play in diversifying the export base; increasing global trade share; and effectively integrating the economy into the global trading system.
Trinidad and Tobago‘s Trade Policy and Strategy 2013-2017 will ensure the benefits of international trade contribute to the country‘s socio-economic development.

This will be achieved by expanding and diversifying production, exports (goods and services) and markets.

An Inter- Ministerial Committee been established comprising representatives from various key ministries to oversee the implementation of the policy and an National Export Strategy will be also be developed to complement this Trade Policy.
has Promoting Multilateralism and Regional Integration Trinidad and Tobago also commits itself to improving multilateralism in areas where it has the expertise and will work collectively with others to promote sustainable and effective partnerships for development.
Over the medium term, the foreign policy agenda, among other strategies, seeks to maintain, develop and enhance relations with strategic countries at the bilateral, regional and multilateral levels and to participate actively in the multilateral arena, especially within the United Nations system.

Especially within the like UN System, small countries find the Trinidad and Tobago will to influence strategic alliances global leverage developments.
This entails the forging of to address common issues and to anticipate future situations.

Our commitment will, therefore, continue to be facilitated through relations with partners in CARICOM, the Association of Caribbean States, the Organisation of American States, the United Nations, multilateral financial institutions, and the signing of various bilateral and multilateral agreements.
of in greater facilitation There is the acknowledgement by the Association of Caribbean States of the initiative of the Trinidad and Tobago Ministry of Foreign Affairs to promote economic the advancement Caribbean region through the creation of a structured Convergence process.
The objectives of this process are to: allow the movement of capital and services; of promote mechanisms to protect investments integrate capital within the region; to infrastructure markets; develop improve logistics and explore with international financial institutions the reorientation of their policies in order to support the less developed countries with the international economy; and maintain macroeconomic stability.
establishment regard shifts the in to This is essentially the Caribbean Sea Convergence model being advanced by the Minister of Foreign Affairs where the new perception of convergence is ‗a new economic space‘ where there is the partnership not just across 168 the Caribbean Sea space, but also between the public and the private sectors.

It is the forging of a right partnership to goals of production achieve integration, and competitiveness distribution.
This country believes that creating a new economy of the is a politics-driven Caribbean Sea process partnership approach.

requiring a regional furthering In integration, Trinidad and Tobago has noted that it is not economical for Member States of the Caribbean Community to have diplomatic missions in every country and, therefore, it is prudent for the to have shared diplomatic region spaces.
It is has been suggested by this Country that CARICOM States, as small nations, can partner with each other thereby saving costs and at the same time promoting our own countries whilst promoting the region as a whole through the establishment of CARICOM Desks.

In this way, the entire region can be represented in a particular capital where such representation is limited.
the forefront on Trinidad and Tobago has also been in the deliberations the surrounding post-2015 Development Agenda and played a key in building consensus at the role regional and inter-regional preparatory meetings for the Third International Island Conference Development States scheduled to take place in Samoa in September, 2014.
Trinidad and Tobago is a member of the United Nations Open Working Group on Small on involvement Island States Sustainable Development Goals and made statements on behalf of the CARICOM.

Our in the sustainable development debate also for the efforts of the see support Alliance of Small in bringing to the international stage the wide range of issues affecting these countries.
and collaboration is continuing within the meetings of the Global Preparatory Committee 2014 SIDS Conference and in the Commonwealth Biennial Small States Conference.
engagement This the for Target: Develop further an open, rule-based, non- discriminatory trading and financial system predictable, for and have made The twin forces of globalisation and trade liberalisation have significantly changed the way business is it conducted increasingly small complex economies to grow and develop in the rapidly intensifying competitive global environment.
Creating new trade agreements and maintaining existing ones are vital components for the trade and economic facilitation of growth.

Trinidad and Tobago was instrumental in the adoption by the member states of the United Nations of the Small Arms Trade Treaty.

This is an imperative for creating an ideal, safe and secure business environment to attract foreign investment.

169 In fact, the establishment of regional trading blocs has become the new paradigm in the international trading arena.
To this end, Trinidad and Tobago, as part of CARICOM, has signed bilateral trade agreements with the following countries:  Colombia;  Costa Rica;  Cuba;  Venezuela; and  The Dominican Republic.

Further, Trinidad and Tobago, as a member of CARICOM, signed an Economic Partnership Agreement (EPA) with the European Union in October 2008, to facilitate, inter alia, Trade in Services, and is in the process of negotiating the trade agreement.
CARICOM-Canada This EPA enables Trinidad and Tobago manufacturers‘ significant leverage in the European Union market, whereby, market access will be granted to 27 member states within the Union.

of objectives In an effort to fulfill Government‘s policy expanding South/South dialogue and greater engagement of our Latin American partners, Trinidad and Tobago signed a Partial Scope Agreement with Panama in June, 2011 which came into effect in 2013.
Having ratified this Agreement, Trinidad and Tobago‘s manufacturers are now able to benefit from reduced tariffs and greater market access for products such as aerated beverages, bitumen, asphalt, tiles, aromatic lubricants, blocks, bitters, agricultural products, and apparel.

Chapters on services and investment have been included in the Agreement and will be expanded in the near future.

In addition, Trinidad and Tobago is currently negotiating a Partial Scope The Agreement with Guatemala.
successful completion of negotiations for this Agreement will allow Trinidad and Tobago to obtain greater preferential access with the removal of custom duties into the Guatemala market on products, such as canned chicken sausage, peanut butter, sauce, groundnuts, pepper lubricating grease, clay tiles, building bricks, co-axial cable, automatic circuit breakers and steel band instruments.
Trinidad and Tobago has also signed Bilateral Investment Treaties (BIT's) with the following countries:  Canada;  Cuba;  France;  Switzerland;  China;  Spain;  Germany;  India;  Korea;  Mexico;  United Kingdom; and  The United States of America.

the In relation to the financial system, Financial Sector under Assessment (FSAP), recommendations for further enhancing supervisory the Programme regulatory and 170 environment were outlined by the International Monetary Fund.
Target: Official Development Assistance legislative With these recommendations in mind, regulatory the architecture governing the financial system were improved through the: and  Passage It of in the and requires financial Financial Institutions Act (FIA), 2008 which provides for consolidated supervision information and sharing between the Central Bank and other authorities foreign) (both domestic sector involved supervision.
the mandatory application by all licensees, both on an individual and consolidated basis, of capital adequacy requirements as well as limits on large exposure and connected lending.
It also requires the issuance of new or updated corporate on guidelines governance, impaired assets and consolidated prudential reporting; and  Establishment of the Financial Intelligence Unit (FIU) under the FIU Act of 2009 and the renewal of Obligations the Regulations in 2010 served to strengthen the framework for Anti- money Laundering and Counter Terrorism Financing.
Financial TABLE 8.1 Grant Resources Allocated To Trinidad and Tobago From 1975 Conventional/ Duration Value Focal Areas EDF Lome I/4th EDF Lome II/5th EDF 1975 - 1980 1980 - 1985 € Mn 10.3 10.5 Lome III/6th EDF 1986 - 1991 15.0 Lome IV/7th EDF 1991 - 1995 18.1 Lome bis/8th EDF 1997 - 2003 14.7 Cotonou/9th EDF 2003 – 2007 17.9 10th EDF 2008 - 2013 25.9* Agriculture, Human Resources, Tourism Road Infrastructur e, Rural Development , Private Sector Development Economic Diversificatio n, Poverty Alleviation Tertiary Education, Health (HIV/AIDS) Economic Transition, Good and Effective Governance Source: Ministry of Planning and Sustainable Development *indicative 171 European Union Trinidad and Tobago‘s main bilateral Organisation Co- operation and Development (OECD) Donor is the European Union (EU).
Economic for the 1974 between The EU has provided grant funds to the Government of Trinidad and Tobago Lomé since under the Conventions and now under Each Agreement.

Cotonou Convention/Agreement is for a 20-year period European Commission and the Member States of the African, Caribbean and Pacific Countries (ACP).

Funding is disbursed in 5 year cycles under the European Development Fund (EDF).

Table 8.1 above summarizes the grant resources allocated to Trinidad and Tobago since 1975 to present.
the The EU has also provided support to the Trinidad and Tobago under Accompanying Measures for Sugar Protocol (AMSP) countries in the sum of £43.289 million for the period 2007- 2010.

Inter-American Development Bank the Trinidad and Tobago is also a member Inter-American Development of Bank and has benefited from a development partnership with the Bank since 1968.

The Bank is currently the largest single source of external funding country‘s Development for Programme.
Specific areas of support from the IADB are specified within the framework of Trinidad and Tobago‘s Country Strategy.

As at December 31, this 2013, the Bank has given grant funding in the amount of approximately US$52.6 million.

Since 1995, Official Development Assistance (ODA) received by Trinidad and Tobago has been less than one percent of Gross National Income (GNI).

This was largely due to favourable economic conditions experienced by the country arising out of buoyant energy prices period.
Consequently, in January, 2008, Trinidad and Tobago graduated to net- contributor country status within the UNDP system.
Also, in accordance with OECD/DAC rules, Trinidad and Tobago list of ODA graduated recipients in 2011. during from this the TABLE 8.2 ODA received by Trinidad and Tobago/GNI YEAR 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 ODA received in Small Island Developing States as a proportion of GNI, % 0.51 0.31 0.62 0.24 0.41 -0.02 -0.02 -0.10 -0.03 -0.02 -0.01 0.07 0.1 0.05 0.03 0.02 Source: OECD 172 Assistance to help build trade capacity and Tobago‘s Trinidad relatively favourable economic position in the years prior to the global economic downturn has rendered the country The minimal ineligible amount of ODA in building trade capacity was generally in the form of technical assistance which has been difficult to cost (see Table 8.2 above).
flows utilised for ODA.

Such assistance has been provided mainly by the World Trade Organisation (WTO), the Inter-American Development Bank and the OECD via the Hub and Spokes Project which helped to build capacity in trade policy formulation, negotiation and implementation.

With assistance from the IADB, the implemented a Trade Government Sector Support Programme (TSSP) in 2003.
TSSP loan funding and technical assistance were aimed at improving the country‘s trade performance as well as to stimulate and enhance business and investment.

international Under the TSSP, the Public Service Change and Transformation Plan and the Strategic ICT Plan were completed in 2012.
Other activities in 2012 include the commencement of the EPA Technology Communication the Strategy, Curriculum Development Study – International Professional Trade Programme and the continuation of the consultancy for the implementation of implementation and of the Single Electronic Window for Trade and Business Facilitation.

The TSSP ended in 2012.


Target: Address the special needs of least developed countries its for independence in 1962, Since and Tobago has been Trinidad committed to regional integration and engaging the in partnership development of the other members of This the Caribbean Community.

approach emerged from an early recognition that Caribbean countries are open and vulnerable economies and subject to internal and external shocks.
The members the Caribbean of Community are Antigua and Barbuda, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Dominica, Haiti, Jamaica, Grenada, Guyana, Montserrat, St. Lucia, Suriname, St. Kitts and Nevis, St. Vincent and the Grenadines, and Trinidad and Tobago.
development the Caribbean The objectives of Community are to improve standards of living and work; the full employment of labour and other factors of production; accelerated, coordinated and sustained economic and convergence; expansion of trade and economic relations with third States; international enhanced competitiveness; for increased production and productivity; achievement of a greater measure of economic leverage; effectiveness of Member States in dealing with third States, groups of States and entities of organization levels of 173 any description; and the enhanced coordination of Member States‘ foreign and foreign economic policies and enhanced functional cooperation.
Over time, the type of assistance provided by Trinidad and Tobago has been of a financial and non-financial nature and has supported countries in times of natural disasters/hurricane, severe flooding, fiscal support, capacity building and debt relief.

Special Development Fund to Since 1970, the country has been a major contributor the Special Development Fund (SDF) administered by the Caribbean Development Bank (CDB).
The SDF is a key element in the aid architecture for the Caribbean and the role and operations of the CDB for the benefit of the Borrowing Member States.

for issues of addressing deep-seated poverty, vulnerability and human development in the countdown to the Millennium Goals timeframe of 2015.

Development instrument is an It debtors as illustrated below in Table 8.3.
The majority of the debt owed to Trinidad and Tobago was incurred the CARICOM Multilateral under Clearing Facility, which is a scheme that was established to facilitate the settlement on a multilateral basis of payments of eligible transactions.

It should be noted Trinidad and Tobago provided this debt relief during a period of severe hardship as the country had entered into an adjustment programme that was supported by an International Monetary Fund Standby Arrangement (1987).
TABLE 8.3 Debt Relief Provided by Trinidad and Tobago YEAR Debt Relief (US$M) 1988 53.00 1996 358.20 Notes Rescheduling of accumulated debts of Us$452.5 million and write off of US$ 53.0 million.

Debt stock write off was equivalent to 6.2 percent of T&T‘s GDP in 1997.

As a result of the write off, the total debt owed to T&T declined to US$ 176.9 million.
The amount written off was T&T share under the CARICOM Multilateral Clearing Facility (CMCF) T&T‘s share of debt relief as member of the Inter- American Development Bank (IADB) under the Heavily Indebted Poor Countries (HIPC) Initiative.

At the end of 2012, the agreed contribution of Trinidad and Tobago to the SDF was put at US$35.8 million.
2001 9.50 Heavily Indebted Poor Countries (HIPC) Initiative 2003 1.45 A major initiative of Trinidad and Tobago was the significant debt relief that it provided through bilateral and multilateral fora such as the Paris Club.

Specifically, this country provided approximately US$423.15 million to its 423.15 Source: Central Bank of Trinidad and Tobago 174 Caribbean Development Fund Agreement establishing Trinidad and Tobago is a signatory to the the CARICOM Development Fund (CDF).
The CDF was established in 2008 for the purpose of providing financial or technical assistance to disadvantage countries, regions and sectors in CARICOM.

Ultimately the Fund is to contribute to the sustainable economic development and social progress of CARICOM Member States, individually and jointly.

As at December 31, 2012, the total assessed contribution to the CDF was US$100 million of which US$91.8 million has been received.
Trinidad and Tobago made its full of US$46.7 million contribution (US$9.66 million came the representing Petroleum approximately 51 percent of the total contribution received.

Fund), from Caribbean Trade Support Programme to this addition In country‘s contribution to regional initiatives to assist least developed countries in the CARICOM region, there was also the CARICOM Trade Support Programme.
The CTSP was established to alleviate the adverse impact of recessionary condition of States were CARICOM Member experiencing and to redress the intra- regional imbalance between Trinidad its partners by and Tobago and improve building efficiencies export capabilities.

capacity and to expand economies which interest countries loans enterprises other The CTSP, which ran from 2003-2009, to provided in borrowers/approved than CARICOM Trinidad and Tobago.
The loans were granted on a technical assistance basis, to enable the firms to procure the services of regional consultants to undertake diagnostic appraisals of their business operations and make recommendations on measures to be taken to achieve the objectives of their business development objectives.

At the close of the Programme in 2009, total loan disbursed was US$239,050.
Target: Address the special needs of landlocked developing countries and Small Island Developing States As the global debate on the post 2015 development agenda and the Third International Conference on Small Island Developing States commences, Trinidad and Tobago broadly agrees that an integrated development agenda that examines the outcomes of the MDGs the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) must be a priority.
The special needs of small island development must also be reconciled keeping in view at all times that countries are at different stages of development global and development initiatives must not be punitive but developmental.

incorporates that and Trinidad and Tobago participated Inter-regional the actively Preparatory Meeting for the 2014 SIDS in 175 Conference held in Barbados during August 26-28, 2013.

This country participated in discussions at both the Ministerial and the expert level.
laid by to address Implementation for in order This country‘s delegation made the point that innovative solutions and new the approaches which build on foundations the Barbados Programme of Action and its Mauritius are Strategy required the sustainable development challenges facing SIDS.
We also underscored the similarities in the issues facing the countries of the three SIDS regions related to, inter alia, food security, energy fisheries, development, change, biodiversity, waste management and disaster risk reduction.

The country made a strong call for a focus on the development of the human imagination and innovative collaborative approaches through a social compact in support of the sustainable development of SIDS.
alternative climate and Tobago was also Trinidad instrumental in obtaining the support of fellow Heads of delegations for an agreement on the prioritization of the following issues for SIDS in the context of the draft outcome document:  Climate change;  Sustainable energy, including the development of alternative sources of energy;  Sustainable Agriculture for Food Security;  Sustainable Tourism;  Integrated Water Resources Management;  Ocean sustainable resources;  Resilience Governance with of marine use and Disaster Risk Management; and  Effective management, prevention and control of non-communicable diseases.
It should be noted, that with the exception of sustainable tourism, these priorities are already well-defined in the context of the draft outcome document.

Trinidad and Tobago will seek to ensure that issues of high importance are addressed in a balanced manner throughout the document, including the issues of youth, women and ageing as institutional arrangements at the United Nations level for addressing the issue of SIDS.
well the as Development In the deliberations of the UN General Assembly Open Working Group on Goals, Sustainable Trinidad and Tobago spoke on behalf of CARICOM at the Fifth, Sixth and Seventh Sessions on thematic areas of Energy, Human Rights and Climate Change which took place in November and December, 2013 and January, 2014, respectively, 176 Target: Deal comprehensively with the Debt problems through national and international measures to make it sustainable in the long term The debt management objectives of Trinidad and Tobago are to:  Minimize over the long-term the cost of meeting its financing needs, while containing its exposure to risk;  Facilitate the development of a well-functioning domestic capital market, with the creation and maintenance of local interest-rate yield curve; and is consistent with  Ensure that debt management policy the objectives of monetary policy, fiscal policy and other macroeconomic policies.
establishment The Debt Management Strategy for the medium-term will continue to focus on the risk the management development of an efficient market for government securities.

The strategy will involve, inter alia: framework and of a offers  Achievement of an optimal level of fiscal that debt sustainability, external sustainability and solvency in the short-, medium- and long-term; and  Careful monitoring of and contingent management liabilities.
Trinidad and Tobago‘s Gross Public Debt averaged 37 percent of GDP over the period 2003-2011.

In 2012, the total public debt was 46.0 percent of GDP and by 2013, the figure was 48.6 percent.

The average projected for the medium-term 2014-2018 is estimated at 55 percent.

The projected Debt to GDP ratio for the next five years is still within the Reinhart and Rogoff debt threshold of 30 percent to 60 percent for the country to still be classified as moderate risk.
The Government is mindful that keeping the public sector debt at sustainable levels is a key policy measure for the medium-term.

In this regard, assistance was sought from the Commonwealth Secretariat in 2012 towards effective the debt management, implementation of the Commonwealth Secretariat Recording Debt Management System as the primary software to underpin the analytical work of the Ministry of Finance and the Economy and the Central Bank of Trinidad and Tobago in relation to the Public Debt.
through tool is an integrated The Debt Recording Management for System recording, monitoring, analysing and reporting public debt which is constantly evolving to match the ways in which debt management is reshaping itself.
To date, it is in operation in 59 countries both within and outside the Commonwealth and this system will allow Trinidad and Tobago to minimize risks within its debt portfolio and achieve savings through lower debt servicing payments while helping the 177 relevant government agencies (Ministry of Finance and the Economy and Central Bank) to bring the debt burden to manageable levels by the analysis of the and of debt impact restructuring.
relief Indicator: Debt Service as a Percentage of Exports of Goods and Services Over the last 5 years, debt service as a percentage of exports has been relatively low and stable ranging approximately between 1 - 4.2 percent.

In 2009, the ratio was 4.2 percent which highest percentage increase over the period from 2007-2012 (Chart 8.1).
represented the CHART 8.1 Debt Service as a Percentage of Exports of Goods and Services (1998 - 2012) E G A T N E C R E P 12 10 YEAR Debt Service Ratio (%) Source: Trinidad and Tobago's 2012 IMF Article IV Reports In cooperation with Target: pharmaceutical companies, provide access to affordable essential drugs in developing countries Trinidad and Tobago, while not in receipt of foreign assistance in the provision of essential drugs to its national population, does have a domestic programme to achieve such an objective.
The Chronic Disease Assistance Programme, established in free 2003, provides citizens with prescription other drugs pharmaceutical items to combat the following health conditions: and  Diabetes;  Asthma‘  Cardiac Diseases;  Arthritis;  Glaucoma;  Mental Depression;  High Blood Pressure;  Benign Prostatic (Enlarged Prostate); Hyperplasia  Epilepsy;  Hypercholesterolemia;  Parkinson‘s diseases; and  Thyroid diseases.
There are over 250 pharmacies throughout the country that provide medications through CDAP and 47 drugs are available.

New prescription drugs may be added to the list from time to time.

The average annual cost of the Programme is US$62 million.

There has been general satisfaction, in some cases 88 percent, with the Programme 178 the by Physicians and Patients.
stakeholders: Pharmacies, Target: In cooperation with the private sector, make available the technologies, benefits especially and communications information of new One of Trinidad and Tobago‘s major objectives is to be an interconnected, technologically advanced society with modern information and communication systems driving innovation, growth and Telecommunication social services Information Communication Technologies (ICTs) are critical elements in driving this objective, and our country is well poised for such.
progress.

and In 2004, the Telecommunications Act of Trinidad and Tobago was proclaimed and this opened the telecommunications sector to competition.

Subsequently, in 2006, a major new mobile provider entered the market and a fixed-term licence was granted to another provider for fixed broadband and cable services.

In cellular of subscriptions and internet users, there has been significantly noted growth.
The number of internet users increased steadily from 33 users per 100 persons in 2007 to approximately 68 users per 100 persons in 2011.155 cases both the For the year ending December, 2012, the number of subscriptions within the 155 Ministry of Public Administration.

and Internet fixed voice, mobile, voice, fixed Internet, subscription mobile totalled television market segments This approximately represents an increase of 14.6 percent or 384.5 thousand more subscriptions than 2011.
Chart 8.2 below illustrates total industry subscriptions for the period 2008-2012.

3.0 million.

CHART 8.2 Market Share of Total Subscriptions for the period 2008-2012 Source: Telecommunications Authority of Trinidad and Tobago increased, while The penetration rate is defined as the number of subscriptions per 100 inhabitants.

The penetration rates for the Internet, Mobile and subscription TV markets the penetration rate for fixed voice for the to decline.
2012 period continued Mobile services, with a rate of 142.2, the highest continued record the penetration rate.

second highest with a penetration rate of 48.8 whilst fixed telephony and Subscription television service followed with penetration rates of 21.6 and 16.9, respectively (Chart 8.3).

Internet was to 179 CHART 8.3 Penetration Rate of Subscriptions from 2008-2012 The Government has completed a National ICT Plan 2014-2018 (SmarTT).
This plan builds on its predecessor fastforward, the 2003-2008 National ICT Plan.

SmarTT builds on the foundation laid by fastforward and is the first instalment of a larger ICT roadmap.
Other historical elements on the journey of developing our ICT sector include: Source: Telecommunications Authority of Trinidad and Tobago Development of ICT can prove to be an important prerequisite to promote social and economic transformation that enables sustainable economic growth and human development and, as such, the Government has recognized the growing importance and potential of ICTs for this country.
In the Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2014, ICT is identified as Pillar 4 - Connecting T&T and building the new economy - of the seven interconnected pillars for sustainable development.

It is also designated as one of the seven business clusters emerging out of the Action Agenda for the Diversification Conference held in 2012.

The notion of an ICT cluster creates a nuanced space sector for collaboration to develop the sector to its maximum potential.
Private Public and  ttconnect established in 2005;  iGovTT established in 2009;  e-Connect Learn and (eCAL) established in 2010; and  TTBizlink established in 2011 The legislative framework for our ICT sector includes the following;  Data Protection regulations; Cybercrime Bill; Act and  Cybercrime Security Agency Bill; Electronic Transfer of Funds Crime (Amdt.)

Act;  Electronic Evidence Bill; and  Exchequer and Audit (Amdt.)

Bill.
Bill.

Programme To continue fostering an ICT sensitive and cyber ready environment in our the Commonwealth country, under Connect and Commonwealth Cybercrime Initiative, Trinidad and Tobago has secured technical assistance.

This will facilitate for a number of capacity building legal projects within the fraternity and law enforcement, as well as country assessment.

judiciary, conduct an in of 180 of the exploration Having a supportive environment has allowed ICTs productive potential.
ICT has a certain duality which allows it to act as an enabler and as a sector.

Outside of ICT cluster development and the provision of enabling platforms for the other to clusters, mainstream ICT as thriving sector in national development include a Global Services Programme.

This is based on an for promoting loan exports and investment in the global IT- enabled services sector in Trinidad and Tobago and is a promising step towards developing our country‘s ICT sector.
investment additional strategies The Way Forward Trinidad and Tobago‘s development strategy underscores the importance of meaningful and decisive engagement with the community of nations and strategic positioning at the regional, hemispheric and wider global levels.

To this end, Government is committed to implementing initiatives to achieve this goal.

Strengthening the trade and financial system has been high on the national agenda.
However, the main challenge in improving the system lengthy consultation process in the development of updated legislation.

Government is committed to developing strategies that will continue to promote involvement of all stakeholders in amending legislation.

is a sized Trinidad and Tobago‘s economy features significant non-energy exports and employment generated by micro, small and medium enterprises.
Challenges in such an economy lie in including these enterprises in global partnerships and in increasing their integration into new technologies and ICT.

Government is, therefore, giving priority to moving the economy up the value improving competitiveness and expanding both local and foreign investment through global alliances.
chain by 181 APPENDICES 182 APPENDIX I Reflecting on Key National Milestones and Their Influence on the Trinidad and Tobago’s Development Agenda Upon the adoption of the MDGs, Trinidad and Tobago, like many other countries, modified the goals, targets and indicators to suit the development needs of the country.

The modifications for Trinidad and Tobago relate to Goals 2 and 6 and are listed in the table below.
MODIFICATIONS TO MDGS – ADDITIONAL INDICATORS GOALS/ TARGETS INDICATORS GOAL2: ACHIEVE UNIVERSAL PRE-SCHOOL, PRIMARY, SECONDARY AND TERTIARY EDUCATION Target 2A: Ensure that, by 2015, children everywhere, boys and girls alike, will be able to complete a full course of pre-school, primary, secondary and tertiary level schooling NET ENROLMENT IN PRE-SCHOOL EDUCATION NET SECONDARY SCHOOL ATTENDANCE RATE TERTIARY EDUCATION PARTICIPATION RATE GOAL 6: COMBAT HIV/AIDS, DENGUE, DIABETES AND HYPERTENSION156 NEW HIV POSITIVE CASES AT PUBLIC HEALTH LOCATIONS Target 6A: Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the spread of HIV/AIDS NUMBER OF DEATH DUE TO AIDS Target 6B: Achieve, by 2010, universal access to treatment for HIV/AIDS for all those who need it INCIDENCE ASSOCIATED WITH DENGUE FEVER INCIDENCE OF DIABETES INCIDENCE OF HYPERTENSION DEATH RATES ASSOCIATED WITH DIABETES DEATH RATES ASSOCIATED WITH HYPERTENSION 156 Targets to be developed for selected indicators in this Goal 183 These adaptations were crucial inputs to the national development agenda as reflected in the Medium Term Policy Framework (MTPF) 2011-2014.
Of the five priority areas identified in the MTPF 2011-2014157 the following two areas were directly aligned with the MDGs:  Quality Healthcare Services and Hospitals (MDGs 4, 5 and 6);  Poverty Reduction and Human Capital Development (MDGs 1 and 2).
To drive the national development agenda, specific programmes, policies and legislative changes were adopted as highlighted in the table below: MDG Goal Goals 1 and 2 Goal 3 Key Projects/Programmes/Policies and Legislative Changes  Social Service Programme  Accelerated Housing Programme  Land for the Landless Policy  Squatter Settlements Regularization  Home Improvement and New Housing Subsidies  Skills Development Programme  Scholar and Advanced Training Programme  Seamless Education System Programme  Ratified the the Convention of Women all Against Elimination Discrimination (CEDAW) in 1990 on forms of  Passed the Counting Unremunerated Work Act in Parliament in 1996, thereby completing the ratification of the Equal Remuneration Convention the International Labour Organization (ILO).
 Supported the creation of a Convention on Domestic Workers which was adopted in June 2011. of Goals 4, 5 and 6  Health Sector Reform Programme (Training and Physical Investments) 157 The five national priorities were: Crime and Law and Order; Agriculture and Food Security; Healthcare Services and Hospitals; Economic Growth, Job Creation, Competitiveness and Innovation; Poverty Reduction and Human Capital Development.
184 MDG Goal Goal 7 Goal 8 Key Projects/Programmes/Policies and Legislative Changes  Special Programme for Chronic Diseases  Special Programme for HIV/AIDS  Establishment of Training Facilities for Nurses at El Dorado  Formulated a Revised Maternal and Child Health Policy  Developed and implemented Standard Operating Procedures for Obstetrics and Midwifery.
 Establishment of Green Fund  Fondes Amandes Hillside revegetation  National Tree Planting initiatives  Water and Wastewater Rehabilitation Programme  Establishment of a Solid Waste Management Policy  Established a Climate Change Policy  Green Communities Spaces Strategy  Trade Sector Reform Programme  Passage of the Financial Institutions Act (FIA), 2008  Establish of the Financial Intelligence Unit (FIU) under the FIU Act of 2009  Establishment of the Telecommunications Authority of Trinidad and Tobago  Establishment of a single electronic window (TTBizLink) Moreover, the MDGs were able to further influence the establishment of country specific targets to 2015, as identified in the MTPF 2011-2014.
These targets have facilitated the prioritization of development efforts and have accelerated the establishment of a system of managing for results through a National Performance Framework.158 The MDGs have also influenced the generation of data at the administrative (regional) level as exemplified in the Trinidad and Tobago Human Development Atlas (2012).

158 Some of the targets in the MTPF (2011-2014) were modified in the NPF (2012-2015).
185 In relation to partnership and coordination arrangements, Government has begun the consultative process towards the establishment of a Civil Society Board in order to incorporate the views of Civil Society in national development plans, including those socio-economic issues addressed in the MDGs.

An Economic Development Board and a Council for Competiveness were also established in order to guide economic growth and diversification using Public Private Partnership (PPPs) arrangements.
186 APPENDIX II Going Beyond 2015 and the Current Set of MDG Targets: Trinidad and Tobago’s official position regarding the Post 2015 development agenda is that there should be a single agenda.

This agenda should ensure that the Millennium Development Goals are considered within context of the Sustainable Development paradigm so that integration and congruence can be achieved.
To this end, the country articulated, after national consultations, ten thematic areas which are believed to have captured the development challenges and vulnerabilities of not only Trinidad and Tobago but also other Small Islanding Developing States (SIDS).

SIDS are inherently vulnerable to environmental changes due to their small size, remoteness, narrow resource and export base and vulnerability to external economic shocks.
This uniqueness must be considered when determining how progress towards development is to be measured and assessed.

Trinidad and Tobago proposes that these issues be addressed in the post-2015 development agenda.

The ten thematic areas identified are highlighted in the table below.

The first four have been recognized as priorities.

187 Priority Theme Area 1.

Poverty Reduction & Gender Equality: National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
Human Capital Development Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Outcome 1: Access to adequate and affordable housing; Outcome 2: Self Reliant and Sustainable Communities; Outcome 3: An Efficient and Effective Social System for the poor and vulnerable; Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2015; National Performance Framework (2012- 2015); Poverty reduction has been identified as a main priority for Trinidad and Tobago.
All citizens have a right to a decent standard of living and a life of poverty threatens social stability and the ability of citizens to fully in meaningful economic and participate social activities.

Strategies to address the issue include: identified Outcome 4: Elimination of gender based violence; Annual Report on Performance 2012.

Outcome 5: Reduce income inequality.

Indicator: Poverty Rate Target 1: 2 percent reduction per year from 2011 to 2015 in the.
Indicator: Poverty Gap Target: reduce from 4.6 percent to 3.5 percent by 2015 Indicator: Gini Coefficient Target: 0.39 to 0.21 by 2015  Empowering the poor through education, training and promoting entrepreneurship;  Strengthening social safety network systems.

188 Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)

2.
Food Security: Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Indicator: HDI Ranking Target: Increase by 15 points by 2015 Objective 1: Increase the production of food locally; Objective 2: Reduce the food import bill; Objective 3: Reduce inflation due to food prices; Objective 4: Create sustainable, long term productive employment in the agriculture sector; Objective 5: Build a culture of consuming local food as a first choice; Objective 6: Create high value added manufacturing of local goods.
Indicator: Food Inflation Rate Target: Reduce Inflation to 25 percent by 2015 Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2015; National Performance Framework (2012- 2015); Annual Report on Performance 2012; National Food Production Action Plan (2012-2015).

Food security is a sovereign right that all nations should enjoy.

All persons should have access to sufficient, safe and nutritious food.

Food security impacts on physical health, poverty eradication; environmental conservation and the trade balance.
Given the interdependency of countries through trade, this issue must be effectively addressed through the Post 2015 agenda.
Strategies to be used include:  Increasing agriculture production and improving distribution and access through modern technology and innovation;  Encouraging youth participation in the sector  Improvements to land management and 189 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)

tenure.
tenure.

Indicator: Percentage contribution of agriculture to the non-energy manufacturing GDP Target: Increase contribution of agriculture to GDP by 3 percent Indicator: Percentage employment in agriculture Target: Increase employment in agriculture by 5 percent Indicator: Food import Bill: Target: Reduce the Food import Bill to $3 billion.

3.
3.

Health & Well Being Outcome 1: Universal Access to Accredited and Sustainable Health Care Facilities across T&T Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2015; Outcome 2: Efficient and Quality Healthcare System Outcome 3: Reduced incidence and National Performance Framework (2012- 2015); is important The need to improve the quality of healthcare services and reduce the incidence of chronic to all countries, diseases especially in the developing world.
These issues country’s development through human capital loss and reduced productivity, indirectly while burdening public health expenditure.

through directly hinder a 190 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)

Annual Report on Performance 2012.

Consequently, this issue should be addressed on a global scale.
Advances made by developed nations could benefit citizens of less developed countries saving lives and improving their quality of life.

Strategies employed by Trinidad and Tobago will include:  Improvements to the management of the health sector;  Strengthening the policy and legislative   framework; Inculcating values such as a lifelong commitment to healthy lifestyles Increasing access services.
to quality health Prevalence of Non-Communicable Diseases Indicator: Mortality Rates of Chronic Non-Communicable Diseases (CNCDs) per 100,000 persons Target: Reduce by 20 percent by 2015 Indicator: Cancer Mortality Rate per 100,000 population Target: reduce by 20 percent by 2015 Indicator: HIV/AIDS Adult Prevalence Rate Target: Reduction of the Adult Prevalence Rate to 0.5 percent by 2015.

Indicator: Medical Professionals per 10,000 persons.

Target: 18 doctors per 10,000 population by 2015.


Indicator: Nursing Professionals per 191 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)

10,000 persons Target: 25 nurses per 10,000 persons by 2015 Indicator: Client Satisfaction Rate Target: 85 percent by 2015.

Indicator: Immunization Coverage Target: 95 percent by 2015.
Objective: Establish a National Performance Framework; Objective: Build a culture of Monitoring and Evaluation within Government.

National Performance Framework (2012- 2015); Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2015; 4.
Governance The Government of Trinidad and Tobago will pursue strategies as follows:  Establish a Results Based Management Framework for Government supported by a Monitoring and Evaluation System;  Utilize an Integrated Public Management core Government for Framework Ministries;  Increase public participation in Governance;  Promote accountability, transparency and responsiveness to citizens;  Promote consensus building and greater equity in the distribution of resources.
192 Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)

5.

Diversification, Growth Employment and Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2015; National Performance Framework (2012- 2015); Annual Report on Performance 2012.

Outcome 1: Economic Growth and Job Creation.

Outcome 2: Innovation, Entrepreneurship and Partnership.

Outcome 3: A Diversified Economy.


Indicator: Gross Domestic Product ($TT Million) Target: Increase by 2 percent to 2015 Indicator: Sector Contribution to Gross Domestic Product (GDP) Target: 3 percent increase by 2015 in Non- Petroleum Sector to GDP Indicator: Exports (US$ million) Targets: Increase by 2 percent Energy Sector Exports & 5 percent Non-Energy Sector Exports Traditional growth models have been dismantled and redefined by changing global trends.
Emphasis is now being placed on knowledge, innovation, enterprise and the adaptability of nations.

Human capital and the creative power of citizens are the new drivers of the competitive advantage of nations.

These elements are essential if SIDS are to effectively compete, survive and achieve sustainable development.

Therefore emphasizing the importance of the issue on the Post 2015 global agenda.

Trinidad and towards Tobago will continue diversification of to a knowledge based, innovation driven one.
Strategies will include: its economy, its path  Promoting new strategic sectors and and training skills education, entrepreneurship;  Creating a modern, efficient economic infrastructure base;  Strategically managing the business environment and international economic relations.

193 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
Indicator: Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) Target: US $ 1 billion by 2015 Indicator: Unemployment Rate Target: Reduce by 5 percent by 2015 Indicator: Global Competiveness Index Target: Improve score by 20 points by 2015.

Indicator: Global Innovation Index Target: Improve score by 10 points by 2015.

6.

Youth and Ageing: Youth Goals: Goal 1: To enable young men and women to initiate, lead and participate; National Youth Policy of Trinidad and Tobago (2012- 2017).
Global population trends have predicted an unprecedented level of aging in the world population.159 Many nations, including the Trinidad and Tobago must address 159 World Ageing Population, 1950-2050, United Nations.

194 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
National Policy on for Ageing Trinidad and Tobago (2007) Goal 2: To ensure that young people have access to adequate and appropriate programmes, resources and services to facilitate their widest possible participation, regardless of their geographic location, race, ethnicity, gender, level of disability and social, religious and economic standing; Goal 3: To develop a coordinated response and participation of all stakeholders, including Government, non-Government, private organisations and young persons, to ensure all youth related programmes are integrated and synchronized, while providing new and effective mechanism to build collaboration between all youth development stakeholders; Goal 4: To define and prioritize areas of specific action for youth empowerment in accordance with the overall policies of the Government of Trinidad and Tobago; Goal 5: To develop qualities of citizenship and pride in our national be the issue impact of this trend at the national level and addressed should so collaboratively on an international level.
Economically, an ageing population impacts and growth, investment labour markets, pensions, consumption, taxation and transfers.

intergenerational Socially, health and health care, family arrangements, composition housing and migration are also affected.

savings, living and The issues affecting youth are also global in nature.
Strategies will include:  Protecting their human rights,  Ensuring decent employment meaningful participation economic and and social  Providing adequate access to education on sexual and reproductive health.

195 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
identity, while sustaining and reinforcing the spirit of volunteerism among youths and recognising their contribution.
Ageing Objectives: Objective 1: To create an environment that will facilitate the meaningful participation and involvement of older persons in society; Objective 2: To ensure the provision of adequate and cost effective community- based services for older persons; Objective 3: To promote wellness, active and healthy ageing among older persons; Objective 4: To enhance the self-reliance and functional independence of older persons; Objective 5: To facilitate their continued participation in family life and the society: 196 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
Objective 6: To promote and preserve the dignity and independence of older persons; Objective 7: To encourage and promote education and public awareness on issues related to older persons and the ageing process; Objective 8: To encourage and promote greater collaboration among Government, the private sector, Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs), Community Based Organizations (CBOs), Faith Based Organizations (FBOs), and communities the provision of support services for the benefit of older persons.
Outcome 1: Create More Effective law Enforcement; Outcome 2: Reduce crime against property and person; Outcome 3: Increase the efficiency and effectiveness of the Judicial System.

7.

Human Security: Crime Law Order and and Medium Term Policy Framework 2011-2015; National Performance Framework (2012- 2015); The issue of human security is cross cutting in nature given its linkages to migration, crime and gender.
Moreover, human security is also a right that all global citizens should enjoy and as such, the issue is more apt to be addressed internationally.

Trinidad and Tobago has begun to address human security in the 197 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
Annual Report on Performance 2012. context of reducing crime and promoting currently law employed include and order.

Strategies  Containing the drug trade;  Improving national intelligence;  Reducing gang and gang related activity;  Reducing the recidivism rate.
Indicator: Crime Rate Target: 15 percent annually to 2015 Indicator: Recidivism rate Target: 10 percent annually to 2015 Indicator: Crime Solvency (Detection) Rate Target: Reduce to 25 percent by 2015 Indicator: Homicide Detection Rate Target: Reduce to 25 percent by 2015 Indicator: Time taken for cases from start to determination Target: Reduce time by 60 percent (approximately 4 years) by 2015.

8.
8.

Climate Change Adaptation: Objective 1: reducing or avoiding greenhouse gas emissions from all emitting sectors; Draft National Climate Change Policy; As a global issue with direct linkages to sustainable development, climate change 198 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
Objective 2: enhancing carbon sinks; Objective 3: conserving and building resilience of human and natural systems to adapt to the adverse impacts of climate change, including through capacity building and the application of cleaner and energy efficient technologies; Objective 4: protection of the natural environment and human health; Objective 5: enhanced agricultural production and food security.
for Working Sustainable in Development Trinidad and Tobago: Progress, Gaps and Opportunities for Action, June 2012. adaptation is guaranteed a place on the Post 2015 development agenda.

Climate change should be institutionalized in the context of SIDS for example, by allowing the companies and organisations of developed world, to attain carbon credits as part of their carbon emissions trading, for assisting similar sectors in SIDS.
A more effective mechanism for cross country and public private partnerships in addition to grants must also be established through this international dialogue global issue.

The Global Wind Energy Council serves as an example.
to address Objective 1160: To improve government capacity and structures for collecting and analyzing labour migration data; To promote and support research on labour migration issues, including the impact of emigration on countries of International Labour Office (ILO) Multilateral Framework on Labour Migration (2006) The lack of absorptive capacity of economies such as Trinidad and Tobago has resulted in the migration of skilled graduates seeking to capitalize lucrative opportunities in developed countries.
This 9.

Managed Migration: 160 No country objectives were formulated for this thematic area and as such the ILO guidelines for managed Migration were utilised.

199 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
origin, as well as the contribution of immigration to countries of destination; Objective 2: To ensure coherence between labour migration, employment and other national policies, in recognition of social and economic implications of labour migration; the wide is a common phenomena faced by SIDS.

Strategies to enable development for SIDS include:  Utilization of knowledge, skills and resources of the diaspora through international dialogue.
in an Objective 3: To implement policies that ensure that specific vulnerabilities faced by certain groups of migrant workers, irregular including workers situation are addressed; Objective 4: To ensure labour migration policies are gender-sensitive and address issues and problems that women face in the migration process; Objectives developed.

Indicators that and be to 10.


Harnessing Creativity and Imagination: This critical interconnecting priority focuses on achieving sustained socio- economic growth by adapting the use of innovation issues and challenges that affect the development of nations.

Further, it is quite apparent to solve the 200 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
the that industry than ever, in domestic and more rate of technological progress determines the ability of a country’s to penetrate new markets, develop new products and services that command high prices international markets.

The future prosperity of many nations therefore depend on its ability to generate new ideas, processes and solutions, and use innovation to convert and knowledge economic wealth, and provide answers to the most significant societal challenges.
Trinidad and Tobago is quite cognizant of global experiences, which shows that instances, countries with in many resource are not abundant natural necessarily that have achieved those sustainable economic progress.

social good into Trinidad and Tobago concerted effort is making a focused to design 201 Stated objectives, indicators, targets and timelines (where available) Source Documents Comments Priority Theme Area National/ Subnational Priorities (subthemesi dentified population groups, regions etc.)
strategies for driving innovation and has embarked on the process of innovation as the critical factor for achieving global economic and competitiveness the Initiatives sustainability.

development of a National Innovation Policy an and Innovation effective/formal National System.

establishing include 202 APPENDIX III TABLES SHOWING DATA FOR CHARTS IN THE REPORT TABLE FOR CHART 1.3 Poverty by Male and Female-headed Households CATEGORISATION GENDER No.
percent Male Female Total Male Female Total Relatively Poor Extremely Poor Total Poor 442 100 542 257 58 315 699 668 1,367 51.5 11.7 63.2 30.0 6.8 36.7 Source: CSO; 2008/2009 Household Budgetary Survey 100 100 TABLE FOR CHART 1.4 Poverty by Ethnicity CATEGORISATION Poverty Rate based on income (as percent of people living in poor households) Non-Poor Relatively Poor Extreme Poor African Indian Chinese 8,448 1,207 7,819 1,142 182 247 63 0 5 Total 9,837 9,208 68 18 0 0 18 ETHNIC GROUP Syrian/ Lebanese Caucasian Mixed Other 143 1 9 5191 752 19 1 223 1 Not Stated 27 10 0 TOTAL 21,728 3,113 667 153 6,166 21 37 25,508 Source: 2008/2009 Household Budgetary Survey TABLE FOR CHART 1.5 Growth Rate of GDP per Person Employed (1990-2011) YEAR Persons With Jobs 1990 (GDP @ Constant 1990 Prices) 2000 2011 381,700 503,400 596,100 GDP @ Constant (2000) Prices $16,134,400,000 GDP/Person Employed 42,269.85 $49,343,300,000 98,020.06 Growth Rate of GDP/Person Employed ( percent) -17.20 (compared to 1980) 56.88 $88,060,800,000 147,728.23 33.65 Source: Central Bank of Trinidad and Tobago & CSO 203 TABLE FOR CHART 1.6 Employment to Population Ratio (1990-2011) YEAR 1990 2000 2011 Male Labour Force Participation Rate ( percent) 74.3 75.3 72.3 Female Labour Force Participation Rate ( percent) 37.8 47.0 49.3 Employment-to-Population Ratio ( percent) 45.65 53.70 59.14 Source: CSO TABLE FOR CHART 1.7 Proportion of Own-Accounts and Contributing Family Workers in Total Employment, Both Sexes and Overall Unemployment Rate (1990-2011) YEAR
 1990 2000 2011 Proportion of Own-Account and Contributing Family Workers in Total Employment, Both Sexes ( percent) 22.69 18.45 17.36 Overall Unemployment Rate ( percent) 20.00 12.10 4.90 Source: CSO TABLE FOR CHART 2.1 Net Enrolment Ratio in Primary Education by Sex (1990 - 2009) ACADEMIC YEAR 1990 2000/2001 2001/2002 2005/2006 2007/2008 2008/2009 2009/2010 SEX Male Female 93.0 92.5 92.0 97.6 97.3 97.3 99.0 93.7 92.9 92.0 97.6 96.0 96.0 97.0 Source: Ministry of Education 204 TABLE FOR CHART 2.2 Proportion of
 Pupils Starting Grade I (First Year) who Reach Grade 7 (Standard 5) (1990 - 2009) ACADEMIC YEAR AT START OF GRADE 1 SEX Male Female 1990 1995 1998 2006 2007 2008 2009 Source: Ministry of Education 93.0 92.5 92.0 97.6 90.2 92.8 90.8 93.7 92.9 92.0 97.6 93.8 93.1 94.0 TABLE FOR CHART 2.3 Pupil/ Teacher Ratio at Primary and Secondary Levels (2000 - 2009) YEAR 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 Primary 23.10 21.33 17.19 18.82 18.22 17.93 17.72 17.34 17.44 17.95 LEVEL Secondary 20.15 21.35 18.49 18.10 17.31 16.05 15.24 15.56 15.01 14.16 Source: Ministry of Education TABLE FOR CHART 3.1 Proportion of Seats Held by Women in National Parliament YEAR 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 Seats Held by Women in National Parliament 4 4 4 4 4 6 7 7 7 7 7 11 11 11 11 Total Number of Seats in National Parliament 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 41 41 41 41 Source: CSO Proportion of Seats Held by Women in National Parliament ( percent) 11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 16.7 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 26.8 26.8 26.8 26.8 205 TABLE FOR CHART 4.1 Under-Five Mortality Rate (1990-2008) YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 Rate 16.24 14.08 14.26 16.64 16.87 20.04 19.84 20.27 22.07 22.00 24.00 22.50 27.40 26.90 18.60 17.70 15.50 14.40 16.00 Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 2009 TABLE FOR CHART 4.2 Under-Five Mortality Rate by Sex YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995
 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 Male 18.0 15.7 16.4 18.3 18.5 20.9 22.6 21.6 26.7 22.7 28.0 23.7 31.2 28.9 20.8 19.7 16.6 15.5 17.8 Source: CSO Female 14.4 12.4 12.1 14.9 15.1 19.1 16.9 18.9 17.2 20.1 20.2 20.1 23.4 24.8 16.4 15.6 14.4 13.0 14.1 206 TABLE FOR CHART 4.3 Under-Five Mortality Rate by Administrative Area (2008) Administrative Area Port-of-Spain San Fernando Arima Chaguanas Point Fortin Diego Martin San Juan/Laventille Tunapuna/Piarco Couva/Tabaquite/Talparo
 Mayaro/Rio Claro Sangre Grande Princes Town Penal/Debe Siparia Tobago Port-of-Spain San Fernando Arima Chaguanas Point Fortin Rate 30.51 13.78 9.78 14.06 15.67 18.37 15.91 14.77 13.95 7.49 17.69 16.88 16.17 10.59 16.11 30.51 13.78 9.78 14.06 15.67 Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report TABLE FOR CHART 4.4 Under-Five, Infant and 1-4 Year-Old Mortality Rates YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 Under-Five Mortality Rate 16.2 14.1 14.3 16.6 16.9 20.0 19.8 20.3 22.1 22.0 24.0 22.5 27.4 26.9 18.6 17.7 15.5 14.4 16.0 -- 14.4 -- Infant Mortality Rate 12.7 11.0 10.5 12.2 13.8 17.1 16.2 17.1 18.5 17.6 21.1 18.5 24.2 24.0 16.5 15.4 13.1 11.9 13.2 13.4 12.6 10.7 1-4 Year-Old Mortality Rate 3.6 4.6 3.8 4.4 3.1 2.9 3.6 3.1 3.5 3.9 3.1 3.4 3.1 3.0 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.8 -- -- -- Source: CSO 207 TABLE FOR CHART 4.5 Infant, Neonatal and Post-neonatal Mortality Rates YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 Infant 12.7 11.0 10.5 12.2 13.8 17.1 16.2 17.1 18.5 17.6 21.1 18.5 24.2 24.0 16.5 15.4 13.1 11.9 13.2 13.4 12.6 10.7 Neonatal 9.0 7.2 6.9 8.4 10.6 13.9 12.2 13.1 14.4 13.8 17.1 15.0 20.2 20.4 13.5 11.5 9.4 8.3 9.4 9.8 -- -- Source: CSO Post-neonatal 3.7 3.8 3.6 3.8 3.2 3.3 4.0 4.0 4.2 3.8 4.0 3.5 4.0 3.6 3.0 3.9 3.7 3.6 3.8 3.6 -- -- TABLE FOR CHART 4.6 Top Causes of Infant Deaths (1990 - 2008) YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994
 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 Congenital Anomalies and Chromosomal Abnormalities 46 45 43 49 42 29 36 48 62 34 47 57 84 87 59 62 62 49 59 Other Conditions Originating in the Perinatal Period 35 26 23 37 28 48 31 47 46 53 56 58 85 113 80 55 47 50 56 Respiratory Conditions of the Newborn 80 51 62 72 69 124 132 134 141 163 199 122 163 162 95 83 62 56 79 Source: CSO Population and Vital Statistics Report 208 TABLE FOR CHART 4.7 Top Causes of Deaths of Children, 1-4
 Year-Olds (2004 - 2008) Cause of Death Injury, Poisoning & External Causes Congenital Malformations Diseases of the Nervous System Diseases of the Respiratory System Certain Infectious & Parasitic Diseases Neoplasms Number of Deaths 62 30 30 24 23 22 Percentage of Deaths 28.1 13.6 13.6 10.9 10.4 10.0 Other 191 13.6 Source: CSO Population & Vital Statistics Report EXTENDED TABLE 5.1 Person in Attendance at Live Birth (1999-2008) YEAR 1999 2000 Personnel Type No.
percent No.

percent Skilled Personnel (Doctors & Midwives) 18,158 Other Person 163 99 1 18,077 83 99 1 Total YEAR Personnel Type Skilled Personnel (Doctors & Midwives) Other Person Total YEAR 18,321 100 18,160 100 2001 2002 No.

18,016 62 18,078 percent 99 1 100 No.

16,921 69 16,990 percent 99 1 100 2003 2004 Personnel Type Skilled Personnel (Doctors & Midwives) Other Person Total No.

17,934 55 17,989 percent 99 1 100 No.


17,180 55 17,235 percent 99 1 100 YEAR 2005 2006 Personnel Type Skilled Personnel (Doctors & Midwives) Other Person Total No.

17,213 51 17,264 percent 99 1 100 No.

18,039 51 18,090 percent 99 1 100 YEAR 2007 2008 Personnel Type No.

percent No.
percent Skilled Personnel (Doctors & Midwives) Other Person Total 18,816 73 18,889 Source: CSO 99 1 100 19,795 93 19,888 99 1 100 209 TABLE FOR CHART 5.1 Maternal Mortality Ratio (1990 - 2010) YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 Maternal Mortality Ratio (1990-2010) 54.3 49.2 60.7 66.4 76.2 67.5 38.9 70.4 44.7 38.2 55.1 38.7 29.4 27.8 52.2 34.8 66.3 31.8 55.3 45.7 52.4 Source: CSO (Data for 2009-2010 are provisional estimates) TABLE FOR CHART 5.2 Causes of Maternal Mortality (2004 - 2008) YEAR CAUSE OF MATERNAL MORTALITY TOTAL 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 Total percent Pregnancy with abortive outcome 2 3 3 2 1 11 25 Other Direct Obstetric Deaths 7 3 9 4 10 33 75 Source: CSO 9 6 12 6 11 44 100 210 TABLE FOR CHART 5.3 Maternal Mortality and Age Group of Mothers (2004 - 2008) Cause of Maternal Mortality Age Group of Mothers Pregnancy with abortive outcome Other Direct Obstetric Deaths Total percent 15-19 0 5 5 11 20-24 4 3 7 16 Source: CSO 25-29 1 4 5 11 30-34 5 8 13 30 35-39 0 6 6 14 40-44 1 7 8 18 TABLE FOR CHART 5.4 Occurrence of Live Births (2003 - 2008) YEAR Location of Birth Private Homes Nursing Homes Government Institution Other Place Total YEAR Location of Birth Private Homes Nursing Homes Government Institution Other Place Total YEAR Location of Birth Private Homes Nursing Homes Government Institution Other Place Total 2003 2004 No.
138 2,764 15,076 11 17,989 2005 No.

79 2,688 14,485 12 17,264 2007 No.

137 3,093 15,649 10 18,889 percent 0.77 15.36 83.81 0.06 100 percent 0.46 15.57 83.90 0.07 100 percent 0.73 16.37 82.85 0.05 100 Source: CSO No.

146 2,545 14,516 28 17,235 No.

187 2,792 15,097 14 18,090 No.
162 3,231 16,475 20 19,888 percent 0.85 14.77 84.22 0.16 100 2006 percent 1.03 15.43 83.46 0.08 100 2008 percent 0.81 16.25 82.84 0.10 100 211 TABLE FOR CHART 6.1 New HIV Positive Cases at Public Health Locations (1990 - 2012) YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2004 2003 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 Cases 286 442 613 626 622 683 867 996 964 1121 919 1059 1210 1709 1443 1453 1439 1429 1448 1390 1154 1077 1284 Source: Ministry of Health TABLE FOR CHART 6.2 Number of Deaths Due to AIDS (1990 - 2012) YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 Deaths 105 133 172 200 194 205 259 201 267 249 227 264 244 186 147 121 195 114 87 77 72 42 55 Source: Ministry of Health 212 TABLE FOR CHART 6.3 Proportion of Pregnant Women Receiving ARV Therapy (2005 - 2009) YEAR 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 Percentage 75.0 68.1 79.2 67.3 77.7 Source: Ministry of Health TABLE FOR CHART 6.4 Incidence of Malaria (2008 - 2011) YEAR 2008 2009 2010 2011 Cases 3 2 2 1 Source: Ministry of Health TABLE FOR CHART 6.5 Tuberculosis Death Rate (2006 - 2011) YEAR 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 Rate 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.1 Source: UN Stats Millennium Development Goals 213 TABLE FOR CHART 6.6 Incidence of Dengue Fever (1990 - 2012) YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 Cases 3160 238 642 3060 504 282 3588 2081 2984 1199 2116 2417 6314 2326 583 400 477 884 3832
 2332 4735 6254 2847 Source: Ministry of Health TABLE FOR CHART 6.7 Dengue Mortality Rate (Per 100,000 Mid-year population) YEAR 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 Male 0.78 0.79 1.57 1.41 0.47 0.00 0.15 0.15 0.31 1.22 SEX Female 0.62 1.27 0.16 0.79 0.47 0.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.84 Both Sexes 0.70 1.03 0.87 1.10 0.47 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.15 1.53 Source: CSO 214 TABLE FOR CHART 6.8 Incidence of Diabetes & Hypertension (1996 - 2006) YEAR 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003
 2004 2005 2006 Incidence of Diabetes 1175 1093 1524 1663 1493 1374 1790 1689 2505 2639 2207 2044 2106 2467 2294 1984 Source: CSO Incidence of Hypertension 893 985 1687 1576 2118 2051 1772 1470 2070 2388 2338 2676 2004 2021 2208 2310 TABLE FOR CHART 6.9 Death Rates Associated with Hypertension per 100,000 Mid-year Population (1996 - 2008) YEAR 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 SEX Male 27.86 42.43 34.16 27.93 33.17 35.26 27.98 27.67 31.05 30.04 27.04 26.47 32.91 Female 29.76 39.00 29.24 26.29 32.73 28.82 31.92 28.32 33.73 30.84 36.47 29.86 35.26 Source: CSO Both Sexes 28.81 40.71 31.70 27.11 32.95 32.05 29.94 27.99 32.39 30.44 31.74 28.16 34.08 215 TABLE FOR CHART 6.10 Death Rates Associated with Diabetes per 100,000 Mid-year Population (1996 - 2008) YEAR 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 Male 89.09 83.60 89.33 97.67 107.35 107.35 99.25 111.45 107.53 103.05 97.25 107.87 109.41 SEX Female 91.20 92.10 101.16 105.76 105.35 104.20 100.01 111.09 105.07 112.04 104.94 104.67 107.61 Both Sexes 90.14 87.86 95.25 101.72 101.87 105.77 99.63 111.27 106.30 107.53 101.08 106.28 108.51 Source: CSO TABLE FOR CHART 7.1 Proportion of Land Area Covered by Forests (1996 - 2012) YEAR Forested Area Total Land Area Proportion ( percent) 1996 1997 2000 2003 2005 2010 2011 2012 230.0 230.0 263.7 263.7 226.0 234.7 -- -- 513 513 513 513 513 513 -- -- 44.85 44.85 50.50 44.85 44.10 45.70 48.00 48.00 Source: Ministry of the
 Environment and Water Resources TABLE FOR CHART 7.2 CO2 Emissions per Capita (Metric Tonnes) (1990 - 2009) YEAR CO2 Emissions per Capita (Metric Tonnes) 1990 1992 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 Source: Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources 13.9 17.0 17.7 18.9 19.2 20.6 21.3 23.6 21.7 24.3 26.4 35.3 35.7 216 TABLE FOR CHART 7.3 Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODP Tonnes) 1990 - 2011 YEAR Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997
Source: United Nations Environment Programme Ozone Secretariat TABLE FOR CHART 7.4 Proportion of Dwelling Units Using an Improved Drinking Water Source YEAR 1990 2000 2011 Public Pipe Into Dwelling Public Pipe Into Yard Private Pipe Into Dwelling WATER SOURCE 55.0 60.0 76.0 12.1 8.8 8.9 Source: CSO 4.2 4.5 3.9 TABLE FOR CHART 7.5 Proportion of Dwelling Units with Access to a Chlorinated Water Supply YEAR 1990 2000 2011 WATER SOURCE Public Pipe Into Dwelling 55.0 60.5 76.0 Public Stand Pipe 15.0 9.6 2.7 Public Pipe Into Yard 12.1 8.8 8.9 Truck-Borne 4.3 2.1 1.1 TOTAL 86.4 81.0 88.7 Source: CSO 217 TABLE FOR CHART 7.6 Proportion of the Population Using an Improved Sanitation Facility YEAR 1990 2000 2011 SANITATION FACILITY Total with Water Closets 57.7 35.7 22.0 Septic Tank (Soakaway/Not Linked) 35.7 50.2 63.0 WC Linked to Sewer 22.0 21.7 25.1 Source: CSO TABLE FOR CHART 8.1 Debt Service as a Percentage of Exports of Goods and Services YEAR 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 Debt Service Ratio ( percent) 9.8 8.0 7.8 3.8 4.4 3.5 4.6 1.8 2.3 1.1 0.9 4.2 1.2 1.1 1.3 Source: Trinidad and Tobago's 2012 IMF Article IV Reports 218